Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutHighgate Lift Station - SSDSSCOPE OF SUPPLY AND DESIGN SUBMITTAL FOR: 18240 North Bank Road | Roseburg, OR 97470 Phone: (541) 496-9678 | Fax: (541) 496-0804 bcooper@romtecutilities.com HIGHGATE COMMUNITY (BAKERSFIELD, CA) DATE: REVISION #: 6/14/2019 4 - For the Record By signing the Submittal Approval & Notice to Proceed below, I approve the products and services as specified in the Romtec Utilities Scope of Supply and Design Submittal. I understand that any change(s) requested after signing and returning the submittal approval and notice to proceed will result in a change order and cause delays for the system delivery. Romtec Utilities will produce the products approved in the Scope of Supply and Design Submittal and deliver them to the project site on or after the date requested below. Romtec Utilities will confirm the delivery date once the system has been put into production. Please initial in the approved boxes for each submittal section and sign below. SECTION APPROVED APPROVED WITH COMMENTS 1. SCOPE OF SUPPLY 2. PLANS 3. MECHANICAL 4. ELECTRICAL 5. INSTALLATION INFORMATION & FIELD SERVICES 6. WARRANTY I want Romtec Utilities to deliver the system to the project site to be installed on the following date: CUSTOMER: (Print name & Company) CUSTOMER: (Signature) INDEX 1. SCOPE OF SUPPLY 1.01 INTRODUCTION TO THE SSDS 1.02 DESIGN CRITERIA 2. PLANS 2.01 PROPOSED SITE LAYOUT 2.02 MECHANICAL PLANS 2.03 ELECTRICAL PLANS 3. MECHANICAL 3.01 WET WELL 3.01.1 PRODUCTION DRAWING(S) 3.01.2 DATA SHEETS 3.02 PUMPS 3.02.1 DATA SHEETS 3.03 VALVE VAULT 3.03.1 PRODUCTION DRAWING(S) 3.03.2 DATA SHEETS 3.04 ODOR CONTROL 3.04.1 PASSIVE ODOR CONTROL 4. ELECTRICAL 4.01 CONTROL PANEL SCOPE OF SUPPLY 4.02 LEVEL SENSORS 4.02.1 DATA SHEETS 4.03 GENERATOR 4.03.1 SIZING REPORT 4.03.2 GENSET DRAWINGS 4.03.3 ANCHORING 4.03.4 ATS 4.03.5 CERTIFICATES 5. INSTALLER INFORMATION & FIELD SERVICES 5.01 MECHANICAL INFORMATION & RECOMMENDATIONS 5.01.1 INSTALL REPORT 5.02 ELECTRICAL INFORMATION & RECOMMENDATIONS 5.03 START-UP TESTING & TRAINING SERVICES 5.03.1 PRE-START UP CHECKLIST 5.03.2 FIELD START-UP REPORT 6. WARRANTY 6.01 WARRANTY 6.02 STRUCTURAL & MECHANICAL DISCLAIMERS 6.03 ELECTRICAL DISCLAIMERS 6.04 SERVICES DISCLAIMERS 1.SCOPE OF SUPPLY This section is structured as follows: 1.01 INTRODUCTION TO THE SSDS 1.02 DESIGN CRITERIA 1.01 INTRODUCTION TO THE SSDS Rev. 2-27-18 1.Romtec Utilities is pleased to offer this Scope of Supply and Design Submittal (SSDS). All parties with aninterest in this project must carefully read and comprehend the information contained herein. Please contact Romtec Utilities with any questions or comments regarding this document. The SSDS includes thefollowing sections: a.Scope of Supply This section details what Romtec Utilities is supplying for this project in both materials and services. The basis of design for the Romtec Utilities system is also explained in this section. b.Plans Romtec Utilities’ proposed site layout for the supplied equipment is provided in this section for review. c.Mechanical This section details the mechanical design of this system. d. Electrical This section details the electrical design of the system that is being supplied by Romtec Utilities. e.Installation Information & Field Services This section provides information that the installing contractor will need to successfully install the system. It also details the field services that Romtec Utilities is providing for both the installingcontractor and the customer.. f.Warranty This section includes all warranty and limitations information for Romtec Utilities products and services. 2.The Romtec Utilities Scope of Supply & Design Submittal is: a.Based on customer supplied design criteria Romtec Utilities has designed the system described herein to meet the specific design criteria provided to Romtec Utilities by the customer and/or the customer’s representative. Thisinformation is detailed on the Design Criteria Form included in the SSDS. Romtec Utilities’ supplyof products and services is based exclusively on the design criteria. b.Romtec Utilities’ complete offering This document details Romtec Utilities’ complete offering for this project. There is no otherdocument that contains this information. This document supersedes all other documents, writtencorrespondence and verbal communication regarding Romtec Utilities’ scope of supply for products and services. 3.Below are the typical steps in the process to design, approve, produce, deliver, install andstart-up a Romtec Utilities system: a.Romtec Utilities produces the Scope of Supply and Design Submittal and sends to the Customer for review. b.Customer distributes Scope of Supply and Design Submittal to all project stakeholders, gatherscomments from Stakeholders, and sends written comments to Romtec Utilities. c.Romtec Utilities then responds in writing to all comments and provides any price changes forreview and approval by the Customer. d.Romtec Utilities then revises the Scope of Supply and Design Submittal based on the commentresponses and approved price changes and then resubmits for review. Review and comment process continues until there are no further comments. e.Customer signs and returns formal approval of the SSDS with a requested delivery date toRomtec Utilities. Romtec Utilities begins system manufacturing and sends projected delivery date to customer. f.Customer’s contractor prepares project site for installation of system. g.Romtec Utilities delivers system to project site and Customer’s contractor installs undergroundportion of system. Customer’s electrical contractor performs electrical construction/installation. 1.01 INTRODUCTION TO THE SSDS Rev. 2-27-18 h.Romtec Utilities performs system start-up, testing and training and provides O&M manual to thecustomer. Warranty period commences. 4.Review and Approval a.How to make comments and request changes Comments and/or requests for changes to this document must be submitted to Romtec Utilities ina written document, either MS Word or MS Excel. Please supply a list of your comments and change requests along with a copy of any marked up drawing, edited specification or any otherpart of the document to which you are commenting or requesting a change. All redline commentsmust be numbered on the drawing or specification and have a corresponding written explanation on the written document. Romtec Utilities will promptly review your comments and/or changerequests, and will contact you to ensure complete understanding. Revisions to the SSDS for thisproject are made at the discretion of Romtec Utilities. b.Approval is acceptance of this supply and design By approving this document, the customer accepts the products and services identified herein tobe supplied by Romtec Utilities. To approve the design, you must check, initial and sign whererequested on the Approval form included at the beginning of this document and return it to Romtec Utilities. The customer also agrees that, following approval of this document there can be no modificationto the products and services described herein without a written change order issued to RomtecUtilities by the customer. The customer acknowledges that changes will incur additional charges and may cause delays in Romtec Utilities’ delivery of the products and services described herein. 5.Autodesk Design Review Download Procedure a.Included with your Romtec Utilities SSDS is a file with the extension DWF. The DWF file is a viewable 3D model of your system. The model is meant to help visually understand the system and individual components. To view the file, download the free software following the procedurebelow. b.Go to: www.autodesk.com c.Click on: Autodesk Design Review Free tab located on the right of the page d.Select the correct language and click Download Now e.Select Save File f.Go to the folder you downloaded the program to and double click the file AutodeskDesignRevSetup.exe g.Click on Run h.Follow the Installation Tips on the screen i.To view and manipulate your .DWF file double click on the .DWF file Highgate Community - PRELIMINARY DESIGN - 4-22-19.xlsx PROJECT INFO PACKAGE/STARTUP Job Name:Offering: Company:Mechanical: Contact:Pumps: Job Type:Control Panel: Water Type/Source:Generator: Import/Domestic:Advisor/Startup: FLOW RATE Peak Inflow:450 GPM 353.50Pumping Rate:549 GPM (of single pump)Static Head:29.7 Feet 353.50TDH:49.5 FeetTDH Calcs:RU Calcs ACTIVE VOLUMEMax Pump Starts:8.00 Starts/HrCycle Time:7.50 Minutes 349.00 Active Volume:1029.38 Gallons Active Volume:137.61 Cu Feet Well Shape:Round Well Diameter:8 Feet Well Dimensions:N/A N/A Cross-Section Area:50.27 Sq Feet Min. Depth Required:2.74 Feet Active Depth:2.80 Feet STORAGE VOLUME (if required) Time:Minutes 326.00 Flow Rate:GPM 323.10 Volume:0.00 Gallons Volume:0.00 Cu. Feet Min. Depth Required:0.00 Feet 322.60 Storage Depth:Feet 320.30 ON-SITE POWER Power: FORCE MAIN FM Info:New Single FM 314.50 Length:474.44 Feet FM Discharge:347.31 Feet 313.33 FM High Point:349.00 Feet (1)(2) Nominal ID:6" Type/Rating: INFLUENT PIPING (1)(2) Influent Invert:326 Influent Size:10"Type:PVC (IPS) Mechanical & Electrical Complete System All by Romtec Utilities By Romtec Utilities By Romtec Utilities By Romtec UtilitiesWastewater (Sewage) New Station Blaine Neptune McIntosh Highgate Community Import Acceptable C900 CL 150 480V / 3-Phase DESIGN CRITERIA Note: Image is a preliminary representation of the pumping system. Elevations shown are the primary factors used for sizing the wet well. Backup levels not shown. Additional (or fewer) level settings may be required. BACKUP PUMPS START BACKUP PUMPS STOP BACKUP HL ALARM HIGH LEVEL ALARM NON PRE-RO PUMP START PRE-RO PUMP START NON PRE-RO PUMP STOP PRE-RO PUMP STOP 322.85 322.10 319.30 315.50 PROJECT INFORMATION Job Name: Date:3/6/2019 ELEVATIONS Unit CONSTANTS DescriptionFM High Point Elev:349.00 ft k 1.318 Configures calculations for Imperial units. Lead Stop Elev:315.50 ft GPM/CFS 448.831 Flow conversion factor. g 32.174 Gravitational Acceleration PUMPING RATE*Unit 2g 64.348 2x Gravity Total Pumping Rate:545 GPM *Estimated operating point on curve.Pumps on Duty:1 qty SYSTEM PIPE INFO Wet Well Valve Vault Force Main Unit Description Length:40 15 474.44 ft Length of this section of pipe Material:Stainless Ductile Iron PVC name Pipe MaterialClass/Rating:SCH 40 Class 53 C900 DR18 name Pipe Class and/or Rating C Factor (Old):100 110 130 none Smoothness Coefficient, Hazen-Williams Nominal ID:6 6 6 in Nominal Pipe Size True ID:6.065 6.22 6.08 in Actual inside diameter of pipe True ID:0.505 0.518 0.507 ft Actual inside diameter of pipeSectional Area:0.201 0.211 0.202 sqft Cross sectional area of pipe Flow Rate:545 545 545 GPM Flow rate through this section of pipe Flow Rate:1.214 1.214 1.214 CFS Flow rate through this section of pipe Velocity:6.1 5.8 6.0 ft/s Flow velocity in this section of pipe MAJOR LOSS Wet Well Valve Vault Force Main Unit Hydraulic Diameter:0.126 0.130 0.127 ft Pipe ID divided by 4, used by Hazen-Williams formula V/kC:0.0459 0.0397 0.0351 none Friction coefficient used by Hazen-Williams formula Major Head Loss:1.49 0.41 10.72 ft H2O Head loss due to frictional forces in the pipe FITTINGS Wet Well Valve Vault Force Main K Value Discharge Elbow:1 0.5 Elbow, 45deg:7 0.15 Elbow, 90deg:1 1 0.3Tee:1 0.6 Shut Off Valve:1 1 Check Valve:1 1.5 Outlet:1 1 Reducer:0.5 Total K:0.8 3.4 2.05 none Head loss coefficient used in minor loss formula Minor Head Loss:0.46 1.75 1.16 ft H2O Head loss due to fittings in the pipe CALCULATED DUTY POINT (PER PUMP)Total Major Loss:12.62 ft H2O Total Minor Loss:3.36 ft H2O Static Head Loss:33.50 ft H2O Pumping Rate:545 GPM Total Head Loss:49.48 ft H2O Note: Grey cells contain formulas. Do not edit. HIGHGATE COMMUNITY Note on Hazen-Williams: H.W. is an empirical approximation of head loss in piping systems where the flow of tepid water is below ~15 ft/s. While not as accurate as scientific formulas for determining head loss, H.W. is much less complex and adequately accurate for civil engineering purposes. Hazen-Williams Equation: V = k C R.63 S.54 Where V is the flow velocity, k is a unit conversion factor, C is a smoothness coefficient, R is the hydraulic radius, and S is the head loss per length of pipe. This calculation sheet uses this formula, solving for head loss. Minor head loss equation: hm = K V2 / 2g Comment 3. Additionally, with the proposed volume per cycle of about 1125 gallons and a proposed flowrate of 450 gpm the cycle would complete in about 3 minutes.Yes, assuming that the inflow filled the wet well to the pump start point and then inflow stopped, the pumps would run for about 3 minutes. Note: Continuous or near continuous inflow at some level at or below the peak inflow rate is assumed for this wet well, meaning that the situation described above is highly unlikely.In other words, water will continue to flow into the wet well while the pumps are running, meaning that they will generally run longer than 3 minutes. Note: The 7.5 minute cycle time is the time calculated between pump starts. This includes the time it takes to pump down the wet well (while inflow continues) to the shut off point, and then for the wet well to fill back up to the pump start point. Special Note: The calculated cycle time of 7.5 minutes is based on a continuous inflow of 225 gpm while the pump is running. The worst case scenario is exactly half of the peak inflow (225 being half of 450) because it results in the maximum number of starts per hour (pumps shutting on and off which creates heat in the motors). SYSTEM PIPING JOB NAME: DATE: ELEVATIONS: New Pipe Old Pipe Point at valve vault:349.00 Water @ Start Water @ Stop NON Pre Ro Start:322.10 Pump Flow:545.0 545.0 PRE RO Lead Stop:315.50 Static Head:26.90 33.50 ft Total Flow:545 gpm TDH:39.7 49.5 ft Duty Pumps:1 Est. Efficiency:50% Total Pumps:2 Est. HP:10.9 13.6 HP PIPE MATERIAL AND SIZE Wet Well Valve Vault Meter Vault FM1 FM2 FM3 Length:40 15 474.44 Material:Stainless Ductile Iron PVC Class:SCH 40 Class 53 C900 DR18 Nom. ID:6" 6" 6" True ID:6.065 6.220 6.080 New C:130 130 150 Old C:100 110 130 Section GPM:545.0 545.0 545.0 V (ft/s):6.05 5.75 6.02 PIPE FITTINGS Wet Well Valve Vault Meter Vault FM1 FM2 FM3 Disch Ell:1 45 Ell:7 90 Ell:11 Tee:1 Valve:1 Check:1 Outlet:1 Other (K=.5): Total K 0.8 3.4 0.0 2.1 0.0 0.0 FRICTION LOSSES Wet Well Valve Vault Meter Vault FM1 FM2 FM3 Major Loss_New:0.92 0.30 8.23 Major Loss_Old:1.49 0.41 10.72 Minor Loss:0.46 1.75 1.16 Total Friction Loss New:12.81 Total Friction Loss Old:15.98 Highgate Community 3/6/19 0. 0 20 . 0 40 . 0 60 . 0 80 . 0 10 0 . 0 12 0 . 0 0 2 0 0 4 0 0 6 0 0 8 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 H e a d   ( f t ) Fl o w   ( g p m   p e r   p u m p ) Pu m p   D u t y   P o i n t s E5 K ‐ L Si n g l e   P u m p Tw o   P u m p s No   C u r v e Co n d i t i o n   A Re q u i r e d   D u t y   P o i n t Co n d i t i o n   A :   S i n g l e   p u m p . N e w   P i p e .   W a t e r   l e v e l   a t   L e a d   S t a r t .   T hi s   a s s u m e s   t h e   l o w e s t   T D H   a   p u m p   m a y   s e e . No t e :   T h e   i n t e r s e c t i o n   o f   t h e   p u m p   c u r v e   a n d   a   s y s t e m   c u r v e   d e t er m i n e s   w h e r e   e a c h   i n d i v i d u a l   p u m p   w i l l   o p e r a t e . 0. 0 20 . 0 40 . 0 60 . 0 80 . 0 10 0 . 0 12 0 . 0 0 2 0 0 4 0 0 6 0 0 8 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 1 4 0 0 1 6 0 0 H e a d   ( f t ) Fl o w   ( g p m   s y s t e m   t o t a l ) Sy s t e m   D u t y   P o i n t s E5 K ‐ L Tw o   P u m p s No   C u r v e Si m p l e x   S y s t e m Du p l e x   S y s t e m No   C u r v e Required Duty Point No t e :   T h i s   c h a r t   s h o w s   t h e   t o t a l   s y s t e m f l o w   r a t e   w h e n   m u l t i p l e   pu m p s   a r e   r u n n i n g .   P u m p   r a t e   i s   f o u n d   w h e r e   t h e   m a t c h i n g   c o l o r e d curves  in t e r s e c t .   F o r   e x a m p l e ,   B l u e   a n d   d a s h e d   B l u e   f o r   t w o   p u m p s   i n   o pe r a t i o n . Fl o w : 5 4 5 TD H : 5 0 Lo w   W a t e r : 3 1 5 On e   P u m p   R u n n i n g St a t i o n   1 S t a t i o n   2 D e s c r i p t i o n Le n g t h (f t ) Pip e   I D (i n ) Flo w (g p m ) Fl o w (c f s ) Ve l o c i t y (fp s ) Ve l o c i t y   He a d (f t ) C HW Sl o p e (f t / f t ) Hf Fr i c t i o n   L o s s (ft ) Km ,   M i s c .   Lo s s   C o e f f . Hm , Mi s c .   L o s s (f t ) HG L St a r t HGL EndGround Elev.Pressure at Ground 0+ 0 0 0 + 0 0 P u m p   S u c t i o n 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 31 5 3 1 5 . 0 0 0 3 5 3 . 5 ‐ 1 6 . 6 9 1 0+ 0 0 0 + 0 0 P u m p   L i f t 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 31 5 . 0 0 0 3 6 5 . 0 0 0 3 5 3 . 5 4 . 9 8 6 0+ 0 0 0 + 0 0 D i s c h a r g e   E l b o w 6 . 0 6 5 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 6 . 0 5 0 . 5 7 1 0 0 0 . 0 3 7 0 . 0 0 0 0 . 5 0 . 2 8 5 3 6 5 . 0 0 0 3 6 4 . 7 1 5 3 5 3 . 5 4 . 8 6 2 0+ 0 0 0 + 4 0 V e r t i c a l   P i p i n g 4 0 6 . 0 6 5 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 6 . 0 5 0 . 5 7 1 0 0 0 . 0 3 7 1 . 4 8 7 0 0 . 0 0 0 3 6 4 . 7 1 5 3 6 3 . 2 2 8 3 5 3 . 5 4 . 2 1 7 0+ 4 0 0 + 4 0 E l b o w   ( 9 0 d e g )   i n   W W 6 . 0 6 5 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 6 . 0 5 0 . 5 7 1 0 0 0 . 0 3 7 0 . 0 0 0 0 . 3 0. 1 7 1 3 6 3 . 2 2 8 3 6 3 . 0 5 7 3 5 3 . 5 4 . 1 4 3 0+ 4 0 0 + 5 0 H o r i z o n t a l   P i p i n g 1 0 6 . 0 6 5 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 6 . 0 5 0 . 5 7 1 0 0 0 . 0 3 7 0 . 3 7 2 0 0 . 00 0 3 6 3 . 0 5 7 3 6 2 . 6 8 5 3 5 3 . 5 3 . 9 8 2 0+ 5 0 0 + 5 0 C h e c k   a n d   P l u g   V a l v e s 6 . 2 2 0 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 5 . 7 5 0 . 5 1 1 0 0 0 . 0 3 3 0 . 0 0 0 2 .5 1 . 2 8 7 3 6 2 . 6 8 5 3 6 1 . 3 9 9 3 5 3 . 5 3 . 4 2 4 0+ 5 0 0 + 5 8 P i p i n g   t o   M a n i f o l d 8 6 . 2 2 0 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 5 . 7 5 0 . 5 1 1 0 0 0 . 0 3 3 0 . 2 6 3 0 0 . 00 0 3 6 1 . 3 9 9 3 6 1 . 1 3 6 3 5 3 . 5 3 . 3 1 0 0+ 5 8 0 + 6 2 F o r c e   M a i n ,   P 1 3 . 6 9 6 . 0 8 0 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 6 . 0 2 0 . 5 6 1 3 0 0 . 0 2 3 0 . 0 8 3 1 0 . 5 64 3 6 1 . 1 3 6 3 6 0 . 4 8 9 3 5 3 . 5 3 . 0 3 0 0+ 6 2 0 + 6 2 E l b o w   ( 9 0 d e g ) 6 . 2 2 0 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 5 . 7 5 0 . 5 1 1 0 0 0 . 0 3 3 0 . 0 0 0 0 . 3 0 . 1 5 4 3 60 . 4 8 9 3 6 0 . 3 3 4 3 5 3 . 5 2 . 9 6 3 0+ 6 2 0 + 6 8 F o r c e   M a i n ,   P 2 5 . 9 1 6 . 0 8 0 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 6 . 0 2 0 . 5 6 1 3 0 0 . 0 2 3 0 . 1 3 4 0 . 0 0 0 3 6 0 . 3 3 4 3 6 0 . 2 0 1 3 5 3 . 5 2 . 9 0 5 0+ 6 8 0 + 6 8 E l b o w   ( 4 5 d e g ) 6 . 2 2 0 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 5 . 7 5 0 . 5 1 1 0 0 0 . 0 3 3 0 . 0 0 0 0 . 1 5 0 . 0 7 7 36 0 . 2 0 1 3 6 0 . 1 2 3 3 5 3 . 5 2 . 8 7 1 0+ 6 8 0 + 8 2 F o r c e   M a i n ,   P 3 1 4 . 2 6 . 0 8 0 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 6 . 0 2 0 . 5 6 1 3 0 0 . 0 2 3 0 . 3 2 1 0 . 0 0 0 3 6 0 . 1 2 3 3 5 9 . 8 0 2 3 5 3 . 5 2 . 7 3 2 0+ 8 2 0 + 8 2 E l b o w   ( 4 5 d e g ) 6 . 2 2 0 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 5 . 7 5 0 . 5 1 1 0 0 0 . 0 3 3 0 . 0 0 0 0 . 1 5 0 . 0 7 7 35 9 . 8 0 2 3 5 9 . 7 2 5 3 5 3 . 5 2 . 6 9 9 0+ 8 2 1 + 4 3 F o r c e   M a i n ,   P 4 6 1 . 1 5 6 . 0 8 0 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 6 . 0 2 0 . 5 6 1 3 0 0 . 0 2 3 1 . 3 8 2 0 . 0 00 3 5 9 . 7 2 5 3 5 8 . 3 4 3 3 5 3 . 5 2 . 1 0 0 1+ 4 3 1 + 4 3 E l b o w   ( 4 5 d e g ) 6 . 2 2 0 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 5 . 7 5 0 . 5 1 1 0 0 0 . 0 3 3 0 . 0 0 0 0 . 1 5 0 . 0 7 7 35 8 . 3 4 3 3 5 8 . 2 6 6 3 5 3 . 5 2 . 0 6 6 1+ 4 3 2 + 0 5 F o r c e   M a i n ,   P 5 6 2 . 1 1 6 . 0 8 0 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 6 . 0 2 0 . 5 6 1 3 0 0 . 0 2 3 1 . 4 0 4 0 . 0 00 3 5 8 . 2 6 6 3 5 6 . 8 6 2 3 5 3 . 5 1 . 4 5 8 2+ 0 5 2 + 0 5 E l b o w   ( 4 5 d e g ) 6 . 2 2 0 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 5 . 7 5 0 . 5 1 1 0 0 0 . 0 3 3 0 . 0 0 0 0 . 1 5 0 . 0 7 7 35 6 . 8 6 2 3 5 6 . 7 8 5 3 5 3 . 5 1 . 4 2 4 2+ 0 5 3 + 6 4 F o r c e   M a i n ,   P 6 1 5 9 . 2 7 6 . 0 8 0 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 6 . 0 2 0 . 5 6 1 3 0 0 . 0 2 3 3 . 6 0 0 0 . 00 0 3 5 6 . 7 8 5 3 5 3 . 1 8 5 3 5 3 . 5 ‐ 0 . 1 3 7 3+ 6 4 5 + 3 3 F o r c e   M a i n ,   P 7 1 6 9 6 . 0 8 0 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 6 . 0 2 0 . 5 6 1 3 0 0 . 0 2 3 3 . 8 2 0 0 . 0 0 0 35 3 . 1 8 5 3 4 9 . 3 6 5 3 5 3 . 5 ‐ 1 . 7 9 3 5+ 3 3 5 + 3 3 D i s c h a r g e   i n t o   M H 6 . 0 8 0 5 4 5 1 . 2 1 6 . 0 2 0 . 5 6 1 3 0 0 . 0 2 3 0 . 0 0 0 0 . 5 0 . 28 2 3 4 9 . 3 6 5 3 4 9 . 0 8 3 3 5 3 . 5 ‐ 1 . 9 1 5 31 0 . 0 0 0 32 0 . 0 0 0 33 0 . 0 0 0 34 0 . 0 0 0 35 0 . 0 0 0 36 0 . 0 0 0 37 0 . 0 0 0 ‐0 + 2 0 0 + 8 0 1 + 8 0 2 + 8 0 3 + 8 0 4 + 8 0 5 + 8 0 HG L 2. PLANS This section is structured as follows: 2.01 PROPOSED SITE LAYOUT 2.02 MECHANICAL PLANS 2.03 ELECTRICAL PLANS 1. Customer’s site plan with the proposed equipment layout to scale by Romtec Utilities. a. Romtec Utilities’ scale layout of the supplied equipment on the customer’s site plan is a very valuable tool. It allows Romtec Utilities to confirm that the supplied equipment will fit within the space provided for the system. Romtec Utilities can also review the site plan and equipment layout for any issues regarding the system design, influent lines and/or force main. b. In order to provide this service the customer must provide Romtec Utilities with the site plan in CAD. All liability for all errors and/or omissions related to the equipment layout are the responsibility of the customer and/or their Engineer. 2. The following site design scope is not provided by Romtec Utilities. This information is the responsibility of the owner and/or site design engineer. a. Grading b. Wiring & conduit layout c. Fencing & paving d. Site lighting e. Site utilities (water, power, etc.) f. SCADA antenna (if required) Note: The suggested layout of the Romtec Utilities equipment follows this page. This layout will be provided on the customer’s site plan if it has been provided by the customer in CAD. If the site plan has not provided, Romtec Utilities will provide a proposed layout in blank space. WARNING! Romtec Utilities has specifically called out the cable lengths for all pumps and level sensing devices on the data sheets found in this SSDS and on the proposed site layout. The reviewer must consider the distance from the control panel to the pumps and level sensors. If the distance to the panel is greater than the cable lengths, a junction box will be necessary. Unless otherwise stated, Romtec Utilities is not supplying any junction boxes. MECHANICAL SHEET OF 6 1 R E V I S I O N H I S T O R Y V E R I F Y S C A L E D R A W I N G H A S B E E N F O R M A T T E D F O R 3 4 x 2 2 S H E E T . B A R E Q U A L S O N E I N C H I F N O T O N E I N C H O N T H I S S H E E T , A D J U S T S C A L E S A C C O R D I N G L Y 0 1 " 1 8 2 4 0 N O R T H B A N K R O A D R O S E B U R G , O R E G O N 9 7 4 7 0 P H O N E : (5 4 1 ) 4 9 6 -9 6 7 8 W W W .R O M T E C U T I L I T I E S .C O M H I G H G A T E C O M M U N I T Y B A K E R S F I E L D , C A D S N : D R N : C K D : D A T E : ‹ 2018 ROMTEC INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. THESE PLANS AND DRAWINGS MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, ADAPTED, OR FURTHER DISTRIBUTED, AND NO COMPONENTS MAY BE CONSTRUCTED FROM THESE PLANS, WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF ROMTEC, INC. 1 R E V D A T E D E S C R I P T I O N B Y P U M P S T A T I O N A S S E M B L Y G E N E R A L N O T E S C O M P O N E N T D R A W I N G ACCEPTED PUMP PERFORMANCE STANDARDS A. ROMTEC UTILITIES HAS SELECTED A PUMP OR PUMPS FOR THIS SYSTEM TO MEET THE DESIGN CRITERIA. THE PUMP PERFORMANCE CURVE(S) SHOW THE PUMP ACHIEVING A PUMPING RATE (GPM) AT A SPECIFIC TOTAL DYNAMIC HEAD (TDH). THE INDUSTRY STANDARDS FOR MEETING THE TARGET POINT ARE AS FOLLOWS: B. THE HYDRAULIC INSTITUTE HAS A LEVEL A AND LEVEL B ACCEPTANCE. LEVEL A ALLOWS +10% FLOW AT THE RATED TDH, OR +8% TDH AT THE RATED FLOW WITH NO NEGATIVE TOLERANCE. LEVEL B DOES HAVE SOME MINUS TOLERANCE: +/-5% OF RATED FLOW AT RATED TDH OR +5/-3% OF RATED TDH AT RATED FLOW. C. THE PUMPS SHOULD PERFORM WITHIN THIS RANGE AS LONG AS THE TDH PROVIDED BY THE CUSTOMER FOR DESIGN IS TRUE IN THE FIELD. WHEN ROMTEC UTILITIES CALCULATES THE TDH USING CUSTOMER SUPPLIED DOCUMENTS (FORCE MAIN PROFILES, ETC.) AND THE FIELD CONDITIONS DIFFER FROM THE PLANS, ROMTEC UTILITIES CANNOT BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR PUMP PERFORMANCE ISSUES TIED TO CHANGES IN THE CALCULATED TO ACTUAL TDH. FINAL CONCRETE DIMENSIONS A. ACTUAL DIMENSIONS WILL BE WITHIN +/- 0.5" FOR MAJOR DIMENSIONS (HEIGHT, LENGTH, WIDTH, CORE LOCATIONS, WALL THICKNESS, ETC) OF THE APPROVED PRODUCTION DRAWING. ROMTEC UTILITIES WILL NOT ACCEPT ANY COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH FIELD ADJUSTMENTS OR ENGINEERED PLAN REVISIONS BASED ON SLIGHT CHANGES TO CONCRETE DIMENSIONS IN THE FIELD. NOTE: IT IS NOT POSSIBLE FOR CONCRETE PRECASTERS TO CAST BARRELS, BASES AND TOP SLABS TO EXACT DIMENSIONS MEASURED IN HUNDREDTHS OF AN INCH. THE PRODUCTION DRAWINGS FOR THE PRECAST CONCRETE INCLUDED IN THE SUBMITTAL SHOW DIMENSIONS TO THE 0.01", BUT IT IS NOT REALISTIC TO CAST CONCRETE TO THESE EXACT DIMENSIONS. B. ALL CONCRETE JOINTS UST BE CLEANED PRIOR TO APPLYING BUTYL SEALANT AND JOINT WRAP. OUTFALL DESIGN A. ROMTEC UTILITIES IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DESIGN OF THE OUTFALL STRUCTURE AT THE END OF THE FORCE MAIN. ROMTEC UTILITIES HAS NOT REVIEWED THE SIZE OF THE OUTFALL STRUCTURE TO MAKE SURE IT IS ADEQUATE FOR THE PUMPING RATE COMING FROM THE ROMTEC UTILITIES SYSTEM. THIS DESIGN AND REVIEW IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OWNER AND/OR THEIR REPRESENTATIVE. B. ANY ISSUES WITH THE OUTFALL STRUCTURE DURING START-UP AND OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF OTHERS. SECTION E-E SCALE 1 / 42 SECTION F-F SCALE 1 / 42 ISO VIEW SCALE 1 / 48 SECTION G-G SCALE 1 / 42 E E F F PARTS LIST DESCRIPTIONSTOCK NUMBERQTYITEM BASE SLAB ASSEMBLY10-CB00000011 BASE - WW - 8ft DIA x 48in - AMERON10-CB08480011.1 GROUT RING - 8ft DIA - 8in X 8in10-GR08000011.2 GROUT RING - 8ft DIA - HIDROSTAL - 800 BASIN10-GR08800H11.3 COATING - INTERIOR - 8ft DIA - GROUT RING11-LC0800IN11.4 PREROSTAL 800 BASIN11-LC80HYDR11.5 ADAPTER - HIDROSTAL - PUMP BASE PLATE31-ADE5KLHS21.6 DISCHARGE ELBOW - 6in x 5in - HIDROSTAL - E5K-L31-EL0504HS21.7 ANCHOR KIT - 316SS - DISCHARGE ELBOW31-HW00AKS621.8 FLANGE ADAPTER - 6in - ROMAC ALPHA44-AD06RMAL21.9 WELDING - 8ft DIA - AMERON11-AM08WELD12 COATING - EXTERIOR - 8ft DIA11-LC0800EX13 BARREL - 8ft DIA x 4ft H - AMERON12-CR0848A014 BARREL - 8ft DIA x 5ft H - AMERON12-CR0860A065 TOP SLAB ASSEMBLY14-CT00000016 CABLE TRAY - 8ft - 24.4375in13-CA08999916.1 DISCONNECT STAND - SS - 30in x 30in x 8in13-DS3030SS16.2 HATCH - H20 - 8ft - DUPLEX13-HH08HDDE16.3 VENT - ALUMINUM - FLUSH13-VT0000AL16.4 TOP SLAB - 8ft DIA - H20 - AMERON14-CT08HDDH16.5 DEFLECTOR PANEL ASSEMBLY - 8ft DIA x 6ft15-DP08060017 BRACKET - SS GUILLOTINE SET15-BR00SSGU27.1 GUILLOTINE CABLE ASSEMBLY - 29ft TOTAL LENGTH15-DB00CAGU17.2 HDPE - 24in x 24in - BLACK - INSPECTION COVER50-AC00HDPE17.3 SHEET - HDPE - 4ft x 8ft - BLACK50-AC00HDPE17.4 ANGLE - 316SS 11GA FORMED (8ftww)50-AN080GS612ft7.5 BOLT KIT - UPPER GUIDE BAR BRACKET17-AC38000B28 BRACKET - 316SS - INTERMEDIATE GUIDE BAR - 1.5in - 316SS 17-IG1HS6HS49 BRACKET - 316SS - UPPER GUIDE BAR - 1.5in - 316SS17-UG1HS6HS210 DISCHARGE PIPE BRACKET - 8ft WW - 6in DI PIPE18-BRXXXXXX311 PUMP SHIPPING CRATE30-PU000000112 PUMP - HIDROSTAL - E5K-L - 14.8HP - 50ft CABLE30-PU0000HS212.2 ADAPTER BRACKET - GUIDE RAIL - HIDROSTAL31-ADBR00HS112.3 SPOOL PIECE ADAPTER - HIDROSTAL - 8.5in31-ADE5KLHS112.4 CORD GRIP - .750in - .990 - SS32-CGA000SS212.7 CORD GRIP - .63in - .74in - SS32-CGH000SS212.8 LIFTING RING - PUMP32-PL000000112.9 LIFTING ASSEMBLY - HIDROSTAL32-AC0000EB212.14 PIPE - 316SS SCH40 - 1.5in DIA ( 4 @ 14ft, 8 @ 10ft, GUIDE RAILS) 40-PP1H00S6136 ft13 COUPLING - 6in - ROMAC ALPHA44-CP060AD0214 GASKET - FLANGE - 6in49-GS060000415 WELL SHIPPING CRATE50-AC000000116 BARREL - GASKET12-GS000001816.1 HATCH KEY13-KY000000116.2 CABLE HANGER ASSEMBLY18-AC00CH00416.3 LIFTING CLUTCH - 4 TON18-HD040000416.4 LIFTING CLUTCH - 8 TON18-HD080000816.5 NEVER SIEZE - TUBE51-AC00NSTB116.6 JOINT WRAP - 6in - BOA TAPE51-BT06000024016.7 JOINT SEALANT - 1in - CONSEAL CS-20251-SE0101SL26116.8 FLOAT - 20m - MS1 - NOLTA80-FS20MSNL316.9 BRACKET - PVC - PRESSURE TRANSDUCER80-BR00PT00116.16 BREATHER ASSEMBLY KIT - SIEMENS80-ACBAKSA1116.17 PRESSURE TRANSDUCER - 15PSI - SIEMENS A1000i80-PT150SA1116.18 HOUSING AND CABLE ASSEMBLY - 60ft - SIEMENS80-CA060SA1116.19 SPOOL - 316SS - 6in DIA x 10ft - FLGxFLG57-FF6120S6217 SPOOL - 6in 316SS SCH40 - FLG x PE - 90deg57-FP0690S6218 SPOOL - 316SS - 6in DIA x 18ft - FLGxPE57-FP6216S6219 KOR-N-SEAL - 8in CORE - 4in thru 1.5in PIPE59-KB080400120 KOR-N-SEAL - 12in CORE x 6in IPS PIPE59-KB1206SS321 KOR-N-SEAL - 16in CORE x 10in PIPE59-KB161000122 DISCONNECT PANEL61-EP3000DC123 PIPE - PVC SDR35 - 6in DIA70-PP0600DR2.0 ft24 PIPE - PVC SCH80 - 0.5in DIA70-PP0H00P82.0 ft25 G G MECHANICAL SHEET OF 8 3 R E V I S I O N H I S T O R Y V E R I F Y S C A L E D R A W I N G H A S B E E N F O R M A T T E D F O R 3 4 x 2 2 S H E E T . B A R E Q U A L S O N E I N C H I F N O T O N E I N C H O N T H I S S H E E T , A D J U S T S C A L E S A C C O R D I N G L Y 0 1 " 1 8 2 4 0 N O R T H B A N K R O A D R O S E B U R G , O R E G O N 9 7 4 7 0 P H O N E : (5 4 1 ) 4 9 6 -9 6 7 8 W W W .R O M T E C U T I L I T I E S .C O M H I G H G A T E C O M M U N I T Y B A K E R S F I E L D , C A D S N : D R N : C K D : W E T W E L L A S S E M B L Y C O M P O N E N T D R A W I N G A N D Y D A K E A N D Y D A K E K E V I N B O G A N 8 -3 -1 8 D A T E : ‹ 2018 ROMTEC INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. THESE PLANS AND DRAWINGS MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, ADAPTED, OR FURTHER DISTRIBUTED, AND NO COMPONENTS MAY BE CONSTRUCTED FROM THESE PLANS, WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF ROMTEC, INC. NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS SHOWN ARE NOMINAL DIMENSIONS. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ON-SITE CONTRACTOR OR ROMTEC UTILITIES CUSTOMER (NOT ROMTEC UTILITIES) TO VERIFY THE ACCURACY OF ANY CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OR ELEVATIONS PRIOR TO SETTING OR INSTALLING ANY EQUIPMENT. NOTE: CONTRACTOR TO SEAL ALL CONCRETE JOINTS AND PIPE PENETRATIONS WITH NON-SHRINK GROUT ALL MATERIALS SHOWN ON THIS SHEET WILL BE SUPPLIED BY ROMTEC UTILITIES AND DELIVERED TO THE SITE AFTER THE HOLE HAS BEEN EXCAVATED AND SHORED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPPLY A CRANE OF SUFFICIENT SIZE TO LOWER ALL THE CONCRETE PIECES INTO THE HOLE SAFELY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL THE WET WELL (AND VALVE VAULT AND METERING VAULT IF APPLICABLE). ROMTEC UTILITIES WILL PROVIDE A REPRESENTATIVE FOR TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE ON THE DAY OF INSTALLATION TO ANSWER ANY QUESTIONS THAT MAY ARISE. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND INSTALLATION. ITEMS NOTED AS "BY OTHERS" WILL BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY THE CONTRACTOR. ROMTEC UTILITIES WILL NOT INSTALL ANY OF THE COMPONENTS SHOWN ON THIS PAGE. 4 5 /2 1 /2 0 1 9 P R O D U C T I O N L A U N C H U P D A T E A D 3 3 /2 5 /2 0 1 9 R E V I S E D T O 5 f t B A R R E L S P E R O L D C A S T L E A D 2 2 /1 2 /2 0 1 9 R E V I S E D P E R C O M M E N T S A D 1 9 -1 8 -1 8 R I M E L E V A T I O N C H A N G E K B R E V D A T E D E S C R I P T I O N B Y P142 DISCHARGE PIPE C.L. 349.00'ELEVATION: 49 INFLUENT 326.00'ELEVATION: 10" PVC SEWER (BY OTHERS) WET WELL FLOOR 314.50'ELEVATION: 40'-2" 142 25 3/4 HATCH OPENING CLEAR43" X 66" 48 60 60 60 60 48 60 126.5 5 4 18 11 7.4 22 23 6.2 6.3 5 5 5 5 1.1 22 7.5 16.9 16.19 19 13 11 9 13 11 9 20 18 14 10 21 11 NOTE: CONDUIT TO CONTROL PANEL (BY OTHERS) MINIMUM: (2) FOR POWER (1) FOR LEVEL SENSING NOTE: TOP SLAB AND HATCH ARE H-20 OCCASIONAL TRAFFIC RATED 8'DIAMETER WET WELL 6"DISCHARGE PIPING HIDROSTAL PUMPS 6" - 687 VALVE VAULT LEVEL ELEVATION DISTANCE BETWEEN POINTS SET POINT DESCRIPTION SENSOR AND ELEVATION TABLE INVERT IN HIGH LEVEL ALARM SENSOR SPACING NON PRE-RO PUMP START SPACE START - STOP PRE-RO PUMP START SPACE START - STOP NON PRE-RO PUMP STOP FLOOR ELEVATION BACK UP HL ALARM SENSOR SPACING BACK UP PUMPS STOP SENSOR SPACING BACK UP PUMPS START 326.00 322.60 0.50 322.10 2.80 320.30 4.80 319.30 314.50 322.85 0.25 323.10 2.90 326.00 315.50 PRE-RO PUMP STOP PUMP INFORMATION NUMBER OF PUMPS 2 TYPE OF PUMPS HIDROSTAL E5K-L SIZE OF PUMP 5in SUCTION; 6in DISCHARGE PUMP CAPACITY 549GPM (EACH PUMP) TOTAL DYNAMIC HEAD 50.0ft TDH HORSEPOWER 14.8HP MOTOR SPEED 1800RPM POWER SUPPLY 480V, 3PHASE DUCTILE IRON PIPE COATINGS/LININGS EXTERIOR: INDURON CERAMAWRAP INTERIOR: PROTECTO 401 LINED. CONCRETE COATINGS/LININGS INTERIOR WALL: AMERON T-LOCK INTERIOR BASE: TNEMEC 434/435 PERMA-SHIELD (APPLIED AFTER BASIN AND GROUT INSTALLED) EXTERIOR: TNEMEC 61 114 96 14 RIM & FINISH GRADE 353.50'ELEVATION: 14 PRE-RO PUMP STOP: 315.50' PRE-RO PUMP START: 320.30' NON PRE-RO PUMP STOP: 319.30' HL ALARM: 322.60' ALL BURIED FLANGE SETS ARE TO BE DOUBLE WRAPPED WITH 10MIL POLYETHYLENE SHEET SEEMED WITH APPROVED PIPE WRAP TAPE. THE IS PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR. NOTE: STOCK NUMBERS ABOVE ARE ROMTEC UTILITIES STOCK NUMBERS. COLOR LEGEND MAJOR CONCRETE COMPONENTS WITH PRE-INSTALLED COMPONENTS. COMPONENTS PRE-ASSEMBLED TO THE EXTENT POSSIBLE AND WILL NEED TO BE FIELD INSTALLED. NOTE: PRE-ASSEMBLY IS DONE AT ROMTEC UTILITIES' DISCRETION AND MAY CHANGE AT THE TIME OF PRODUCTION. 28ƒ45ƒ 14 18 CHEM FEED PIPE, 1/2in SCH80 CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL PRIOR TO AMERON WELDING. PLUMB TO CHEM FEED SLAB. PASSIVE AIR INTAKE - 6in 30 12.4 12.3 1.7 1.9 12.2 12.2 120 120 162 NON PRE-RO PUMP START: 322.10' BACK UP HL ALARM: 322.85' BACK UP PUMP STOP: 323.10' BACK UP PUMPS START: 326.00' 25 3/4 605 218 1/2 FOR PRODUCTION 32'-2 7/16" SECTION A-A SCALE 1 / 18 SECTION B-B SCALE 1 / 18 SECTION D-D SCALE 1 / 8 A A BB PARTS LIST DESCRIPTIONSTOCK NUMBERQTYITEM BASE - VV - 68720-CB68700011 HATCH - VV - 687 - H20 - SAFETY GRATE23-HH687GHE12 TOP SLAB - VV - 687 - H2024-CT687HD013 BRACKET - VALVE KEY25-KY0000BR24 VALVE KEY - EXTENDABLE GATE WRENCH25-KY0000GW15 LADDER - 6ft-3in25-LD06030016 PIPE STAND - FLANGE - 6in25-PS06S89F17 PIPE STAND - 304SS - 6in SADDLE25-PS06S92S28 PIPE STAND BASE - 304SS - 2in - 2 BOLT25-PS0BBASE49 DRAIN - VALVE VAULT25-XXXX110 PIPE - PVC SCH40 - 2in DIA70-PP0200P420 ft10.1 DRAINBACK VALVE - PVC - 2in72-DB020SP8110.2 ELBOW - PVC SCH40 - 2in x 90deg - SLIP76-EL029040310.3 PIPE - 304SS SCH40 - 2in DIA40-PP0200S410ft11 PIPE - DI - 6in DIA CL52 - IC/P401 (2 x 42in)40-PP0600D07.0 ft12 NIPPLE - 304SS - 2in SCH40 X CLOSE40-TT0202S4413 NIPPLE - 304SS - 2in DIA x 6in40-TT0206S4214 NIPPLE - 304SS - 2in DIA x 12in40-TT0212S4215 BALL VALVE - 304SS - 2in - SPRING RETURN - APPOLO 76-508-01 41-BV0200S4216 PLUG VALVE - 6in - GEAR OP NUT - VALMATIC 5806R/7A02XF 41-PV060GD0217 CHECK VALVE - LEVER & WEIGHT - 6in - VALMATIC 7806LW42-LW0600D0218 FLANGE ADAPTER - 6in - ROMAC ALPHA44-AD06RMAL219 RETAINER GLAND - 6in - HEAVY DUTY44-RG060STR320 TAPPING SADDLE - 6in PIPE x 2in FNPT - ROMAC 101NS-6.90X2in NPT 44-TS060200221 SPOOL - DI - 6in DIA x 9in - FLGxFLG - IC/P40145-FF060090222 SPOOL - DI - 6in DIA x 12.75in - FLGxFLG - IC/P40145-FF06123Q123 SPOOL - DI - 6in DIA x 60in - FLGxPE - IC/P40145-FP060600124 ELBOW - 304SS - 2in x 90deg - FNPT46-EL0290S4425 ELBOW - DI - 6in x 90deg - FLGxFLG - IC/P40146-EL0690DI126 TEE - DI - 6in - FLGxFLG - IC/P40146-TE0606DI127 GASKET - FLANGE - 6in49-GS0600001128 JOINT WRAP - 6in - BOA TAPE51-BT0600003129 JOINT SEALANT - 1in - CONSEAL CS-20251-SE0101SL43.530 KOR-N-SEAL - 12in CORE x 6in DIPS PIPE59-KB1206DI331 PRESSURE GAUGE - 3.5in DIA x .25in MNPT BACK - xxx#81-PG3H00QB232 ISO RING - 6in - ASHCROFT83-GI060000233 D D MECHANICAL SHEET OF 8 4 R E V I S I O N H I S T O R Y V E R I F Y S C A L E D R A W I N G H A S B E E N F O R M A T T E D F O R 3 4 x 2 2 S H E E T . B A R E Q U A L S O N E I N C H I F N O T O N E I N C H O N T H I S S H E E T , A D J U S T S C A L E S A C C O R D I N G L Y 0 1 " 1 8 2 4 0 N O R T H B A N K R O A D R O S E B U R G , O R E G O N 9 7 4 7 0 P H O N E : (5 4 1 ) 4 9 6 -9 6 7 8 W W W .R O M T E C U T I L I T I E S .C O M H I G H G A T E C O M M U N I T Y B A K E R S F I E L D , C A D S N : D R N : C K D : V A L V E V A U L T A S S E M B L Y C O M P O N E N T D R A W I N G A N D Y D A K E A N D Y D A K E K E V I N B O G A N 8 -3 -1 8 D A T E : ‹ 2018 ROMTEC INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. THESE PLANS AND DRAWINGS MAY NOT BE REPRODUCED, ADAPTED, OR FURTHER DISTRIBUTED, AND NO COMPONENTS MAY BE CONSTRUCTED FROM THESE PLANS, WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF ROMTEC, INC. ALL MATERIALS SHOWN ON THIS SHEET WILL BE SUPPLIED BY ROMTEC UTILITIES AND DELIVERED TO THE SITE AFTER THE HOLE HAS BEEN EXCAVATED AND SHORED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUPPLY A CRANE OF SUFFICIENT SIZE TO LOWER ALL THE CONCRETE PIECES INTO THE HOLE SAFELY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL THE WET WELL (AND VALVE VAULT AND METERING VAULT IF APPLICABLE). ROMTEC UTILITIES WILL PROVIDE A REPRESENTATIVE FOR TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE ON THE DAY OF INSTALLATION TO ANSWER ANY QUESTIONS THAT MAY ARISE. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND INSTALLATION. ITEMS NOTED AS "BY OTHERS" WILL BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY THE CONTRACTOR. ROMTEC UTILITIES WILL NOT INSTALL ANY OF THE COMPONENTS SHOWN ON THIS PAGE. NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS SHOWN ARE NOMINAL DIMENSIONS. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ON-SITE CONTRACTOR OR ROMTEC UTILITIES CUSTOMER (NOT ROMTEC UTILITIES) TO VERIFY THE ACCURACY OF ANY CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OR ELEVATIONS PRIOR TO SETTING OR INSTALLING ANY EQUIPMENT. NOTE: CONTRACTOR TO SEAL ALL CONCRETE JOINTS AND PIPE PENETRATIONS WITH NON-SHRINK GROUT 4 5 /2 1 /2 0 1 9 P R O D U C T I O N L A U N C H U P D A T E A D 3 3 /2 5 /2 0 1 9 R E V I S E D T O 5 f t B A R R E L S P E R O L D C A S T L E A D 2 2 /1 2 /2 0 1 9 R E V I S E D P E R C O M M E N T S A D 1 9 -1 8 -1 8 R I M E L E V A T I O N C H A N G E K B R E V D A T E D E S C R I P T I O N B Y 104 29 8072 96 6 86 1/4 2 20 31 27 17 18 19 123120 21 13 16 13 25 14 25 1522 24 20 31 6 2623 27 17 33 32 22 18 19 12 31 20 20 31 NOTE: TOP SLAB AND HATCH ARE H-20 OCCASIONAL TRAFFIC RATED VALVE VAULT687 6" MANUAL AIR RELEASE PIPING AND VALVES HATCH OPENING CLEAR44" X 64" ALL BURIED FLANGE SETS ARE TO BE DOUBLE WRAPPED WITH 10 MIL POLYETHYLENE SHEET SEEMED WITH APPROVED PIPE WRAP TAPE. THIS IS PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR. NOTE: STOCK NUMBERS ABOVE ARE ROMTEC UTILITIES STOCK NUMBERS. 29 22 24 3 1 2 DUCTILE IRON PIPE COATINGS/LININGS EXTERIOR: INDURON CERAMAWRAP INTERIOR: PROTECTO 401 LINED. FINISH GRADE & RIM 353.50'ELEVATION: DISCHARGE C.L. 349.00'ELEVATION: 12" THICK CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE THRUST RESTRAINT COLLAR ON EACH END. (BY OTHERS) 12" THICK CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE THRUST RESTRAINT COLLAR ON EACH END. (BY OTHERS) 12" THICK CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE THRUST RESTRAINT COLLAR ON EACH END. (BY OTHERS) 10.210.110.3 7 11 9 33 32 BASE ELEV.: 346.31' 11 18 FOR PRODUCTION VIEW H-H SCALE 1 / 20 SECTION J-J SCALE 1 / 20 SECTION K-K SCALE 1 / 20 ISOMETRIC VIEW PUMP/BASE DETAIL SCALE 1 / 20VIEW L-L SCALE 1 / 20 H H J J K K L L MECHANICAL SHEET OF 6 5 R E V I S I O N H I S T O R Y V E R I F Y S C A L E D R A W I N G H A S B E E N F O R M A T T E D F O R 3 4 x 2 2 S H E E T . B A R E Q U A L S O N E I N C H I F N O T O N E I N C H O N T H I S S H E E T , A D J U S T S C A L E S A C C O R D I N G L Y 0 1 " 1 8 2 4 0 N O R T H B A N K R O A D R O S E B U R G , O R E G O N 9 7 4 7 0 P H O N E : (5 4 1 ) 4 9 6 -9 6 7 8 W W W .R O M T E C U T I L I T I E S .C O M H I G H G A T E C O M M U N I T Y B A K E R S F I E L D , C A D S N : D R N : C K D : B A S E D E T A I L A D A D A D 1 1 -1 -1 8 D A T E : 48 14 8 CONCRETE INTERIOR BASE COATING: TNEMEC 434/435 PERMA-SHIELD (the coating will be after the basin and grout are installed) CONCRETE EXTERIOR COATING: TNEMEC 61 11 18 33 1/8 33 3/16 8 GROUT RING C.L. CONCRETE BASE 23 3/823 3/8 GROUT FILL AROUND PREROSTAL BASIN. MANTAIN CLEARANCE UNDER UPPER PUMP. BASE WALL TO HAVE AMERON LINING. C.L. WET WELL C.L. WET WELL 23 3/8 33 1/8 23 3/8 33 3/16 35 35 WET WELL FLOOR ELEV.: 314.50' WET WELL FINISHED FLOOR ELEV.: 317.42' CONCRETE FILL IN BASE PRIOR TO SETTING THE BASE IN THE HOLE. P142 P114 P96 P142 114 96 2 2 /1 2 /2 0 1 9 R E V I S E D P E R C O M M E N T S A D 1 9 -1 8 -1 8 R I M E L E V A T I O N C H A N G E K B R E V D A T E D E S C R I P T I O N B Y M M MECHANICAL SHEET OF 6 6 R E V I S I O N H I S T O R Y V E R I F Y S C A L E D R A W I N G H A S B E E N F O R M A T T E D F O R 3 4 x 2 2 S H E E T . B A R E Q U A L S O N E I N C H I F N O T O N E I N C H O N T H I S S H E E T , A D J U S T S C A L E S A C C O R D I N G L Y 0 1 " 1 8 2 4 0 N O R T H B A N K R O A D R O S E B U R G , O R E G O N 9 7 4 7 0 P H O N E : (5 4 1 ) 4 9 6 -9 6 7 8 W W W .R O M T E C U T I L I T I E S .C O M H I G H G A T E C O M M U N I T Y B A K E R S F I E L D , C A D S N : D R N : C K D : U P P E R G U I D E B A R B R A C K E T D E T A I L D R A W I N G A D A D A D 1 1 -1 -1 8 D A T E : UPPER GUIDE BAR BRACKET FOR RAISING AND LOWERING PUMPS. CONDUIT AREA EUSERC 354OUTDOOR ENCLOSUREAREACONDUITMAINPOWER &PUMPS CONTROL WIRING LEVELSENSING 0 3 / 0 1 / 1 9 1 0 6 6 J S 3 1 5 1 1 FLOOR PLAN AND ELEVATIONS 10'-0" ROOF 10'-0" ROOF ( 2 ) S S T 4 " x 4 " S T E E L C O L U M N S C O N C R E T E S L A B , B Y I N S T A L L E R A B C D1FLOOR PLANSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"C1 D1 ROOFLINERIDGEROOFLINE D E L E V A T I O N V I E W S C A L E : 1 / 4 " = 1 ' - 0 " 6'-8" 1 0 ' - 0 " R O O F M E T A L R O O F I N G 6'-8" 1 0 ' - 1 " B U I L D I N G 1 0 ' - 0 " R O O F C E L E V A T I O N F R O N T V I E W S C A L E : 1 / 4 " = 1 ' - 0 " ( 2 ) S S T 4 " x 4 " S T E E L C O L U M N S ( 2 ) S S T 4 " x 4 " S T E E L C O L U M N S 1 2 5 5 " C O N C R E T E S L A B B Y I N S T A L L E R 10'-1" BUILDING ANT X DIALO G SCOU T DIALE R G RR R B B R G GRR R DA N G E R ABCNUG400-4 400A U.G PULLSECTIONEUSERC 345,347 BARRIERWCTSW8-4-4 BOLTSWITCH CAT. NO. T365400 AMP, 480 VAC BOLTEDPRESSURE CONTACT SWITCH(FUSES NOT INCLUDED)EUSERC 332 HINGED PANEL15 EUSERC 320 CT COMPARTMENT METAL ROOFING6'-8"10'-1" BUILDING 10'-0" ROOFAELEVATION REAR VIEWSCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0"(2)SST 4" x 4"STEEL COLUMNS 1 A 3.MECHANICAL Rev. 1-3-18 This section is structured as follows: 3.01 WET WELL 3.01.1 PRODUCTION DRAWING(S) 3.01.2 DATA SHEETS 3.02 PUMPS 3.02.1 DATA SHEETS 3.03 VALVE VAULT 3.03.1 PRODUCTION DRAWING(S) 3.03.2 DATA SHEETS 3.04 ODOR CONTROL 3.04.1 PASSIVE ODOR CONTROL 3.01 WET WELL Rev. 1-3-18 This section is structured as follows: 3.01.1 PRODUCTION DRAWING(S) 3.01.2 DATA SHEETS HATCH BUTYL SEALANT JOINT WRAP PIPE BOOT BARRELL GASKET COUPLING CORD GRIP FLANGE ADAPTER INTERIOR CONCRETE BASE LINING EXTERIOR CONCRETE COATING AMERON CONCRETE LINING 3.01.1 PRODUCTION DRAWING(S) PRODUCTION DRAWINGS FOLLOW THIS PAGE. IF THEY ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THIS SSDS, THEY WILL BE INCLUDED IN THE NEXT REVISION. 3.01.2 DATA SHEETS DATA SHEETS FOLLOW THIS PAGE Product Number Design Features Revised By:-Materials -Design Load -Open Area -Coating - Designates Machined Surface Certification DisclaimerDrawing Revision Contact 800 626 4653 ejco.com®Designer:----Country of Origin:Weights (lbs/kg), dimensions (inches/mm)and drawings provided for your guidance. We reserve the right to modify specifications without prior notice. CONFIDENTIAL: This drawing is the property of EJ Group, Inc. and embodies confidential information, registered marks, patents, trade secret information,and/or know-how that is the property of EJ Group, Inc.Copyright © 2011 EJ Group, Inc.All rights reserved. A H S 2 He a v y D u t y A l u m i n u m S A F E H A T C H HR8WW4366 ALUMINUM H20 (Heavy Duty - Not for Wheel Line Traffic)N/A NPR18-0657 WEIGHT: 652 LBS.USA 03/12/18 DE ® Product Number Design Features Revised By:-Materials -Design Load -Open Area -Coating - Designates Machined Surface Certification DisclaimerDrawing Revision Contact 800 626 4653 ejco.com®Designer:----Country of Origin:Weights (lbs/kg), dimensions (inches/mm)and drawings provided for your guidance. We reserve the right to modify specifications without prior notice. A l u m i n u m B o l t - O n H a t c h V e n t HR-STDVENT ALUMINUM N/A MILL FINISH NPR18-0655 Estimated WT: 12 lbs USA 02/26/18 DE CONFIDENTIAL: This drawing is the property of EJ Group, Inc. and embodies confidential information, registered marks, patents, trade secret information,and/or know-how that is the property of EJ Group, Inc.Copyright © 2011 EJ Group, Inc.All rights reserved. P R O D U C T S P E C I F I C A T I O N S CS-202 Butyl Rubber Sealant 1 P.O. Box 176, New Carlisle OH, 45344 • 937.845.8776 or 800.332.7325 FAX 937-845-3587 • www.conseal.com APPLICATIONS For self-sealing joints in: Manholes, Concrete Vaults, Septic Tanks, Concrete Pipe, Box Culverts, Utility Vaults, Burial Vaults, and Vertical Panel Structures. SEALING PROPERTIES • Provides permanently flexible watertight joints. • Low to high temperature workability: 0°F to 120°F (-12°C to 48°C) • Rugged service temperature: -30°F to +200°F (-34°C to +93°C) • Excellent chemical and mechanical adhesion to clean, dry surfaces. • Sealed Joints will not shrink, harden or oxide upon aging. • No priming normally necessary. When confronted with difficult installation conditions, such as wet concrete or temperatures below 40°F (4°C), priming the concrete will improve the bonding action. Consult Concrete Sealants for the proper primer to meet your application. HYDROSTATIC STRENGTH ConSeal CS-202 meets the hydrostatic performance requirement as set forth In ASTM C-990 section 10.1 (Performance requirement: 10psi for 10 minutes in straight alignment – in plant, quality control test for joint materials.) SPECIFICATIONS ConSeal CS-202 meets or exceeds the requirements of Federal Specification SS-S-210 (210-A), AASHTO M-198B, and ASTM C-990-91. P R O D U C T S P E C I F I C A T I O N S CS-202 Butyl Rubber Sealant 2 P.O. Box 176, New Carlisle OH, 45344 • 937.845.8776 or 800.332.7325 FAX 937-845-3587 • www.conseal.com PHYSICAL PROPERTIES Spec Required* CS-202 Hydrocarbon blend content % by weight ASTM D4 (mod.) 50% min. 52% Inert mineral filler % by weight AASHTO T111 30% min. 35% Volatile Matter % by weight ASTM D6 2% max. 1.2 Specific Gravity, 77°F ASTM D71 1.15-1.50 1.20 Ductility, 77°F ASTM D113 5.0 min. 12 Penetration, cone 77°F, 150 gm. 5 sec. ASTM D217 50-100 60-65 Penetration, cone 32°F, 150 gm. 5 sec. ASTM D217 40 mm 50-55 Flash Point, C.O.C., °F ASTM D92 350°F min. 425°F Fire point, C.O.C., °F ASTM D92 375°F min. 450°F IMMERSION TESTING • 30-Day Immersion Testing: No visible deterioration when tested in 5% Caustic Potash, 5% Hydrochloric Acid, 5% Sulfuric Acid, and 5% saturated Hydrogen Sulfide. * • One Year Immersion Testing: No visible deterioration when tested in 5% Formaldehyde, 5% Formic Acid, 5% Sulfuric Acid, 5% Hydrochloric Acid, 5% Sodium Hydroxide, 5% Hydrogen Sulfide and 5% Potassium Hydroxide. * Requirements of ASTM C-990 Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants. LIMITED WARRANTY This information is presented in good faith, but we cannot anticipate all conditions under which this information and our products, or the products of other manufacturers in combination with our products, may be used. We accept no responsibility for results obtained by the application of this information or the safety and suitability of our products, either alone or in combination with other products. Users are advised to make their own tests to determine the safety and suitability of each such product or product combinations for their own purposes. It is the user’s responsibility to satisfy himself as to the suitability and completeness of such information for this own particular use. We sell this product without warranty, and buyers and users assume all responsibility and liability for loss or damage arising from the handling and use of this product, whether used alone or in combination with other products. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERING FOR CORROSION PROTECTION APPLICATIONS: »Manhole Encapsulation/Sealing »Pipelines »Repair and Rehabilitation »Step-Down Joints Pressure sensitive woven polypropylene infiltration sealing tape for concrete, steel and polyethylene. BOA-TAPE™ PRIMARY FEATURES AND BENEFITS INCLUDE: »High bonding force - · Accommodates ground movement · Seals against ground water infiltration »High impact and penetration resistance · Toughness to resist soil stress »Impermeable - · Provides corrosion protection »No special tools - · Quick and easy installation · No primer required · No touch required to adhere tape BOA-TAPE ™ No primer or torch, just peel, tape and go Boa-Tape™ is a tape system designed for sealing joints against ground water infiltration. Used to encapsulate manholes, vaults and protect pipelines. The 50 mils elastomeric mastic in combination with 15 mils of a woven polypropylene, makes this pressure sensitive tape extra sticky. »Square/Rectangular Vaults »Septic Tanks/Vaults »Provides Corrosion Protection Available in 12”, 6” and 4” widths x 150ft. rolls »Clean all exterior surfaces of the manhole with a brush or broom to remove any loose cement, dust or small rock particles. »Remove 8” (20cm) of release backing and position exposed tape surface on cleaned seam area. Expose 8” (20cm) of tape at a time by pulling release backing away from mastic as tape is wrapped around the entire circumference of the manhole, vault or pipe. »Carefully cut the Boa-Tape when applying over cast iron manhole gussets. Gently mold the tape around gussets with roller/gloved hand. BOA-TAPE™ CONCRETE SEALING SYSTEM - TYPICAL SPECIFICATION NOTE: For other material specifications, contact GPT. 1.0 Scope: Apply GPT Pressure Sensitive Primerless Boa-Tape™ on exterior concrete manholes or other structures at locations indicated by the Engineer to protect manhole and mitigate infiltration/exfiltration of water and other contaminates. Boa-Tape should be applied over a dust-free, dry concrete surface. The Boa-Tape™ system should be as manufactured by GPT, Houston, Texas to ISO 9001:2008 standards. 2.0 Tape: Woven Polypropylene Membrane with Elastomeric Adhesive The pressure applied Boa-Tape™ should consist of a 4”, 6” or 12” wide wrap-around tape system 65 mils thick with a 15 mil membrane and 50 mils of integrated primer and elastomeric adhesive. Peel Strength should be a minimum of 12.5 lb./in., per ASTM D 1000. Tensile Strength should be 75 lbs/inch width. Mastic softening point should meet or exceed 240˚F +/- 10 % in accordance with ASTM E-28. Water Absorption should be less than .5% per ASTM D 570. 3.0 Warranty: All products are warranted against failure caused by manufacturing defects for a period of one year. Any product found to be so defective and returned within one year from date of shipment will be replaced without charge. The above warranty is made in lieu of, and we disclaim, any and all other warranties, expressed or implied, including the warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, and buyer agrees to accept the products without any such warranties. We hereby disclaim any obligation or liability for consequential damages, labor costs or any other claims or liabilities of any kind whatsoever. GPT 1-4_08.2016 »For extreme applications: Consider Riser- Wrap® heat shrink sleeves. »Riser-Wrap® used to rehab. an existing manhole submerged in runoff water. RISER-WRAP® 4990 Iris Street Wheat Ridge, CO 80033 Tel: (303) 988-1242 Fax: (303) 988-1922 6455 Clara Road, Suite 300 Houston, TX 77041 Tel: (713) 747-6948 Fax: (713) 747-6029 Unit 3-5, Chester Road Colmworth Business Park Eaton Socon, St. Neots Cambridgeshire, PE 19 8YT Oilfields Supply Center Ltd. Executive Office 4, PO Box 1518 Jebel Ali Free Zone, Dubai United Arab Emirateswww.gptindustries.com 2 Woodlands Sector 1 #03-11 Woodlands Spectrum 1 Singapore 738068 Republic of Singapore BOA-TAPE™ SEALING SYSTEM PROPERTIES ADHESIVE ASTM TEST TEST RESULTS Softening Point ASTM E-28 240˚ F 116˚ C Dielectric Strength ASTM D-1000 350 volts/mil TAPE Tensile Strength ASTM D-1000 75 lbs./inch width Elongation ASTM D-1000 40% Puncture Resistance ASTM E 164 200 lbs. Water Absorption ASTM D-570 0.05% Penetration Resistance ASTM G-9 PASS Fungal Resistance ASTM G-21 Growth-None 1.50 –4.80 S106-7MW 7” 3.50 –4.80 S106-7W 7” 4.20 –6.40 S106-8SRW 8” 1.50 –4.80 S106-8MW 8” 6.00 –6.75 S406-10AW 10” 7.50 –8.20 S406-10W 10” 6.00 –6.75 S406-10.5AW 10½” 7.50 –8.70 S406-10.5W 10½” 6.00 –7.00 S406-11BW 11” 7.50 –9.00 S406-11AW 11” 3.50 –6.90 S106-12M 12" 6.00 –7.00 S406-12CW 12” 6.25 –7.50 S406-12BW 12” 7.50 –9.00 S406-12AW 12” 9.00 –10.20 S406-12W 12” 5.75 –7.00 S106-12BW 12” 7.00 –8.50 S106-12AW 12” 8.25 –9.75 S106-12W 12” 9.50 –11.25 S106-14AW 14” 9.50 –11.25 S106-16BW 16” 11.25 –13.00 S106-16AW 16” 13.00 –14.20 S106-16W 16” 14.00 –15.50 S106-20BWS 20” 15.50 –17.00 S106-20AWS 20” 17.00 –18.15 S106-20WS 20” 1.50 –4.80 S106-7MT 7” 3.50 –4.50 S106-7T 7” 4.20 –6.40 S106-8SRT 8” 1.50 –4.80 S106-8MT 8” 6.00 –6.75 S406-10AT 10” 7.50 –8.40 S406-10T 10” 6.00 –6.75 S406-10.5AT 10½” 7.50 –8.90 S406-10.5T 10½” 6.00 –7.00 S406-11BT 11” 7.50 –9.00 S406-11AT 11” 3.50 –6.90 S106-12MT 12" 6.00 –7.00 S406-12CT 12” 6.25 –7.50 S406-12BT 12” 7.50 –9.00 S406-12AT 12” 9.00 –10.50 S406-12T 12” 5.75 –7.00 S106-12BT 12” 7.00 –8.50 S106-12AT 12” 8.25 –9.75 S106-12T 12” 9.50 –11.25 S106-14AT 14” 9.50 –11.25 S106-16BT 16” 11.25 –13.00 S106-16AT 16” 13.00 –14.50 S106-16T 16” 6/11 Install Pipe Clamp(s) with T-Handle Torque Wrench Install Kor-N-Seal I - Wedge Korband with Socket Wrench & Torque Limiter Install Kor-N-Seal II - Wedge Korband with Standard Torque Wrench KOR-N-SEAL I - WEDGE KORBAND CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY Stainless Steel Pipe Clamp EPDM OR POLYISOPRENE Reinforced Nylon Wedge or Stainless Wedge Stainless Steel Korband www.npc.com 250 Elm Street • P.O. Box 301 Milford, NH 03055, U.S.A. Tel: 603-673-8680 • 800-626-2180 • Fax: 603-673-7271 KOR-N-SEAL®I & II FLEXIBLE PIPE-TO-MANHOLE CONNECTORS SPECIFICATION SHEET 02/06 Head Pressure C923 - 7.1 0° - 13 psi (30 ft) for 10 min. +13 psi for 10 min. 7° - 10 psi (23 ft) for 10 min. +10 psi for 10 min. Deflection Test C923 - 7.2.2 7° in any direction Over 7° in any direction Load Test C923 - 7.2.3 150 lbs/in. pipe dia. Over 150 lbs/in. pipe dia. Performed on all standard sizes of Kor-N-Seal Connectors. RESILIENT EPDM OR POLYISOPRENE RUBBER Conforms to ASTM C923 PERFORMANCE Test ASTM Method Test Requirements Kor-N-Seal ® I & II Test ASTM Method Test Requirements TEST RESULTS Kor-N-Seal® I & II Chemical Resistance D543, at 22°C for 48 h 1 N Sulfuric Acid No weight loss No weight loss 1 N Hydrochloric Acid No weight loss No weight loss Tensile Strength D412 1200 psi 1580 psi Elongation at Break 350% min.500% Hardness D2240 (shore A durometer) ± 5 from the manufacturer's 48 ± 5 specified hardness Accelerated Oven-Aging D573 70 ± 1°C for 7 days Decrease of 15%, max. of original 10.1% tensile decrease tensile strength, decrease of 14.0% elongation decrease 20% max. of elongation Compression Set D395, method B, at 70°C Decrease of 25%, max.13% decrease for 22 h of original deflection Water Absorption D471, immerse 0.75 by 2-in. Increase of 10%, max..8% increase specimen in distilled of original by weight water at 70°C for 48 h Ozone Resistance D1171 Rating 0 Rating 0 Low-temperature Brittle Point D746 No fracture at -40°C No fracture at -40°C Tear Resistance D624, method B 200 lbf/in. No tear at 210 lbf/in. INTERNAL KORBAND Conforms to ASTM C923, ASTM A666, and A240 – Korband Assembly is manufactured of 300 series stainless steel. – Toggle Expander is made of 300 series stainless steel. – The 106/406 series Wedge Expander is made from reinforced nylon or 300 series stainless steel. – The 206/306 series Wedge Expander is made from 300 series stainless steel. EXTERNAL PIPE CLAMP Conforms to ASTM C923, ASTM A666, and A240 External take-up clamps are manufactured of 300 series stainless steel. KOR-N-SEAL®I & II Flexible Pipe-to-Manhole Connectors SPECIFICATION SHEET www.npc.com 250 Elm Street • P.O. Box 301 Milford, NH 03055, U.S.A. Tel: 603-673-8680 • 800-626-2180 • Fax: 603-673-727105/06 NPC Kor-N-Seal Pipe-to-Manhole Connector Technical Specification Scope: This specification describes the function of the NPC Kor-N-Seal pipe-to-manhole connector, its principle of operation, and the component materials that constitute the Kor-N-Seal connector, and their physical properties. Product Application: NPC Kor-N-Seal connectors are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM C-923 "Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals". This specification requires the connector to provide a watertight seal under the following conditions: • 10 PSI (23 feet head) of groundwater pressure • Minimum 7 Degrees of pipe articulation in any direction • Radial loading test of 150 pounds per inch diameter of pipe Principle of Operation: The Kor-N-Seal connector creates a watertight seal between the pipe and manhole by first sealing to the inside of the cored or formed hole in the manhole and then sealing to the outside of the pipe. See illustration at right. The seal at the inside of the manhole is created by the stainless steel Korband. The Korband is located inside of the end of the Kor-N- Seal connector that fits into the manhole. Once the Kor-N-Seal connector is located in the manhole, the diameter of the Korband is increased. This compresses the Kor-N-Seal connector against the inside wall of the hole in the manhole creating a watertight seal at the manhole. The seal at the outside of the pipe is created by the stainless steel pipe clamp(s). The pipe clamp is located on the outside of the Kor- N-Seal connector. Once the pipe has been positioned in the connector the diameter of the pipe clamp is decreased. This compresses the Kor-N-Seal connector against the outside wall of the pipe creating a watertight seal at the pipe. Reference the Kor-N-Seal Recommeded Installation Instructions for a detailed explanation of the preparation and installation of the Kor-N-Seal connector. PIPE INSTALLATION: 1. Center pipe in Connector opening. 2. On maximum pipe O.D. installations, use a pipe lubricant on the outside barrel of the pipe and/or the inside ridges of the Connector (under the Pipe Clamp area) to allow the pipe to slide into place more easily. 3. Position the Pipe Clamp in the Connector's Pipe Clamp groove with the screw at the top. 4. Tighten the Pipe Clamp screw to 60 inch pounds [7 Newton Meters] with a T-handle Torque Wrench, P/N 80090. 5. On minimum pipe O.D. installations, lift the rubber up underneath the Pipe Clamp screw so that the Connector contacts the bottom surface of the pipe while the Pipe Clamp screw is being tightened. Application of pipe lubrication on the underside of the clamp will also help assure that an even contraction of rubber is maintained throughout the clamping area. 6. After the Pipe Clamp has been tightened down firmly, move the pipe horizontally and/or vertically to bring it to grade. CAUTION: Pipe must NOT rest on Connector Korband. Refer to reverse side Kor-N-Seal I - Wedge Korband Installation Chart for Hole Size Range, Connector Dimensions, and Suggested Pipe O.D. Range. CONNECTOR INSTALLATION: 1. Check to be sure Korband is properly located in Connector groove. (Fig. 1) 2. Insert Connector Assembly into hole with Wedge Expander at top of hole. (Fig. 2) 3. Position Connector so it is square to manhole both vertically and horizontally. (Fig. 3) 4. Tighten Wedge Expander using 1/2" [13 mm] socket with a preset torque limiter for each. For each size connector use torque limiter preset to proper torque. (Fig. 4) Retorquing is not required prior to shipment. CAUTION: DO NOT USE IMPACT WRENCH. Fig. 4 RECOMMENDED TORQUE TORQUE LIMITER Connector Foot Pounds Inches [mm] [Newton Meters] 10 – 24 12 [254 –610] [16] P/N 91440-12 www.npc.com 250 Elm Street • P.O. Box 301 Milford, NH 03055, U.S.A. Tel: 603-673-8680 • 800-626-2180 • Fax: 603-673-7271 Outer Wall Top View Wedge Expander Area Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 I M P O R T A N T KOR-N-SEAL I – STAINLESS STEEL WEDGE Recommended Installation Procedure Side View Outer Wall Korband Wedge Expander Inner wall CAUTION: All capped stubs awaiting pipe installation at a later date must be restrained. Assure that a proper backfill material is used in adverse conditions. Prior to any critical usage, contact NPC Customer service at 1-800-626-2180. Tylox® SuperSeal™ Pre-Lubricated Gasket For Single Offset Joints ... … in Round or Elliptical Pipe, Man-Holes and Boxes Say Goodbye to the lube bucket and brush …… Say Hello to fast, clean, simple installation Requiring no field lubrication, the Tylox® SuperSeal™ gasket* has a layer of silcone lubricant installed on the inner surface of the tube dur- ing the manufacturing process; sav- ing you time, and money, on the job-site. Self-contained Lubricant. Sealed within the tube, the lube is impervi- ous to mud, dirt and debris. If you drop it in the trench, simply wipe the gasket surface clean and you’re ready to install. No special handling or packaging is required. Easier installation, without equalization, is made possible due to the reduced gasket stretch required by the unique lamell/roll- ing tube design. Quick and easy to install means you save even more time. No gasket “roll” or “twist” dur- ing coupling is another benefit of the unique lamell/rolling tube de- sign, which reduces the insertion force required. Manual coupling of up to 36” pipe is possible. Self-Centering of the Spigot within the Bell is carried out as the tube rolls into the annular space during the homing process. Elimination of Joint Kick Back, is caused by the rearward locking action of the serrations as the tube rolls forward Bell and Spigot protection under deflection is accomplished by the cushioning effect of the tube, as it rests within the annular space. ASTM C361, ASTM C425, ASTM C443, AASHTO M198.4 and CSA A-257 mate- rial requirement compliance. Pipe sizes to 144” can be accom- modated. Lamell Tube Nose Compression Section Locking Serrations Lubricant Layer INSTALLATION MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS Ensure Bell, Spigot and Gasket are free from loose debris or foreign mate- rial. Stretch the gasket around the spigot, with the nose against the step, and the tube laying flat against the spigot. DO NOT LUBRICATE. Align the spigot with the bell, and thrust the spigot home using suitable mechanical means. The homing process will cause the lubricated tube to “roll” over itself, above the compression section, allowing the pipe to slide forward. Once fully homed, the compression section seals the total annular space; the rolling tube comes to rest within the small annular space - acting as a cushion against side loads, and the serrations act to resist pipe pull-out. *Tylox SuperSeal Gaskets are patented under US Patent 4934716 Tylox® SuperSeal™ gaskets* are avail- able in the following materials: •Isoprene Optional Materials •Nitrile (Oil Resistant) •Isoprene / EPDM blend (Green Book & C425) •Neoprene (Oil and Ozone Resistant) Other materials may be available as special order. Consult your Hamilton Kent agent for your specific requirements. Tylox® SuperSeal™ gaskets* are manufactured to meet the material requirements of the following speci- fications: •ASTM C361, C425, & C443 •AASHTO M198.4 •CSA A257 •“Green Book” Other specifications may be avail- able as special order. Please consult your Hamilton Kent agent for your specific requirements. CONTACT US Hamilton Kent 77, Carlingview Drive Toronto, Ontario, Canada. M9W 5J6 Phone (800) 268-8479 Fax (888) 674-6960 Web-Site www.hamiltonkent.com E-Mail sales@hamiltonkent.com All Tylox® SuperSeal™ gaskets are warrantied for 12 months from date of purchase (Invoice Date) in accordance with the details as outlined in Hamilton Kent’s Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale. Lit_TSS_0601_ER4 ROMACINDUSTRIES,INC. ALPHA - 1 December 16, 2015 1-800-426-9341 www.romac.com MADE IN U.S.A. ALPHA™ Wide Range Restrained Joint ALPHA 1 Total Parts (zero assembly). 2 Nuts to tighten. 3 Minutes to install. 6” SLEEVE AND TWO MJ RESTRAINERS 6” COUPLING PLUS RESTRAINT SYSTEM 3 Minutes to install 2 Nuts to torque 1 Piece (stab-fit) 0 Guess-work 30 Minutes to install 29 Total parts to assemble 12 T-Bolts to torque 9 Radial bolts to torque 2 Gaskets to seat 35 Minutes to install 33 Total parts to assemble 5 Coupling bolts to torque 4 Clamping bolts to torque 2 Gaskets to seat INSTALLATION TIME IS A FRACTION OF OTHER RESTRAINT METHODS • Standard Alpha covers IPS PVC through Ductile Iron pipe diameters. • Alpha XL fits Ductile Iron through Oversize Cast Iron pipe diameters. • One piece, stab-fit installation. • Cast components are high strength ductile iron. • Working pressure: up to 350 psi. • Accommodates up to 8 degrees of deflection (4 degrees on each end). • Manufactured in the U.S.A. • Patents Pending. • Alpha is approved for use on: Ductile iron Cast iron (Classes A, B, C & D) PVC IPS size (Sch 40, Sch 80 & SDR 21) PVC C900 and C909 HDPE (SDR 9, 11, 13.5 & 17) no pipe stiffener required.* For other SDR's, and pipe materials, contact Romac at 1.800.426.9341. RESTRAINED JOINT ™ ALPHA XL Alpha XL accommodates Ductile Iron through Oversize Cast Iron pipe OD's. STANDARD ALPHA Standard Alpha accommodates IPS PVC through Ductile Iron pipe diameters. *The original Alpha (with black grippers) is not compatible with HDPE pipe. ROMACINDUSTRIES,INC. ALPHA - 2 December 16, 2015 1-800-426-9341 www.romac.com MADE IN U.S.A. Ma t e r i a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s ALPHA™ Wide Range Restraint Coupling CATALOG NUMBERNOMINAL PIPE SIZE O.D. RANGE(inches) APPROX. WEIGHT(lbs.) 4.50 - 4.90 ALPHA-A - 4.90 9.18 11.85 10.53 $370.00 40 A O.D. 10" 8" 6" 12" 4" 6.60 - 7.00 ALPHA-A - 7.00 10.33 11.98 12.77 480.00 50 8.60 - 9.10 ALPHA-A - 9.10 13.45 13.19 15.67 545.00 75 12.75 - 13.30 ALPHA-A - 13.30 17.59 13.30 19.73 830.00 100 10.75 - 11.20 ALPHA-A - 11.20 15.54 12.74 17.61 705.00 95 DIMENSIONSB LENGTH C HEIGHT LIST PRICE To Order: Determine the O.D. of the pipes to be coupled, and select coupling size which covers the pipe diameters of both pipe ends. Specify Alpha Catalog Number [shaded number in table above]. Example: To couple 8" DI and 8" IPS PVC Pipe order ALPHA-A-9.10 CASTINGS: All cast components (end rings, center ring and bolt guides) are ductile iron, meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM A 536, grade 65-45-12. GRIPPERS: Ductile (nodular) iron, meeting or exceeding ASTM A 536, grade 65-45-12. Machine sharpened and heat treated. Xylan 1424 coated for corrosion protection. GASKET: SBR per ASTM D2000 - classified by UL to meet NSF61, compounded for water and sewer service. NSF61 certified NBR gaskets and other compounds available upon request. DRAW-HOOK FASTENERS: 304L stainless steel. RAMP RUNNERS: Reinforced nylon. BOLTS & NUTS: 304 stainless steel, 5/8-11 bolts with heavy hex e-coated nuts. Fasteners provided with anti-galling protection. COATINGS: Center ring fusion bonded epoxy Romacoat, NSF 61 certified. End rings are Romabond polyester. WORKING PRESSURE: up to 350 PSI. RESTRAINED JOINT ™ STANDARD ALPHA Fits IPS PVC through Ductile Iron pipe OD's. www.hubbell-wiring.comV-28 Wiring Device-Kellems® Single Eye, Closed Mesh For permanent support when cable end is available to be installed through grip. Cable Diameter Range Inches (cm) Approx. Breaking Strength Lbs. (N)E Inches (cm)M Inches (cm)Tin-Coated Bronze Stainless SteelTin-Coated Bronze Stainless Steel .50"-.62" (1.27-1.57)530 (2,357)1,370 (6,094)7" (17.78)10" (25.40)02201013 02401013 .63"-.74" (1.60-1.88)790 (3,514) 2,060 (9,163)8" (20.32)10" (25.40)02201014 02401014 .75"-.99" (1.90-2.51)1,020 (4,537)2,060 (9,163)8" (20.32)13" (33.02)02201015 02401015 1.00"-1.24" (2.54-3.15)1,610 (7,161)2,678 (11,912)9" (22.86)14" (35.56)02201017 02401017 1.25"-1.49" (3.17-3.78)1,610 (7,161)4,490 (19,972)10" (25.40)15" (38.10)02201018 02401018 1.50"-1.74" (3.81-4.42)1,610 (7,161)4,492 (19,981)12" (30.48)17" (43.18)02201019 02401019 1.75"-1.99" (4.44-5.05)2,150 (9,563)5,000 (22,241)14" (35.56)19" (48.26)02201020 02401020 2.00"-2.49" (5.08-6.32)3,260 (14,500)8,940 (39,767)16" (40.64)21" (53.34)02201021 02401021 2.50"-2.99" (6.35-7.59)3,260 (14,500)8,947 (39,798)18" (45.72)23" (58.42)02201022 02401022 3.00"-3.49" (7.62-8.86)4,900 (21,795)13,420 (59,695)21" (53.34) 25" (63.50)02201023 02401023 3.50"-3.99" (8.89-10.13)4,900 (21,795)—24" (60.96)27" (68.58)02201024 — Single Eye, Split Mesh, Lace Closing For permanent support when cable end is not available. Cable Diameter Range Inches (cm) Approx. Breaking Strength Lbs. (N)E Inches (cm)M Inches (cm)Tin-Coated Bronze Stainless SteelTin-Coated Bronze Stainless Steel .50"-.62" (1.27-1.57)530 (2,357)1,370 (6,094)7" (17.78)10" (25.40)02202013 02402013 .63"-.74" (1.60-1.88)790 (3,514)2,066 (9,190)8" (20.32)10" (25.40)02202014 02402014 .75"-.99" (1.90-2.51)1,020 (4,537)2,060 (9,163)8" (20.32)13" (33.02)02202015 02402015 1.00"-1.24" (2.54-3.15)1,610 (7,161)2,670 (11,876)9" (22.86)14" (35.56)02202017 02402017 1.25"-1.49" (3.17-3.78)1,610 (7,161)4,490 (19,972)10" (25.40)15" (38.10)02202018 02402018 1.50"-1.74" (3.81-4.42)1,610 (7,161)4,490 (19,972)12" (30.48)17" (43.18)02202019 02402019 1.75"-1.99" (4.44-5.05)2,150 (9,563)4,375 (19,461)14" (35.56)19" (48.26)02202020 02402020 2.00"-2.49" (5.08-6.32)3,260 (14,500)8,947 (39,798)16" (40.64)21" (53.34)02202021 02402021 2.50"-2.99" (6.35-7.59)3,260 (14,500)8,940 (39,767)18" (45.72)23" (58.42)02202022 02402022 3.00"-3.49" (7.62-8.86)4,900 (21,795)13,420 (59,695)21" (53.34) 25" (63.50)02202023 02402023 3.50"-3.99" (8.89-10.13)4,900 (21,795)13,420 (59,695)24" (60.96)27" (68.58)02202024 02402024 Single Eye, Split Mesh, Rod Closing For support when cable end is not available. Cable Diameter Range Inches (cm) Approx. Breaking Strength Lbs. (N)E Inches (cm)M Inches (cm)Tin-Coated Bronze Stainless SteelTin-Coated Bronze Stainless Steel .50"-.62" (1.27-1.57)790 (3,514)1,050 (4,670)7" (17.78)8.5" (21.59)02203013 02403013 .63"-.74" (1.60-1.88)790 (3,514)2,050 (9,119)8" (20.32)8.5" (21.59)02203014 02403014 .75"-.99" (1.90-2.51)1,020 (4,537)2,050 (9,119)8" (20.32)10.5" (26.67)02203015 02403015 1.00"-1.24" (2.54-3.15)1,610 (7,161)2,650 (11,788)9" (22.86)12.5" (31.75)02203017 02403017 1.25"-1.49" (3.17-3.78)1,610 (7,161)4,500 (20,017)10" (25.40)14.5" (36.83)02203018 02403018 1.50"-1.74" (3.81-4.42)1,610 (7,161)4,500 (20,017)12" (30.48) 15.5" (39.37)02203019 02403019 1.75"-1.99" (4.44-5.05)2,150 (9,563)6,000 (26,689)14" (35.56)16.5" (41.91)02203020 02403020 2.00"-2.49" (5.08-6.32)3,260 (14,500)8,950 (39,812)16" (40.64)19.5" (49.53)02203021 02403021 2.50"-2.99" (6.35-7.59)3,260 (14,500)7,750 (34,474)18" (45.72)21.5" (54.61)02203022 02403022 3.00"-3.49" (7.62-8.86)5,750 (25,576)8,500 (37,810)21" (53.34) 23.5" (59.69)02203023 02403023 3.50"-3.99" (8.89-10.13)5,750 (25,576)—24" (60.96)25.5" (64.77)02203024 — Note: E-Eye length. M-Mesh length at nominal diameter. Kellems® Wire Management ProductsStandard Duty Support Grips Single Eye, Single Weave, Tin-Coated Bronze and Stainless Steel E M E M E M IMPORTANT Read all breaking strength, safety and technical data relating to this product. Pages V-41 to V-45. ROMACINDUSTRIES,INC. ALPHA - 6 January 14, 2016 1-800-426-9341www.romac.com MADE IN U.S.A. Ma t e r i a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s ALPHA™ FC Restrained Flanged Coupling CATALOG NUMBERNOMINAL PIPE SIZE O.D. RANGE(inches) APPROX. WEIGHT(lbs.) 4.50 - 4.90 ALPHA-FC - 4.90 11.20 8.15 10.25 $252.00 29 A O.D. 10" 8" 6" 12" 4" 6.60 - 7.00 ALPHA-FC - 7.00 11.35 8.24 12.45 322.00 40 8.60 - 9.10 ALPHA-FC - 9.10 13.40 9.96 15.55 432.00 57 12.75 - 13.30 ALPHA-FC - 13.30 17.50 10.28 19.70 782.00 105 10.75 - 11.20 ALPHA-FC - 11.20 15.45 10.18 17.65 698.00 82 DIMENSIONSB LENGTH C HEIGHT To Order: Specify Alpha EC Catalog Number [shaded number in table above]. Example: For 8" DI or 8" IPS PVC pipe, order ALPHA FC -9.10 CASTINGS: All cast components (end rings, center ring and bolt guides) are ductile iron, meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM A 536, grade 65-45-12. GRIPPERS: Ductile (nodular) iron, meeting or exceeding ASTM A 536, grade 65-45-12. Machine sharpened and heat treated. Xylan 1424 coated for corrosion protection. GASKET: SBR per ASTM D2000 - classified by UL to meet NSF61, compounded for water and sewer service. NSF61 certified NBR gaskets and other compounds available upon request. O-Ring style flange gasket is NBR per ASTM D2000. DRAW-HOOK FASTENERS: 304L stainless steel. RAMP RUNNERS: Reinforced nylon. BOLT & NUT: 304 stainless steel, 5/8-11 bolts with heavy hex e-coated nuts. Fasteners provided with anti-galling protection. WASHER: 304 Stainless steel. COATINGS: Flanged coupling body fusion bonded epoxy Romacoat, NSF 61 certified. End rings are Romabond polyester. WORKING PRESSURE: up to 350 PSI. LIST PRICE STANDARD ALPHA FC Fits IPS PVC through Ductile Iron pipe OD's. ™ RESTRAINED FLANGED COUPLING PERMA-SHIELD H2S ® PRODUCT DATA SHEET SERIES 434 PRODUCT PROFILE GENERIC DESCRIPTION Modified Aliphatic Amine Epoxy Mortar COMMON USAGE A 100% solids, hybrid epoxy mortar designed for severe wastewater immersion and fume environments. Specifically formulated to withstand high levels of hydrogen sulfide gas (H2S), sulfuric acid (H2SO4), as well as other gases common to sewer exposures. Aggregate reinforcement provides additional resistance to abrasions and impacts. COLORS 5022 Beige Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice. The online catalog at www.tnemec.com should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative for current technical data and instructions. © September 11, 2012 by Tnemec Co., Inc. COATING SYSTEM SURFACER/FILLER/PATCHER 215, 217, 218 PRIMERS Concrete: Self-priming or Series 201 TOPCOATS Series 435 Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice. The online catalog at www.tnemec.com should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative for current technical data and instructions. SURFACE PREPARATION STEEL SSPC-SP5/NACE 1 White Metal Blast Cleaning with a 4.0 mil minimum angular anchor profile. CONCRETE Allow new cast-in-place concrete to cure a minimum of 28 days at 75°F (24°C). Verify concrete dryness and prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with NACE No. 6/SSPC-SP13 Joint Surface Preparation Standards and ICRI Technical Guidelines. Moisture vapor transmission should not exceed three lbs per 1,000 sq ft in a 24 hour period. (Reference ASTM F 1869 "Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.") Relative humidity should not exceed 80%. (Reference ASTM F 2170 "Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete using in situ Probes.") Abrasive blast, shot-blast or mechanically abrade concrete surfaces to remove laitance, curing compounds, hardeners, sealers and other contaminants and to provide a minimum ICRI-CSP 5 or greater surface profile. Large cracks, voids and other surface imperfections should be filled with a recommended filler or surfacer. CMU Allow mortar to cure for 28 days. Level protrusions and mortar spatter. ALL SURFACES Must be clean, dry and free of oil, grease and other contaminants. Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice. The online catalog at www.tnemec.com should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative for current technical data and instructions. TECHNICAL DATA VOLUME SOLIDS 100% (mixed) RECOMMENDED DFT 1/8 inch or 125 mils (3,125 microns) minimum. CURING TIME Temperature To Topcoat Place in Service Maximum Recoat 75°F (24°C) 8 hours 2 days 7 days 55°F (13°C) 12 hours 3 days 7 days Note: Curing time will vary with surface temperature, air movement, humidity and film thickness. Note: If more than 7 days have elapsed between coats, the Series 434 coated surface must be mechanically abraded before topcoating. VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS EPA Method 24: 0.15 lbs/gallon (18 grams/litre) HAPS 0.06 lbs/gal solids THEORETICAL COVERAGE 1,604 mil sq ft/gal (39.4 m²/L at 25 microns). See APPLICATION for coverage rates. NUMBER OF COMPONENTS Three: Part A (Amine), Part B (Epoxy) and Part C (Aggregate) PACKAGING PART A (Partially Filled) PART B (Partially Filled)PART C Aggregate WHEN MIXED Small Kit 1 gallon can 1 gallon can One bag with premeasured aggregate 2.5 gallons (9.5 L) Large Kit 6 gallon pail 3 gallon pail One bag with premeasured aggregate 5.0 gallons (18.9 L) NET WEIGHT PER GALLON 15.46 ± 0.25 lbs (7.01 ± .11 kg) (mixed) STORAGE TEMPERATURE Minimum 40°F (4°C) Maximum 110°F (43°C) For optimum application properties, material temperature should be between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C) prior to application. SHELF LIFE 12 months at recommended storage temperature. FLASH POINT - SETA Part A: 170°F (77°C) Part B: 170°F (77°C) HEALTH & SAFETY Paint products contain chemical ingredients which are considered hazardous. Read container label warning and Material Safety Data Sheet for important health and safety information prior to the use of this product. Keep out of the reach of children. Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice. The online catalog at www.tnemec.com should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative for current technical data and instructions. Page 1 of 2 APPLICATION COVERAGE RATES Before commencing, obtain and thoroughly read the Series 434 Surface Preparation and Application Guide. Large Kit (5.035 Gal) (Approx.)Small Kit (2.5 Gal) (Approx.) At 1/8 " (3.2 mm)64 sq ft (6.0 m²)32 sq ft (3.0 m²) Note: Application of coating below minimum recommended dry film thickness may adversely affect coating performance. WORKING TIME 30 minutes at 77°F (25°C) MIXING Mix the entire contents of Part A and Part B separately. Add the contents of the can marked Part B to Part A and blend both components, using a minimum 10 amp, 3/4 inch heavy duty drill with an “H” paddle drywall mixing blade (i.e., M713 mixing paddle) for one minute. Gradually add all the Part C aggregate to the liquid mix while under agitation and blend for another one to two minutes or until a uniform consistency is achieved. During the mixing process, scrape the sides and bottom of the container to ensure all of Parts A, B and C are blended together. Caution: Do not split kit, mix the entire kit as supplied. Do not reseal mixed material. An explosion hazard may be created. THINNING Do not thin. APPLICATION EQUIPMENT Spray Application: Use air powered immersion tube 11:1 Grover grout pump #397-042 or 9:1 WIWA 410 pump. Spray application must be followed by troweling (see below). Note: For detailed instructions, refer to the Series 434 Surface Preparation & Application Guide. Trowel: Mortar Hawk, steel concrete finishing trowels are required to spread the Series 434 to an even, minimum 1/8” thickness. For detailed instruction, refer to the Series 434 Surface Preparation & Application Guide. Finish Roll: Use a high quality 1/4” nap, shed resistant, woven fabric roller, lightly dampened with No. 2 Thinner or No. 42 Thinner to backroll and finish trowel and spray/trowel applications. SURFACE TEMPERATURE Minimum of 50°F (10°C) Maximum of 130°F (54°C). The surface should be dry and at least 5°F (3°C) above the dew point. HOLIDAY TESTING If required by project specifications, high voltage discontinuity (spark) testing shall be performed using a Tinker & Rasor AP/W High Voltage Holiday Tester, set at the voltage recommended in the Series 434 Surface Preparation and Application Guide. CLEANUP Flush and clean all equipment immediately after use with MEK or Tnemec’s No. 4 Thinner. For spray applications, equipment must be flushed after every three to five kits of mixed material. © September 11, 2012 by Tnemec Co., Inc. PRODUCT DATA SHEET PERMA-SHIELD H2S ® | SERIES 434 WARRANTY & LIMITATION OF SELLER'S LIABILITY: Tnemec Company, Inc. warrants only that its coatings represented herein meet the formulation standards of Tnemec Company, Inc. THE WARRANTY DESCRIBED IN THE ABOVE PARAGRAPH SHALL BE IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES THAT EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF. The buyer's sole and exclusive remedy against Tnemec Company, Inc. shall be for replacement of the product in the event a defective condition of the product should be found to exist and the exclusive remedy shall not have failed its essential purpose as long as Tnemec is willing to provide comparable replacement product to the buyer. NO OTHER REMEDY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST SALES, INJURY TO PERSON OR PROPERTY, ENVIRONMENTAL INJURIES OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS) SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO THE BUYER. Technical and application information herein is provided for the purpose of establishing a general profile of the coating and proper coating application procedures. Test performance results were obtained in a controlled environment and Tnemec Company makes no claim that these tests or any other tests, accurately represent all environments. As application, environmental and design factors can vary significantly, due care should be exercised in the selection and use of the coating. Tnemec Company Incorporated 6800 Corporate Drive Kansas City, Missouri 64120-1372 1-800-TNEMEC1 Fax: 1-816-483-3969 www.tnemec.com PDS434 Page 2 of 2 TNEME-LINER PRODUCT DATA SHEET SERIES 61 PRODUCT PROFILE GENERIC DESCRIPTION Cycloaliphatic Amine Epoxy COMMON USAGE Tightly cross-linked epoxy with excellent corrosion and chemical resistance. Principally used for immersion service, including fuel and crude oil storage, chemical containment and wastewater treatment. COLORS 5001 Gray and 5002 Beige FINISH Semi-gloss SPECIAL QUALIFICATIONS A two-coat system of Series 61 at 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils (100-150 dry microns) per coat passes the performance requirements of MIL-PRF-4556F. PERFORMANCE CRITERIA Extensive test data available. Contact your Tnemec representative for specific test results. Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice. The online catalog at www.tnemec.com should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative for current technical data and instructions. © November 05, 2012 by Tnemec Co., Inc. COATING SYSTEM PRIMERS Steel: Self-priming Concrete: Self-priming or Series 215, 217, 218 CMU: Series 215, 218 TOPCOATS Note: Series 61 can be topcoated with select Tank Armor linings depending on service conditions. Contact Tnemec Technical Service for recommendations. Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice. The online catalog at www.tnemec.com should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative for current technical data and instructions. SURFACE PREPARATION STEEL Immersion Service: SSPC-SP10/NACE 2 Near-White Blast Cleaning obtaining a minimum angular anchor profile of 2.0 mils (50 microns). CONCRETE Allow new concrete to cure for 28 days. Abrasive blast referencing SSPC-SP13/NACE 6, ICRI-CSP3-5 Surface Preparation of Concrete and Tnemec’s Surface Preparation and Application Guide. ALL SURFACES Must be clean, dry and free of oil, grease and other contaminants. Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice. The online catalog at www.tnemec.com should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative for current technical data and instructions. TECHNICAL DATA VOLUME SOLIDS 82.0 ± 2.0% (mixed) † RECOMMENDED DFT 1. For JP-4, JP-5, JP-8, Aviation Gas and Jet A-1: 4.0 to 6.0 mils (100 to 150 microns) per coat (minimum of two coats). 2. Most Other Applications: 8.0 to 12.0 mils (205 to 305 microns) per coat (minimum of two coats). Contact your Tnemec representative for specific recommendations. CURING TIME Temperature To Handle To Recoat Immersion 75°F (24°C) at 4.0 mils (100 microns) 6 hours 16-18 hours• 5 to 7 days 75°F (24°C) at 12.0 mils (305 microns) 11 hours 16-18 hours• 5 to 7 days Curing time varies with surface temperature, air movement, humidity and film thickness. • Maximum recoat time is 72 hours. If more than 72 hours have elapsed between coats, the coated surface must be scarified before topcoating. VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS EPA Method 24 Unthinned: 0.36 lbs/gallon (45 grams/litre) Thinned 6%: 0.71 lbs/gallon (85 grams/litre) Thinned 10%: 1.21 lbs/gallon (145 grams/litre) † HAPS Unthinned: 1.53 lbs/gal solids Thinned 10%: 2.42 lbs/gal solids THEORETICAL COVERAGE 1,315 mil sq ft/gal (32.3 m²/L at 25 microns). See APPLICATION for coverage rates. † NUMBER OF COMPONENTS Two: Part A (amine) and Part B (epoxy) MIXING RATIO By volume: One (Part A) to one (Part B) PACKAGING PART A PART B Yield (mixed) Large Kit 5 gallon pail (18.9 L) 5 gallon pail (18.9 L) 10 gallons (37.85 L) Small Kit 1 gallon can (3.79 L) 1 gallon can (3.79 L) 2 gallons (7.57 L) NET WEIGHT PER GALLON 13.10 ± 0.25 lbs (5.94 ± .11 kg) † STORAGE TEMPERATURE Minimum 20°F (-7°C) Maximum 110°F (43°C) For optimum application properties, material temperature should be above 60°F (16°C) prior to application. TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (Dry) Continuous 250°F (121°C) Intermittent 275°F (135°C) Performance in high temperature immersion applications depends on liquid media, temperature and substrate. Contact your Tnemec representative for more information. SHELF LIFE 24 months at recommended storage temperature. FLASH POINT - SETA Parts A & B: 81°F (27°C) HEALTH & SAFETY Paint products contain chemical ingredients which are considered hazardous. Read container label warning and Material Safety Data Sheet for important health and safety information prior to the use of this product. Keep out of the reach of children. Published technical data and instructions are subject to change without notice. The online catalog at www.tnemec.com should be referenced for the most current technical data and instructions or you may contact your Tnemec representative for current technical data and instructions. APPLICATION Page 1 of 2 COVERAGE RATES For JP-4, JP-5, JP-8 Aviation Gas, Jet A-1 Service Dry Mils (Microns)Wet Mils (Microns)Sq Ft/Gal (m²/Gal) Suggested 5.0 (125) 6.0 (150) 263 (24.4) Minimum 4.0 (100) 5.0 (125) 329 (30.6) Maximum 6.0 (150) 7.5 (190) 219 (20.4) Most Other Applications Dry Mils (Microns)Wet Mils (Microns)Sq Ft/Gal (m²/Gal) Suggested 10.0 (255) 12.0 (305) 132 (12.2) Minimum 8.0 (205) 10.0 (255) 164 (15.3) Maximum 12.0 (305) 14.5 (355) 110 (10.2) Allow for overspray and surface irregularities. Film thickness is rounded to the nearest 0.5 mil or 5 microns. Application of coating below minimum or above maximum recommended dry film thicknesses may adversely affect coating performance. † MIXING Power mix contents of each container, making sure no pigment remains on the bottom. Pour a measured amount of Part B into a clean container large enough to hold both components. Add an equal volume of Part A to Part B while under agitation. Continue agitation until the two components are thoroughly mixed. Do not use mixed material beyond pot life limits. Note: Both components must be above 60°F (16°C) prior to mixing. Mixing ratio is one to one by volume. A large volume of material will set up quickly if not applied or reduced in volume. Caution: Do not reseal mixed material. An explosion hazard may be created. THINNING Use No. 2 Thinner. For air spray, thin up to 10% or 12 oz (354 mL) per gallon. For airless spray or brush, thin up to 5% or 6 oz (177 mL) per gallon. Note: A maximum of 6% or 7 oz (207 mL) per gallon of No. 2 Thinner may be used to comply with VOC regulations. POT LIFE 2 1/2 hours at 60°F (16°C) 1 1/2 hours at 77°F (25°C) 45 minutes at 100°F (38°C) APPLICATION EQUIPMENT Air Spray Gun Fluid Tip Air Cap Air Hose ID Mat’l Hose ID Atomizing Pressure Pot Pressure DeVilbiss JGA E 765 or 704 5/16” or 3/8” (7.9 or 9.5 mm) 3/8” or 1/2” (9.5 or 12.7 mm) 60-90 psi (4.1-6.2 bar) 10-20 psi (0.7-1.4 bar) Low temperatures or longer hoses require higher pot pressure. Airless Spray Tip Orifice Atomizing Pressure Mat’l Hose ID Manifold Filter 0.015”-0.021” (380-535 microns) 3000-3800 psi (207-262 bar) 1/4” or 3/8” (6.4 or 9.5 mm) 60 mesh (250 microns) Use appropriate tip/atomizing pressure for equipment, applicator technique and weather conditions. Brush: Recommended for small areas only. Use high quality natural or synthetic bristle brushes. Note: Two or more coats may be required to obtain recommended film thicknesses. SURFACE TEMPERATURE Minimum 60°F (16°C) Maximum 135°F (57°C) The surface should be dry and at least 5°F (3°C) above the dew point. Coating will not cure below minimum surface temperature. CLEANUP Flush and clean all equipment immediately after use with the recommended thinner, xylol or MEK. † Values may vary with color. © November 05, 2012 by Tnemec Co., Inc. PRODUCT DATA SHEET TNEME-LINER | SERIES 61 WARRANTY & LIMITATION OF SELLER'S LIABILITY: Tnemec Company, Inc. warrants only that its coatings represented herein meet the formulation standards of Tnemec Company, Inc. THE WARRANTY DESCRIBED IN THE ABOVE PARAGRAPH SHALL BE IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES THAT EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF. The buyer's sole and exclusive remedy against Tnemec Company, Inc. shall be for replacement of the product in the event a defective condition of the product should be found to exist and the exclusive remedy shall not have failed its essential purpose as long as Tnemec is willing to provide comparable replacement product to the buyer. NO OTHER REMEDY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST SALES, INJURY TO PERSON OR PROPERTY, ENVIRONMENTAL INJURIES OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS) SHALL BE AVAILABLE TO THE BUYER. Technical and application information herein is provided for the purpose of establishing a general profile of the coating and proper coating application procedures. Test performance results were obtained in a controlled environment and Tnemec Company makes no claim that these tests or any other tests, accurately represent all environments. As application, environmental and design factors can vary significantly, due care should be exercised in the selection and use of the coating. Tnemec Company Incorporated 6800 Corporate Drive Kansas City, Missouri 64120-1372 1-800-TNEMEC1 Fax: 1-816-483-3969 www.tnemec.com PDS61 Page 2 of 2 For Concrete Pipe and Structures Ameron T-Lock PVC Sheet Liner ® Protective Lining Products Property Initial (Par. 2.4) Tensile Strength 2200 psi min. 2100 psi min. (15 MPa min.) 14.5 MPa min.) Elongation at break 200% min. 200% min. Shore durometer, Type D 1-sec. 50-60 ±5 (with respect to initial test results) 10-sec. 35-50 ±5 Weight change ±1.5% Page 1 of 4 2.3.3 Continuous locking extensions embedded in concrete shall withstand a test pull of at least 100 pounds per linear inch (1800 kg/m), applied perpendicularly to the concrete surface for a period of one minute, without rupture of the locking extensions or withdrawal from embedment. This test shall be made at a temperature of 70º- 80ºF (21º - 27ºC) inclusive. 2.3.4 All plastic liner plate sheets, including locking extensions, all joint, corner and welding strips shall be free of cracks, cleavages or other defects adversely affecting the protective characteristics of the material. The engineer may authorize the repair of such defects by approved methods. 2.3.5 The lining shall have good impact resistance, shall be flexible and shall have an elongation sufficient to bridge up to 1⁄4-inch (6 mm) settling cracks, which may occur in the pipe or in the joint after installation, without damage to the lining. 2.3.6 The lining shall be repairable at any time during the life of the pipe or the structure. 2.4 Chemical resistance* After conditioning to constant weight at 110ºF (43ºC), tensile specimens and weight change specimens shall be exposed to the following solutions for a period of 112 days at 77ºF±5º (25ºC±3º). At 28-day intervals, tensile specimens and weight change specimens shall be removed from each of the chemical solutions and tested in accordance with Paragraph 2.3.2. If any specimen fails to meet the 112-day requirement before completion of the 112-day exposure, the material will be subject to rejection. Chemical Solution Concentration Sulfuric acid 20%** Sodium hydroxide 5% Ammonium hydroxide 5%** Nitric acid 1%** Ferric chloride 1% Sodium hypochlorite 1% Soap 0.1% Detergent (linear alkyl benzyl sulfonate or LAS) 0.1% Bacteriological BOD not less than 700 ppm. * This is to be used as a pre-qualification test and when material formulations are changed.** Volumetric percentages of concentrated C.P. grade reagents. 2.5 Details and dimensions of basic size sheets (4-foot widths) 2.5.1 Liner sheets shall be a minimum of 0.065 inch (1.65 mm) in thickness. Locking extensions (T-shaped) of the same material as that of the liner shall be integrally extruded with the sheet. Locking extensions shall be approximately 2 1⁄2 inches (64 mm) apart and shall be at least 0.375-inch (9.5 mm) high. Typical Specifications 1. General This specification covers the supply and installation of a flexible PVC sheet liner with continuous locking extensions in reinforced concrete pipe and auxiliary structures to effectively protect the exposed concrete surfaces from corrosion. To accomplish this, the liner must be continuous and free of pinholes both across the joints and in the liner itself. All work for and in connection with the installation of the lining in concrete pipe, and the field sealing and welding of joints, shall be done in strict conformity with all applicable specifications, instructions and recommendations of the lining manufacturer. The manufacturer of the lining shall furnish an affidavit attesting to the successful use of its material as a lining for sewer pipes for a minimum period of 50 years in sewage conditions recognized as corrosive or otherwise detrimental to concrete. 2. Material 2.1 Liner shall be Ameron T-Lock as manufactured by Ameron Protective Lining Products, Brea, California. 2.2 Composition The material used in the liner, welding strips and other accessory items, shall be a combination of poly vinyl chloride resin, pigments and plasticizers, specially compounded to remain flexible. Poly vinyl chloride resin shall constitute not less than 99 percent by weight, of the resin used in the formulation. Copolymer resins will not be permitted. 2.3 Physical Properties 2.3.1 All plastic liner plate sheets, welding strips and other accessory items, shall have the following physical properties when tested at 77ºF±5º (25ºC±3º). 2.3.2 Tensile specimens shall be prepared and tested in accor- dance with ASTM D412 using Die B. Weight change speci- mens shall be 1-inch (25-mm) by 3-inch (75-mm) samples. Specimens for testing of initial physical properties may be taken from liner sheet and welding strip at any time prior to final acceptance of the work. 3.1.7 In removing forms, care should be taken to protect the lining from damage. Sharp instruments shall not be used to pry forms from lined surfaces. When forms are removed, any nails that remain in the lining shall be pulled, without tearing the lining, and the resulting holes clearly marked. 3.1.8 All nail and tie holes and all cut, torn and seriously abraded areas in the lining shall be patched. Patches made entirely with welding strip shall be fused to the liner over patch area. Larger patches may consist of smooth liner sheet applied over the damaged area with adhesive. All edges must be covered with welding strip fused to the patch and the sound lining adjoining the damaged area. 3.1.9 Hot joint compounds, such as coal tar, shall not be poured or applied to the lining. 3.1.10 The contractor shall take all necessary measures to prevent damage to installed lining from equipment and materials used in or taken through the work. 3.2 Application to concrete pipe - Special requirements 3.2.1 The lining shall be set flush with the inner edge of the bell or spigot end of a pipe section and shall extend to the op- posite end or to approximately 4 inches (100 mm) beyond the opposite end depending upon the type of lining joint to be made with the adjoining concrete pipe. 3.2.2 Wherever concrete pipe or cast-in-place structures protected with lining join structures not so lined (such as brick structures, concrete pipe or cast-in-place structures with clay lining or clay pipe), the lining shall be extended over and around the end of the pipe and back into the structure for not less than 4 inches (100 mm). This protecting cap may be molded or fabricated from the lining material but need not be locked into the pipe. 3.2.3 Where a pipe lateral (not of plastic lined concrete) is installed through lined concrete pipe, the seal between the lined portion and the lateral shall be made by the method prescribed for cast-in-place structures under Paragraph 3.4.2. 3.2.4 Lined concrete pipe may be cured by standard curing methods. 3.2.5 Care shall be exercised in handling, transporting and placing lined pipe to prevent damage to the lining. No interior hooks or slings shall be used in lifting pipe. All handling op- erations shall be done with an exterior sling or with a suitable fork lift. 3.2.6 On pipe having a 360º liner coverage, the longitudinal edges of the sheet shall be butt welded. When pipe tubes are furnished, these are shop-welded joints made in accordance with 2.6.1. 3.2.7 No pipe with damaged lining will be accepted until the damage has been repaired to the satisfaction of the engineer. 3.3 Field joints in lining for concrete pipe 3.3.1 The joint between sections of lined pipe shall be prepared in the following manner: If required, the inside joint shall be filled and carefully point- ed with cement mortar in such a manner that the mortar shall not, at any point, extend into the pipe beyond the straight line connecting the surfaces of the adjacent pipe sections. Pipe joints must be dry before lining joints ar made. 3.3.2 All mortar and other foreign material shall be removed from lining surfaces adjacent to the pipe joint, leaving them clean and dry. 2.5.2 Sheets shall have a nominal width of 48 inches (1200 mm) and a length of not more than 24 feet (7.3 m), except that longer lengths may be supplied on special order. Lengths specified shall include a tolerance at a ratio of ±1⁄4 inch (6 mm) for each 100 inches (2500 mm). 2.5.3 Sheets not used for shop fabrication into larger sheets shall be shop tested for pinholes using an electrical spark tester set between 18,000 and 22,000 volts. Any holes shall be repaired and retested. 2.5.4 Special sized, factory pre-welded sheets are available on special order. 2.6 Pipe-size sheets and accessories 2.6.1 Pipe linings shall be supplied as pipe-size sheets, fabricated by shop-welding the basic-size sheets together. Shop welds shall be made by lapping sheets a minimum of 1⁄2 inch and applying heat and pressure to the lap to produce a continuous welded joint. Tensile strength measured across shop-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D412 shall be at least 2000 psi (14 MPa). 2.6.2 If required, strap channels shall be 1-inch (25-mm) wide maximum and formed by removing the locking extensions so that a maximum of 3⁄16 inch (5 mm) remains. 2.6.3 Sheets also can be supplied in prefabricated, pipe-size tu- bular-shaped sheets, ready to lower onto the inner pipe forms. These normally do not require the use of strap channels. 2.6.4 Transverse flaps may be provided at the ends of sheets for pipe. Locking extensions shall be removed from flaps so that a maximum of 1⁄32 inch (1mm) of the base of the locking extension is left on the sheet. 2.6.5 Welding strips shall be approximately 1-inch (25 mm) wide with a minimum width of 7⁄8 inch (22 mm). The edges of weld strips shall be beveled in the manufacturing process. Thickness of weld strip shall be a nominal 1⁄8 inch (3 mm). 2.6.6 Joint strips for pipe shall be 4-inches (100 mm) wide with a minimum width of 3 3⁄4 inches (94 mm). Thickness of joint strips shall be a nominal of 3⁄32 inch (2.3 mm). 2.6.7 Prior to preparing sheets for shipment, they shall be tested for pinholes using an electrical spark tester set be- tween 18,000 and 22,000 volts. Any holes shall be repaired and retested. 3. Installation of Lining 3.1 General 3.1.1 Installation of the lining, including preheating of sheets in cold weather and the welding of all joints, shall be done in accordance with the recommendations of the liner manufac- turer. 3.1.2 Coverage of the lining shall not be less than the minimum shown on the plans. 3.1.3 The lining shall be installed with the locking extensions running parallel with the longitudinal axis of the pipe. 3.1.4 The lining shall be held snugly in place against inner forms. 3.1.5 Locking extensions shall terminate not more than 1 1⁄2 inches (38 mm) from the end of the inside surface of the pipe section. Joint flaps when used shall extend approximately 4 inches (100 mm) beyond the end of the inside surface. 3.1.6 Concrete poured against lining shall be vibrated, spaded or compacted in a careful manner so as to protect the lining and produce a dense, homogenous concrete, securely anchor- ing the locking extensions into the concrete. Page 2 of 4 Page 3 of 4 3.3.3 Field joints in the lining at pipe joints may be either of the following described types: Type P-1: The joint shall be made with a separate 4-inch (100 mm) joint strip and two welding strips. The 4-inch (100 mm) joint strip shall be centered over the joint, heat sealed to the lining, then welded along each edge to adjacent liner sheets with a 1-inch (25 mm) weld strip. The 4-inch (100 mm) joint strip shall lap over each sheet a minimum of 1⁄2 inch (13 mm). Type P-2: The joint shall be made with a joint flap with lock- ing extensions removed per Paragraph 2.6.4 and extending approximately 4 inches (100 mm) beyond the pipe end. The joint flap shall overlap the lining in the adjacent pipe section a minimum of 1⁄2 inch (13 mm) and be heat-sealed in place prior to welding. The field joint shall be completed by welding the flap to the lining of the adjacent pipe using 1-inch (25 mm) weld strip. Care shall be taken to protect the flap from damage. Excessive tension and distortion in bending back the flap to expose the pipe joint during laying and joint mortaring shall be avoided. At temperatures below 50ºF (10ºC), heating of the liner may be required to avoid damage. 3.3.4 The joint flap or strip on beveled pipe shall be trimmed to a width (measured from the end of the spigot) of ap- proximately 4 inches (100 mm) for the entire circumferential length of the lining. 3.3.5 All welding of joints is to be in strict conformance with the specifications and instructions of the lining manufacturer. Welding shall fuse both sheets and weld strip together to provide a continuous joint equal in corrosion resistance and impermeability to the basic liner sheet. Hot-air welding tools shall provide effluent air to the sheets to be joined at a temperature between 500º and 600ºF (260º and 316ºC). Welding tools shall be held approximately 1⁄2 inch (13 mm) from and moved back and forth over the junction of the two materials to be joined. The welding tool shall be moved slowly enough as the weld progresses to cause a small bead of molten material to be visible along both edges and in front of the weld strip. 3.3.6 The following special requirement shall apply when the liner coverage is 360 degrees: When groundwater is encountered the lining joint shall not be made until pumping of groundwater has been discontinued for at least three days and no visible leakage is evident at the joint. When welding the downstream side of a joint strip or flap, do not weld 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) at the pipe invert to provide relief of potential future groundwater buildup. 3.4 Application to cast-in-place concrete structures - Special requirements 3.4.1 Liner sheets shall be closely fitted and properly secured to the inner forms. Sheets shall be cut to fit curved and warped surfaces using a minimum number of separate pieces. 3.4.2 Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the lining shall be returned at least 3 inches (75 mm) at the surfaces of contact be- tween the concrete structure and items not of concrete (including manhole frames, gate guides, clay pipe or brick manholes and clay or cast iron pipes). The same procedure shall be followed at joints where the type of protective lining is changed or the new work is built to join existing unlined concrete. At each return, the returned liner shall be sealed to the item in contact with the plastic-lined concrete using Ameron T-Lock 19Y adhesive system. If the liner cannot be sealed with this adhesive because of the joint at the return being too wide or rough or because of safety regula- tions, the joint space shall be densely caulked with lead wool or other approved caulking material to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm) and finished with a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) of an approved corrosion resistant material. 3.5 Joints in lining for cast-in-place concrete structures 3.5.1 Lining at joints shall be free of all mortar and other for- eign material and shall be clean and dry before joints are made. 3.5.2 Field joints in the lining shall be of the following described types, used as prescribed: Type C-1: The joint shall be made with a separate 4-inch (100 mm) joint strip and two welding strips. The 4-inch (100 mm) joint strip shall be centered over the joint, heat-sealed to the liner then welded along each edge to adjacent sheets with a 1-inch (25 mm) wide welding strip. The width of the space between adjacent sheets shall not exceed 2 inches (50 mm). The 4-inch (100 mm) joint strip shall lap over each sheet a minimum of 1⁄2 inch (13 mm). It may be used at any trans- verse or longitudinal joint. Type C-2: The joint shall be made by lapping sheets not less than 1⁄2 inch (13 mm). One 1-inch (25 mm) welding strip is required. The upstream sheet shall overlap the one down- stream. The lap shall be heat-sealed into place prior to weld- ing on the 1-inch (25 mm) welding strip. Type C-3: The joint shall be made by applying 2-inch (50 mm) wide waterproof tape or 1-inch (25 mm) wide welding strip on the back of the maximum 1⁄4-inch (6 mm) gap butt joint or by some other method approved by the engineer to prevent wet concrete from getting under the sheet. After the forms have been stripped, a 1-inch (25 mm) welding strip shall be applied over the face of the sheet. 3.5.3 All welding is to be strict conformance with the specifi- cations of the lining manufacturer and Paragraph 3.3.5. 3.6 Testing and repairing damaged surfaces 3.6.1 After the pipe is installed in the trench, all surfaces covered with lining, including welds, shall be tested with an approved electrical holiday detector (Tinker & Rasor Model No. AP-W with power pack) with the instrument set between 18,000 and 22,000 volts. All welds shall be physically tested by a nondestructive prob- ing method. All patches over holes, or repairs to the liner wherever damage has occurred, shall be accomplished in accordance with Paragraph 3.1.8. 3.6.2 Each transverse welding strip which extends to a lower edge of the liner will be tested by the purchasing agency. The welding strips shall extend 2-inches (50 mm) below the liner to provide a tab. A 10-pound (5 kg) pull will be applied to each tab. The force will be applied normal to the face of the structure by means of a spring balance. Liner adjoining the welding strip will be held against the concrete during applica- tion of the force. The 10-pound (5 kg) pull will be maintained if a weld failure develops, until no further separation occurs. Defective welds will be retested after repairs have been made. Tabs shall be trimmed away neatly by the installer of the liner after the welding strip has passed inspection. Inspection shall be made within 2 days after the joint has been completed in order to prevent tearing the protecting weld strip and con- sequent damage to the liner from equipment and materials used in or taken through the work. Page 4 of 4 Warranty Ameron warrants that the product conforms to the specific description in Ameron trade literature as to character and quality of the raw materials, workmanship and adaptability for recommended use. Within one year from date of purchase, Ameron shall supply replacement material for this product or any portion thereof, or at its option equivalent material, F.O.B. Ameron manufacturing facility, if it fails to meet the forego- ing warranty, provided that installation and application of the product have been properly accomplished and that Ameron has been promptly notified of the defect. The preceding constitutes the sole remedy of the Buyer and the sole liability of Ameron for product defect. No other express or implied warranties, whether of merchantability or of fitness for any particular purpose or use, shall apply. Ameron shall not be responsible for consequential damages. Ameron’s Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale apply to purchase of this product. The product data sheet and the recommendations for usage it contains were based on test data believed to be reliable, and are intended for use by personnel having skill and know-how, at their own discretion and risk, in accordance with current industry practice and normal operating conditions. Varia- tion in environment, changes in operating procedures or extrapolation of data may cause unsatisfactory results. Since we have no control over the conditions or service, we expressly disclaim responsibility for the results obtained or for any consequential or incidental effects of any kind. Also refer to Ameron “Safety Precautions,” and Ameron International Corporation—Terms and Conditions of Sale. Ameron Protective Lining Products • 201 North Berry Street, P.O. Box 1629 • Brea, California 92822-1629 Phone: (714) 256-7755 • Fax: (714) 256-7750 • E-mail: t-lock@ameron.com • www.amerontlock.com ©2003 Ameron International R 8/03 • AS-1 • PDF 3.02 PUMPS Rev. 1-3-18 This section is structured as follows: 3.02.1 DATA SHEETS HIDROSTAL E5K-L PRE-ROTATION BASIN 3.02.1 DATA SHEETS DATA SHEETS FOLLOW THIS PAGE Pump Data Sheet - Hidrostal US Company: Romtec Utilities Name: HIGHGATE COMMUNITY Date: 02/22/2019 Pump: Size: E5K-L Type:HIDROSTAL Synch Speed:Adjustable Curve:CUR-E5K-L Dia:9.75 in Impeller:E5K-L Pump Limits: Temperature:--- Wkg Pressure:--- Sphere Size:2.75 in Search Criteria: Flow: 44.6 ft Fluid: Water SG:1 Density:62.4 lb/ft³ Viscosity:1.1 cP Temperature:60 °F Vapor Pressure:0.256 psi a Atm Pressure:14.7 psi a Motor: Consult Hidrostal US to select a motor for this pump. Near Miss: 33.5 ft 450 US gpm Head: --- Static Head: Dimensions:Suction: 5 inDischarge: 6 in Name: Pump Selection Warnings: None --- Duty Point --- Flow:549 US gpm Head:50 ft Eff:73.4% Power:9.43 hp NPSHr:5.22 ft --- Design Curve --- Shutoff Head:101 ft Shutoff dP:43.5 psi Min Flow:245 US gpm BEP:76% @ 720 US gpm NOL Power: 9.8 hp @ 260 US gpm --- Max Curve --- Max Power: 9.8 hp @ 260 US gpm Speed:1800 rpm Performance Evaluation: Flow Speed Head Efficiency Power NPSHr US gpm rpm ft %hp ft 540 1800 50.6 73 9.43 5.19 450 1800 57.1 68 9.47 5.22 360 1800 64.2 61 9.61 5.52 270 1800 73.5 51 9.79 5.93 180 1800 ------------ Selected from catalog: Hidrostal US.60, Vers 1.2 Company:Romtec Utilities Name:HIGHGATE COMMUNITY Date:02/22/2019 Hidrostal US Catalog: Hidrostal US.60, Vers 1.2 HIDROSTAL - Adjustable Design Point:450 US gpm, 44.6 ft Static Head: 33.5 ft Size:E5K-L Speed:1800 rpm Dia:9.75 in Curve:CUR-E5K-L Impeller:E5K-L Service Factor 1.03 MAX VFD POWER Type IMMERSIBLE IMMERSIBLE Speed 1 SPEED 1 SPEED Size TYPE E TYPE E Synchronous Speed 1800 1800 Motor Model EEXK4‐MYAK EEXK4‐MYAK Voltage & Connected 230/460V CONTECTED 460V 230/460V CONTECTED 460V HP @100%14.8 13.2 RPM @100%1760 1764 Efficiency @100%83 83 Power Factor @100%84 82 Input KW @100%13.3 11.9 Amps (460V) @100%19.9 18.2 HP @75%11.1 10 RPM @75%1770 1773 Efficiency @75%83 81.5 Power Factor @75%79 76 Input KW @75%10.0 9.1 Amps (460V) @75%15.9 15.0 HP @50%7.4 N/A RPM @50%1780 N/A Efficiency @50%79 N/A Power Factor @50%68 N/A Input KW @50%7.0 N/A Amps (460V) @50%12.9 N/A Start Amps (460V)308 308 NEMA/NEC Code Letter GG Cable Type PURWIL EMC PURWIL EMC Power Cable OD 7/8" 7/8" Power Cable Leads (# X mm)4X10 4X10 Control Cable OD 7/16" 7/16" Control Cable Leads (# X mm)4X1.5 4X1.5 Control Cable OD 7/16" 7/16" Control Cable Leads (# X mm)5X1.5 5X1.5 Locked rotor/ run torque 4.0 4.0 Weight (lbs.)350 350 Specific Wire Diagram EL‐2023‐1000en EL‐2023‐1000en Relay Wire Diagram WIR‐1SPEED1POWER WIR‐1SPEED1POWER Maximum Ambient Temperature: 40C Explosion Proof, Class 1, Division 1, Group C & D, Class F Insulation Motor Data is Typical.  Subject to Change. 2016 Copyright © 2016 HIDROSTAL LLC. All Rights Reserved.  April 2016 EEXK4‐MYAK Motor Data Maximum Temperature Rise (of windings): 115C A A 0.75in 19mm 12.80in 325mm 20.67in 525mm C K 15.91in 404mm 2.36in 60mm 31.50in MIN 800mm MIN 5.91in 150mm 7.41in 188mm 17.92in 455mm 28.26in 718mm 2.43in 62mm 2X 1 1/2" SCH 40 PIPE (BY OTHERS) 4X ANCHOR BOLTS (BY OTHERS) 2 3 3 3 3 11.42in 290mm 9.06in 230mm 0.81in 21mm (4 HOLES) FAST-OUT BASE PLATE (MOUNTING HOLE LOCATION) (SCALE: 1:20) 1 B B 25.50in MIN 648mm MIN 23.50in MIN 597mm MIN 3.15in 80mm 21.53in 547mm "A" MAX LIFTING BAILTO BOTTOM OF SUCTION 4 5 31.50in MIN 800mm MIN 23.50in MIN 597mm MIN TOP VIEW 11.00in 279mm (O.D.) 5.98in 152mm (I.D.) 0.88in 22mm (8 SLOTS) 9.50in 241mm (B.C.)6" SUCTION FLANGE (SCALE: 1:12) 10.00in 254mm (O.D.) 4.92in 125mm (I.D.) 0.88in 22mm (8 HOLES) 8.50in 216mm (B.C.) 5" DISCHARGE FLANGE (SCALE: 1:12) 5. BASE ELBOW REQUIRES ELEVATION ADJUSTMENT FROM FLOOR TO PUMP SUCTION. ORDERING SPARE PARTS. 4. SUCTION AND DISCHARGE FLANGE MATE WITH CLASS 125 FLANGES. 3. CLOCKWISE ROTATION VIEWED FROM SHAFT END; CCW IS NOT AVAILABLE. 2. PUMP SIZE, MODEL AND SERIAL NUMBER MUST BE SPECIFIED WHEN NOTES: 1. PUMP AND ACCESSORIES ARE DESIGNED FOR CONTINUOUS SERVICE. * INCLUDES 82' OF CABLES & LIFTING BAIL * * VARIES PER DEPTH OF WET WELL BILL OF MATERIALS ITEM QTY.DESCRIPTION APPROX. WEIGHT 1 1 FAST-OUT BASE PLATE 50 LBS. 2 1 FAST-OUT ELBOW (5X6)120 LBS. 3 1 PUMP SEE TABLE BELOW 4 *INTERMEDIATE GUIDE RAIL BRACKET 10 LBS. 5 1 TOP GUIDE RAIL BRACKET 10 LBS. MOTOR SIZE APPROX. LIFTING WEIGHT (LBS.) EE4B4 900 LBS. EE4S4 950 LBS. EEXA6 550 LBS. EEXK4 600 LBS. EEXK6 600 LBS. EEXO6 600 LBS. EEXP4 650 LBS. EEXW4 750 LBS. EEYY6 550 LBS. EEYY8 500 LBS. EKXA6 550 LBS. EKXR8 500 LBS. PUMP SIZE A C K E5K-L, -LM 67.13 [1705mm]9.05 [230mm]4.49 [114mm] E5K-LL/-SS/-M/-H/-S 67.68 [1719mm]9.60 [244mm]3.93 [100mm] A B C D 1234 A B C D DATE: DRAWING NUMBER: B DESCRIPTION: SHEET SCALE: DO NOT SCALE DRAWING WEIGHT: STANDARD MACHINE TOLERANCES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES .XX ±0.02.XXX ±0.005X/X ±1/32 THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION INSTALLATIONE5K-L/-LM/-S/-H/-M/-LS/-LLIMMERSIBLE/SUBMERSIBLEVERTICAL FAST-OUT REV DATE ZONE DESCRIPTION APPROVED 5678 16235487 REV.DWG. SIZE:1 OF 1 PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DRAWING IS THE SOLE PROPERTY OF HIDROSTAL LLC. ANY REPRODUCTION IN PART OR AS A WHOLE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF HIDROSTAL LLC IS PROHIBITED. Copyright © 2015 Hidrostal LLC All Rights Reserved.CHECKED BY: DRAWN BY: MODEL:SALES ORDER: BREAK OUTSIDE EDGES .005-.035INSIDE CORNER R .035 MAXALL DRILL & TAP DEPTHS ±0.06.005 TIR.005 TIR .005 TIR .005 TIR ± .5°125 RMS INS-IS-E5K-VFO 01/27/16TES TM TM TM TM TM TM TM E5K-L E5K-LSE5K-LL E5K-LM E5K-ME5K-HE5K-STM E5K B A 04/19/16 REVISED DIM. L, WAS 5 7/8, NOW IS 5 15/16. HIDROSTAL PUMPSNorth America TD UPDATED DRAWING AND ADDED B.O.M AND WEIGHTS.07/19/18B 45.25in[1149mm] 74.50in[1892mm] 35.00in[889mm] 45.25in 1149mm 74.50in 1892mm 76.00in 1930mm 49.25in 1251mm 49.25in[1250mm] 76.00in[1930mm] 35.00in[889mm] PREROSTAL™ BASI & PREROSTAOL™ FRAMESIZE 800 (MODIFIED)PREROSTAL™ BASI & PREROSTAOL™ FRAMESIZE 800 (STANDARD) A B C D 1234 A B C D DATE: DRAWING NUMBER: B DESCRIPTION: SHEET.SCALE: DO NOT SCALE DRAWING WEIGHT: STANDARD MACHINE TOLERANCES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES .XX ±0.02.XXX ±0.005X/X ±1/32 THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION REV DATE ZONE DESCRIPTION APPROVED 5678 16235487 REV.DWG. SIZE:1 OF 1 PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DRAWING IS THE SOLE PROPERTY OF HIDROSTAL LLC. ANY REPRODUCTION IN PART OR AS A WHOLE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF HIDROSTAL LLC IS PROHIBITED. Copyright © 2015 Hidrostal LLC All Rights Reserved.CHECKED BY: DRAWN BY: MODEL:SALES ORDER: BREAK OUTSIDE EDGES .005-.035INSIDE CORNER R .035 MAXALL DRILL & TAP DEPTHS ±0.06.005 TIR.005 TIR .005 TIR .005 TIR ± .5°125 RMS HIDROSTAL PUMPSNorth America SO13699 04/11/17TES TD TMF6K F6K-HTM F6K-STM INSTALLATIONF6K-H/-S (FE5B4 MOTOR)IMMERSIBLE/SUBMERSIBLEVERTICAL FAST-OUT A A 4.00in 102mm 23.63in 600mm 76.00in 1930mm 16.52in 420mm 31.27in 794mm 30.68in 779mm 35.00in 889mm 47.79in 1214mm 45.10in 1146mm 30.90in 785mm 26.85in 682mm 2.36in 60mm 40.00in 1016mm 8.50in 216mm 97.65in MAX 2480mm MAX CL OF LIFTING BAIL TO BOTTOM OF SUCTION BELLMOUTH AA FAST-OUT SEE DETAIL A 6" DISCHARGE DISCHARGE PIPING (BY OTHERS) GUIDE RAILS 1 1/2" SCH 40 PIPE (BY OTHERS) DETAIL B 40" X 36" MINIMUM HATCH OPENING FOR PUMP REMOVAL 4 6 8 7 2 3 FAST-OUT/GUIDE SHOE ARRANGEMENT PREROSTAL™ BASIN WITH PREROSTAL™ FRAME SIZE 800 (SCALE: 1:40) 35.00in [840mm] 76.00in [1930mm]43.25in [1099mm] 1 B 9.06in 230mm 11.42in 290mm 0.79in 20mm (4 SLOTS)FAST-OUT (HOLE LOCATION) 34.22in 869mm 10.88in 276mm 21.61in 549mm 43.25in 1099mm 9.73in 247mm SECTION A-A 1.57in 40mm 3.15in 80mm 2.36in 60mm DETAIL B (SCALE: 1:10) 9 3.13in 80mm 35.00in 889mm 47.79in 1214mm 12.79in 325mm 20.67in 525mm 9.31in 236mm 20.75in 527mm DETAIL C PREROTATION™ BASIN FAST-OUT GUIDE SHOE PUMP 5 DETAIL A (SCALE: 1:30) 0.38in 10mm 0.52in 13mm FAST-OUT BASE PREROSTAL™ FRAME MOUNTING PLATEDETAIL C (SCALE: 1:14) 0.88in 22mm (8 SLOTS) 11.00in 279mm (O.D.) 5.91in 150mm (I.D.) 9.50in 241mm (B.C.) 6" DISCHARGE FLANGE (FAST-OUT) (SCALE: 1:14)B VARIES PER DEPTH OF WET WELL* B BILL OF MATERIALS ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION APPROX. WEIGHT 1 1 PREROSTAL™ BASIN & PREROSTAL™ FRAME 300 LBS. 2 1 FAST-OUT ELBOW 250 LBS. 3 1 GUIDE SHOE 75 LBS. 4 1 SUCTION BELLMOUTH 100 LBS. 5 1 SPOOL PIECE 50 LBS. 6 1 PUMP AND MAX. MOTOR 1000 LBS. 7 1 LIFTING BAIL ASSEMBLY 20 LBS. 8 *INTERMEDIATE GUIDE RAIL BRACKET 10 LBS. 9 1 TOP GUIDE RAIL BRACKET 10 LBS. A B C D 1234 A B C D DATE: DRAWING NUMBER: B DESCRIPTION: SHEET SCALE: DO NOT SCALE DRAWING WEIGHT: STANDARD MACHINE TOLERANCES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES .XX ±0.02 .XXX ±0.005 X/X ±1/32 THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION REV DATE ZONE DESCRIPTION APPROVED 5678 16235487 REV.DWG. SIZE:1 OF 1 PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DRAWING IS THE SOLE PROPERTY OF HIDROSTAL LLC. ANY REPRODUCTION IN PART OR AS A WHOLE WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF HIDROSTAL LLC IS PROHIBITED. Copyright © 2015 Hidrostal LLC All Rights Reserved.CHECKED BY: DRAWN BY: MODEL:SALES ORDER: BREAK OUTSIDE EDGES .005-.035 INSIDE CORNER R .035 MAX ALL DRILL & TAP DEPTHS ±0.06 .005 TIR .005 TIR .005 TIR .005 TIR ± .5°125 RMS HIDROSTAL PUMPS North America A 11/16/16 THE ISOMETRIC VIEW DIM. WAS INCORRECT. (WAS 84.00) & HATCH OPENING WAS 48". TD TES 06/29/16 B INS-IS-E5K-PRE-800 TM TM TM E5K-LS E5K-LL E5K-M TM TM E5K-H E5K-S TM E5K GENERAL ARRANGEMENTFAST-OUT W/ GUIDE SLIDEE5K-S/-H/-M/-LL/-LS/-L/-LM IMMERSIBLE PUMPPREROTATION™, SIZE 800 BASIN B 02/19/18 ADDED DIS. FLANGE VIEW, REVISED BASIN WIDTH, ADDED ITEM 7 & 8. E5K-L E5K-LM TM TM 3.03 VALVE VAULT This section is structured as follows: 3.03.1 PRODUCTION DRAWING(S) 3.03.2 DATA SHEETS HATCH BUTYL SEALANT JOINT WRAP PIPE BOOT FLANGE ADAPTER RETAINER GLAND PRESSURE GAUGE ISO RING BALL VALVE CHECK VALVE PLUG VALVE 3.03.1 PRODUCTION DRAWING(S) PRODUCTION DRAWINGS FOLLOW THIS PAGE. IF THEY ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THIS SSDS, THEY WILL BE INCLUDED IN THE NEXT REVISION. 3.03.2 DATA SHEETS DATA SHEETS FOLLOW THIS PAGE 80"2032mm 14"6mm 14 "6mm 1 4 " 6m m 56 " 14 2 2 m m 1 4 " 6m m 9721 32"248 0 m m CO V E R A N D G R A T E H I N G E D T H I S S I D E CO V E R A N D G R A T E H I N G E D T H I S S I D E LIFT HANDLE SLAM LOCK RECESSED PADLOCKCLIP 44 " 11 1 8 m m 5 12"140mm 56 " 14 2 2 m m BEARINGPLATE BEARINGPLATE 64"1626mm 80"2032mm 74"1880mm HEAVY DUTYSTAINLESS HINGE PADLOCK CLIP SAFETY GRATE RIGHT COVER LEFT COVER HOLD OPENARM ALUMINUMANCHORS FRAMEASSEMBLY SIDEDRAIN COUPLER LIFT SPRING Style ''CHS2'' access hatch, as manufactured by EJ. Material shall be 6061-t6 aluminum for bars, angles, and extrusions. 1/4'' diamond plate shall be 5086 aluminum. Unit designed heavy duty, for 16,000 lbs + 30% impact h-20 wheel loads, over a 10'' x 20'' contact area. Frame and bearing plate must be cast into and supported by concrete designed for H-20 wheel loads. Unit not suitable for wheel line placement. Unit supplied with a heavy duty pneu-spring, for ease of operation when opening safety grate. Grate shall be counterbalanced, so one person can easily open the safety grate. Frame shall be of extruded aluminum. A dovetail groove shall be extruded into the seat of the frame for a 1/8'' silicone gasket. Each hatch shall be equipped with a stainless steel hold open arm. Door shall lock open in the 90 degree position. Hold open arm shall be fastened to the frame with a 1/2'' grade 316 stainless steel bolt. Hinges shall be of heavy duty design. Material shall be grade 316 stainless steel. Each hinge shall have a grade 316 stainless steel, 3/8'' diameter hinge pin. Hinge shall be fastened to the channel frame and diamond plate with grade 316 stainless steel bolts and ny-lock nuts. Aluminum shall be supplied with mill finish. Exterior of frame which comes in contact with concrete shall have one coat black primer. Each hatch shall be equipped with a stainless steel lift handle. Lift handle shall be flush with top of 1/4'' diamond plate. Each ''CHS2'' style hatch is supplied with a 1-1/2'' threaded Drain coupler on side of channel frame for pipe connection. Each hatch shall be supplied with a grade 316 stainless steel slam lock, with key way projected by a threaded plug. Plug shall be flush with the top of the 1/4'' diamond plate. Slam lock shall be fastened with four grade 316 stainless steel bolts and washers. Each hatch shall be supplied with an recessed padlock clip (padlock by others). Product Number Design Features Revised By: MJB8/11/2016 CONFIDENTIAL: This drawing is the property of EJ Group, Inc. and embodies confidential information, registered marks, patents, trade secret information,and/or know how that is the property of EJ Group, Inc.Copyright © 2012 EJ Group, Inc.All rights reserved. HR687VVH20SA -Materials -Design LoadAluminum Heavy Duty (Not in Driving Lane)-Open Area -CoatingMill Finish - Designates Machined Surface Certification - NPR14-1702- WT 554 LBS.- Country of Origin: USA Disclaimer Drawing Revision Weights (lbs/kg), dimensions (inches/mm)and drawings provided for your guidance. Wereserve the right to modify specifications withoutprior notice. Contact 800 626 4653ejco.com ® Designer: CHS2-Heavy Duty H-20 Rated SAFE HATCH R P R O D U C T S P E C I F I C A T I O N S CS-202 Butyl Rubber Sealant 1 P.O. Box 176, New Carlisle OH, 45344 • 937.845.8776 or 800.332.7325 FAX 937-845-3587 • www.conseal.com APPLICATIONS For self-sealing joints in: Manholes, Concrete Vaults, Septic Tanks, Concrete Pipe, Box Culverts, Utility Vaults, Burial Vaults, and Vertical Panel Structures. SEALING PROPERTIES • Provides permanently flexible watertight joints. • Low to high temperature workability: 0°F to 120°F (-12°C to 48°C) • Rugged service temperature: -30°F to +200°F (-34°C to +93°C) • Excellent chemical and mechanical adhesion to clean, dry surfaces. • Sealed Joints will not shrink, harden or oxide upon aging. • No priming normally necessary. When confronted with difficult installation conditions, such as wet concrete or temperatures below 40°F (4°C), priming the concrete will improve the bonding action. Consult Concrete Sealants for the proper primer to meet your application. HYDROSTATIC STRENGTH ConSeal CS-202 meets the hydrostatic performance requirement as set forth In ASTM C-990 section 10.1 (Performance requirement: 10psi for 10 minutes in straight alignment – in plant, quality control test for joint materials.) SPECIFICATIONS ConSeal CS-202 meets or exceeds the requirements of Federal Specification SS-S-210 (210-A), AASHTO M-198B, and ASTM C-990-91. P R O D U C T S P E C I F I C A T I O N S CS-202 Butyl Rubber Sealant 2 P.O. Box 176, New Carlisle OH, 45344 • 937.845.8776 or 800.332.7325 FAX 937-845-3587 • www.conseal.com PHYSICAL PROPERTIES Spec Required* CS-202 Hydrocarbon blend content % by weight ASTM D4 (mod.) 50% min. 52% Inert mineral filler % by weight AASHTO T111 30% min. 35% Volatile Matter % by weight ASTM D6 2% max. 1.2 Specific Gravity, 77°F ASTM D71 1.15-1.50 1.20 Ductility, 77°F ASTM D113 5.0 min. 12 Penetration, cone 77°F, 150 gm. 5 sec. ASTM D217 50-100 60-65 Penetration, cone 32°F, 150 gm. 5 sec. ASTM D217 40 mm 50-55 Flash Point, C.O.C., °F ASTM D92 350°F min. 425°F Fire point, C.O.C., °F ASTM D92 375°F min. 450°F IMMERSION TESTING • 30-Day Immersion Testing: No visible deterioration when tested in 5% Caustic Potash, 5% Hydrochloric Acid, 5% Sulfuric Acid, and 5% saturated Hydrogen Sulfide. * • One Year Immersion Testing: No visible deterioration when tested in 5% Formaldehyde, 5% Formic Acid, 5% Sulfuric Acid, 5% Hydrochloric Acid, 5% Sodium Hydroxide, 5% Hydrogen Sulfide and 5% Potassium Hydroxide. * Requirements of ASTM C-990 Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants. LIMITED WARRANTY This information is presented in good faith, but we cannot anticipate all conditions under which this information and our products, or the products of other manufacturers in combination with our products, may be used. We accept no responsibility for results obtained by the application of this information or the safety and suitability of our products, either alone or in combination with other products. Users are advised to make their own tests to determine the safety and suitability of each such product or product combinations for their own purposes. It is the user’s responsibility to satisfy himself as to the suitability and completeness of such information for this own particular use. We sell this product without warranty, and buyers and users assume all responsibility and liability for loss or damage arising from the handling and use of this product, whether used alone or in combination with other products. INNOVATIVE ENGINEERING FOR CORROSION PROTECTION APPLICATIONS: »Manhole Encapsulation/Sealing »Pipelines »Repair and Rehabilitation »Step-Down Joints Pressure sensitive woven polypropylene infiltration sealing tape for concrete, steel and polyethylene. BOA-TAPE™ PRIMARY FEATURES AND BENEFITS INCLUDE: »High bonding force - · Accommodates ground movement · Seals against ground water infiltration »High impact and penetration resistance · Toughness to resist soil stress »Impermeable - · Provides corrosion protection »No special tools - · Quick and easy installation · No primer required · No touch required to adhere tape BOA-TAPE ™ No primer or torch, just peel, tape and go Boa-Tape™ is a tape system designed for sealing joints against ground water infiltration. Used to encapsulate manholes, vaults and protect pipelines. The 50 mils elastomeric mastic in combination with 15 mils of a woven polypropylene, makes this pressure sensitive tape extra sticky. »Square/Rectangular Vaults »Septic Tanks/Vaults »Provides Corrosion Protection Available in 12”, 6” and 4” widths x 150ft. rolls »Clean all exterior surfaces of the manhole with a brush or broom to remove any loose cement, dust or small rock particles. »Remove 8” (20cm) of release backing and position exposed tape surface on cleaned seam area. Expose 8” (20cm) of tape at a time by pulling release backing away from mastic as tape is wrapped around the entire circumference of the manhole, vault or pipe. »Carefully cut the Boa-Tape when applying over cast iron manhole gussets. Gently mold the tape around gussets with roller/gloved hand. BOA-TAPE™ CONCRETE SEALING SYSTEM - TYPICAL SPECIFICATION NOTE: For other material specifications, contact GPT. 1.0 Scope: Apply GPT Pressure Sensitive Primerless Boa-Tape™ on exterior concrete manholes or other structures at locations indicated by the Engineer to protect manhole and mitigate infiltration/exfiltration of water and other contaminates. Boa-Tape should be applied over a dust-free, dry concrete surface. The Boa-Tape™ system should be as manufactured by GPT, Houston, Texas to ISO 9001:2008 standards. 2.0 Tape: Woven Polypropylene Membrane with Elastomeric Adhesive The pressure applied Boa-Tape™ should consist of a 4”, 6” or 12” wide wrap-around tape system 65 mils thick with a 15 mil membrane and 50 mils of integrated primer and elastomeric adhesive. Peel Strength should be a minimum of 12.5 lb./in., per ASTM D 1000. Tensile Strength should be 75 lbs/inch width. Mastic softening point should meet or exceed 240˚F +/- 10 % in accordance with ASTM E-28. Water Absorption should be less than .5% per ASTM D 570. 3.0 Warranty: All products are warranted against failure caused by manufacturing defects for a period of one year. Any product found to be so defective and returned within one year from date of shipment will be replaced without charge. The above warranty is made in lieu of, and we disclaim, any and all other warranties, expressed or implied, including the warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, and buyer agrees to accept the products without any such warranties. We hereby disclaim any obligation or liability for consequential damages, labor costs or any other claims or liabilities of any kind whatsoever. GPT 1-4_08.2016 »For extreme applications: Consider Riser- Wrap® heat shrink sleeves. »Riser-Wrap® used to rehab. an existing manhole submerged in runoff water. RISER-WRAP® 4990 Iris Street Wheat Ridge, CO 80033 Tel: (303) 988-1242 Fax: (303) 988-1922 6455 Clara Road, Suite 300 Houston, TX 77041 Tel: (713) 747-6948 Fax: (713) 747-6029 Unit 3-5, Chester Road Colmworth Business Park Eaton Socon, St. Neots Cambridgeshire, PE 19 8YT Oilfields Supply Center Ltd. Executive Office 4, PO Box 1518 Jebel Ali Free Zone, Dubai United Arab Emirateswww.gptindustries.com 2 Woodlands Sector 1 #03-11 Woodlands Spectrum 1 Singapore 738068 Republic of Singapore BOA-TAPE™ SEALING SYSTEM PROPERTIES ADHESIVE ASTM TEST TEST RESULTS Softening Point ASTM E-28 240˚ F 116˚ C Dielectric Strength ASTM D-1000 350 volts/mil TAPE Tensile Strength ASTM D-1000 75 lbs./inch width Elongation ASTM D-1000 40% Puncture Resistance ASTM E 164 200 lbs. Water Absorption ASTM D-570 0.05% Penetration Resistance ASTM G-9 PASS Fungal Resistance ASTM G-21 Growth-None 1.50 –4.80 S106-7MW 7” 3.50 –4.80 S106-7W 7” 4.20 –6.40 S106-8SRW 8” 1.50 –4.80 S106-8MW 8” 6.00 –6.75 S406-10AW 10” 7.50 –8.20 S406-10W 10” 6.00 –6.75 S406-10.5AW 10½” 7.50 –8.70 S406-10.5W 10½” 6.00 –7.00 S406-11BW 11” 7.50 –9.00 S406-11AW 11” 3.50 –6.90 S106-12M 12" 6.00 –7.00 S406-12CW 12” 6.25 –7.50 S406-12BW 12” 7.50 –9.00 S406-12AW 12” 9.00 –10.20 S406-12W 12” 5.75 –7.00 S106-12BW 12” 7.00 –8.50 S106-12AW 12” 8.25 –9.75 S106-12W 12” 9.50 –11.25 S106-14AW 14” 9.50 –11.25 S106-16BW 16” 11.25 –13.00 S106-16AW 16” 13.00 –14.20 S106-16W 16” 14.00 –15.50 S106-20BWS 20” 15.50 –17.00 S106-20AWS 20” 17.00 –18.15 S106-20WS 20” 1.50 –4.80 S106-7MT 7” 3.50 –4.50 S106-7T 7” 4.20 –6.40 S106-8SRT 8” 1.50 –4.80 S106-8MT 8” 6.00 –6.75 S406-10AT 10” 7.50 –8.40 S406-10T 10” 6.00 –6.75 S406-10.5AT 10½” 7.50 –8.90 S406-10.5T 10½” 6.00 –7.00 S406-11BT 11” 7.50 –9.00 S406-11AT 11” 3.50 –6.90 S106-12MT 12" 6.00 –7.00 S406-12CT 12” 6.25 –7.50 S406-12BT 12” 7.50 –9.00 S406-12AT 12” 9.00 –10.50 S406-12T 12” 5.75 –7.00 S106-12BT 12” 7.00 –8.50 S106-12AT 12” 8.25 –9.75 S106-12T 12” 9.50 –11.25 S106-14AT 14” 9.50 –11.25 S106-16BT 16” 11.25 –13.00 S106-16AT 16” 13.00 –14.50 S106-16T 16” 6/11 Install Pipe Clamp(s) with T-Handle Torque Wrench Install Kor-N-Seal I - Wedge Korband with Socket Wrench & Torque Limiter Install Kor-N-Seal II - Wedge Korband with Standard Torque Wrench KOR-N-SEAL I - WEDGE KORBAND CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY Stainless Steel Pipe Clamp EPDM OR POLYISOPRENE Reinforced Nylon Wedge or Stainless Wedge Stainless Steel Korband www.npc.com 250 Elm Street • P.O. Box 301 Milford, NH 03055, U.S.A. Tel: 603-673-8680 • 800-626-2180 • Fax: 603-673-7271 KOR-N-SEAL®I & II FLEXIBLE PIPE-TO-MANHOLE CONNECTORS SPECIFICATION SHEET 02/06 Head Pressure C923 - 7.1 0° - 13 psi (30 ft) for 10 min. +13 psi for 10 min. 7° - 10 psi (23 ft) for 10 min. +10 psi for 10 min. Deflection Test C923 - 7.2.2 7° in any direction Over 7° in any direction Load Test C923 - 7.2.3 150 lbs/in. pipe dia. Over 150 lbs/in. pipe dia. Performed on all standard sizes of Kor-N-Seal Connectors. RESILIENT EPDM OR POLYISOPRENE RUBBER Conforms to ASTM C923 PERFORMANCE Test ASTM Method Test Requirements Kor-N-Seal ® I & II Test ASTM Method Test Requirements TEST RESULTS Kor-N-Seal® I & II Chemical Resistance D543, at 22°C for 48 h 1 N Sulfuric Acid No weight loss No weight loss 1 N Hydrochloric Acid No weight loss No weight loss Tensile Strength D412 1200 psi 1580 psi Elongation at Break 350% min.500% Hardness D2240 (shore A durometer) ± 5 from the manufacturer's 48 ± 5 specified hardness Accelerated Oven-Aging D573 70 ± 1°C for 7 days Decrease of 15%, max. of original 10.1% tensile decrease tensile strength, decrease of 14.0% elongation decrease 20% max. of elongation Compression Set D395, method B, at 70°C Decrease of 25%, max.13% decrease for 22 h of original deflection Water Absorption D471, immerse 0.75 by 2-in. Increase of 10%, max..8% increase specimen in distilled of original by weight water at 70°C for 48 h Ozone Resistance D1171 Rating 0 Rating 0 Low-temperature Brittle Point D746 No fracture at -40°C No fracture at -40°C Tear Resistance D624, method B 200 lbf/in. No tear at 210 lbf/in. INTERNAL KORBAND Conforms to ASTM C923, ASTM A666, and A240 – Korband Assembly is manufactured of 300 series stainless steel. – Toggle Expander is made of 300 series stainless steel. – The 106/406 series Wedge Expander is made from reinforced nylon or 300 series stainless steel. – The 206/306 series Wedge Expander is made from 300 series stainless steel. EXTERNAL PIPE CLAMP Conforms to ASTM C923, ASTM A666, and A240 External take-up clamps are manufactured of 300 series stainless steel. KOR-N-SEAL®I & II Flexible Pipe-to-Manhole Connectors SPECIFICATION SHEET www.npc.com 250 Elm Street • P.O. Box 301 Milford, NH 03055, U.S.A. Tel: 603-673-8680 • 800-626-2180 • Fax: 603-673-727105/06 NPC Kor-N-Seal Pipe-to-Manhole Connector Technical Specification Scope: This specification describes the function of the NPC Kor-N-Seal pipe-to-manhole connector, its principle of operation, and the component materials that constitute the Kor-N-Seal connector, and their physical properties. Product Application: NPC Kor-N-Seal connectors are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM C-923 "Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals". This specification requires the connector to provide a watertight seal under the following conditions: • 10 PSI (23 feet head) of groundwater pressure • Minimum 7 Degrees of pipe articulation in any direction • Radial loading test of 150 pounds per inch diameter of pipe Principle of Operation: The Kor-N-Seal connector creates a watertight seal between the pipe and manhole by first sealing to the inside of the cored or formed hole in the manhole and then sealing to the outside of the pipe. See illustration at right. The seal at the inside of the manhole is created by the stainless steel Korband. The Korband is located inside of the end of the Kor-N- Seal connector that fits into the manhole. Once the Kor-N-Seal connector is located in the manhole, the diameter of the Korband is increased. This compresses the Kor-N-Seal connector against the inside wall of the hole in the manhole creating a watertight seal at the manhole. The seal at the outside of the pipe is created by the stainless steel pipe clamp(s). The pipe clamp is located on the outside of the Kor- N-Seal connector. Once the pipe has been positioned in the connector the diameter of the pipe clamp is decreased. This compresses the Kor-N-Seal connector against the outside wall of the pipe creating a watertight seal at the pipe. Reference the Kor-N-Seal Recommeded Installation Instructions for a detailed explanation of the preparation and installation of the Kor-N-Seal connector. PIPE INSTALLATION: 1. Center pipe in Connector opening. 2. On maximum pipe O.D. installations, use a pipe lubricant on the outside barrel of the pipe and/or the inside ridges of the Connector (under the Pipe Clamp area) to allow the pipe to slide into place more easily. 3. Position the Pipe Clamp in the Connector's Pipe Clamp groove with the screw at the top. 4. Tighten the Pipe Clamp screw to 60 inch pounds [7 Newton Meters] with a T-handle Torque Wrench, P/N 80090. 5. On minimum pipe O.D. installations, lift the rubber up underneath the Pipe Clamp screw so that the Connector contacts the bottom surface of the pipe while the Pipe Clamp screw is being tightened. Application of pipe lubrication on the underside of the clamp will also help assure that an even contraction of rubber is maintained throughout the clamping area. 6. After the Pipe Clamp has been tightened down firmly, move the pipe horizontally and/or vertically to bring it to grade. CAUTION: Pipe must NOT rest on Connector Korband. Refer to reverse side Kor-N-Seal I - Wedge Korband Installation Chart for Hole Size Range, Connector Dimensions, and Suggested Pipe O.D. Range. CONNECTOR INSTALLATION: 1. Check to be sure Korband is properly located in Connector groove. (Fig. 1) 2. Insert Connector Assembly into hole with Wedge Expander at top of hole. (Fig. 2) 3. Position Connector so it is square to manhole both vertically and horizontally. (Fig. 3) 4. Tighten Wedge Expander using 1/2" [13 mm] socket with a preset torque limiter for each. For each size connector use torque limiter preset to proper torque. (Fig. 4) Retorquing is not required prior to shipment. CAUTION: DO NOT USE IMPACT WRENCH. Fig. 4 RECOMMENDED TORQUE TORQUE LIMITER Connector Foot Pounds Inches [mm] [Newton Meters] 10 – 24 12 [254 –610] [16] P/N 91440-12 www.npc.com 250 Elm Street • P.O. Box 301 Milford, NH 03055, U.S.A. Tel: 603-673-8680 • 800-626-2180 • Fax: 603-673-7271 Outer Wall Top View Wedge Expander Area Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 I M P O R T A N T KOR-N-SEAL I – STAINLESS STEEL WEDGE Recommended Installation Procedure Side View Outer Wall Korband Wedge Expander Inner wall CAUTION: All capped stubs awaiting pipe installation at a later date must be restrained. Assure that a proper backfill material is used in adverse conditions. Prior to any critical usage, contact NPC Customer service at 1-800-626-2180. ROMACINDUSTRIES,INC. ALPHA - 6 January 14, 2016 1-800-426-9341www.romac.com MADE IN U.S.A. Ma t e r i a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s ALPHA™ FC Restrained Flanged Coupling CATALOG NUMBERNOMINAL PIPE SIZE O.D. RANGE(inches) APPROX. WEIGHT(lbs.) 4.50 - 4.90 ALPHA-FC - 4.90 11.20 8.15 10.25 $252.00 29 A O.D. 10" 8" 6" 12" 4" 6.60 - 7.00 ALPHA-FC - 7.00 11.35 8.24 12.45 322.00 40 8.60 - 9.10 ALPHA-FC - 9.10 13.40 9.96 15.55 432.00 57 12.75 - 13.30 ALPHA-FC - 13.30 17.50 10.28 19.70 782.00 105 10.75 - 11.20 ALPHA-FC - 11.20 15.45 10.18 17.65 698.00 82 DIMENSIONSB LENGTH C HEIGHT To Order: Specify Alpha EC Catalog Number [shaded number in table above]. Example: For 8" DI or 8" IPS PVC pipe, order ALPHA FC -9.10 CASTINGS: All cast components (end rings, center ring and bolt guides) are ductile iron, meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM A 536, grade 65-45-12. GRIPPERS: Ductile (nodular) iron, meeting or exceeding ASTM A 536, grade 65-45-12. Machine sharpened and heat treated. Xylan 1424 coated for corrosion protection. GASKET: SBR per ASTM D2000 - classified by UL to meet NSF61, compounded for water and sewer service. NSF61 certified NBR gaskets and other compounds available upon request. O-Ring style flange gasket is NBR per ASTM D2000. DRAW-HOOK FASTENERS: 304L stainless steel. RAMP RUNNERS: Reinforced nylon. BOLT & NUT: 304 stainless steel, 5/8-11 bolts with heavy hex e-coated nuts. Fasteners provided with anti-galling protection. WASHER: 304 Stainless steel. COATINGS: Flanged coupling body fusion bonded epoxy Romacoat, NSF 61 certified. End rings are Romabond polyester. WORKING PRESSURE: up to 350 PSI. LIST PRICE STANDARD ALPHA FC Fits IPS PVC through Ductile Iron pipe OD's. ™ RESTRAINED FLANGED COUPLING REV.13-1A ® REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF STAR PIPE PRODUCTS STAR® PIPE PRODUCTSHOUSTON CORPORATE TOLL FREE 1-800-999-3009 FAX 281-558-9000www.starpipeproducts.com Page 1 Joint Restraint Submittal Form • • Offers a full 5° deflection through 12" size, 3° on 14"-20" & 2° on 24"-36" • Sizes 3” through 12” are Underwriters Laboratories Listed for use on Ductile Iron, Thickness Class 51 and Pressure Class 350 at 350 psi and on Steel Pipe, Schedule 40, 3” to 10” is rated at 350 psi & 12” at 250 psi. • Safety factor is twice (2:1) the standardized pressure rating on Table A. • Intended for use on Ductile Iron or Steel Pipe as listed in Table A • Use on Steel Pipe, sizes 3”-12” requires a transition gasket. • Retainer Glands eliminate tie rods and thrust blocks. FEATURES & ADVANTAGES Heavy Duty Retainer Gland - Series 600 SUBMITTAL INFORMATION PROJECT NAME: ENGINEER: CONTRACTOR: SPEC. SECTION: • Gland: Ductile Iron per ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 • Square Head Cup Point Set Screws: Medium Carbon Alloy Steel, Through Hardened Per ASME B18.6.2 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS: GASKET OPTIONS (Please check one): Standard: SBR Gasket Optional: Transition Gasket (for Steel Pipe) NominalSize Maximum Working Pressure Rating TC Ductile Iron Pipe PC Ductile Iron Pipe Steel Pipe 50 51+PC250 PC300 PC350 SCH40+ 3 N/A 350 N/A N/A 350 350 4 N/A 350 N/A N/A 350 350 6 350 350 N/A N/A 350 350 8 350 350 N/A N/A 350 350 10 350 350 N/A N/A 350 350 12 350 350 N/A N/A 350 250 14 250 250 250 250 250 N/A 16 250 250 250 250 250 N/A 18 150 150 150 150 150 N/A 20 150 150 150 150 150 N/A 24 150 150 150 150 150 N/A 30 N/A 100 100 100 100 N/A 36 N/A 100 100 100 100 N/A Table A For Mechanical Joints Heavy Duty Retainer Gland series 600 ® REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF STAR PIPE PRODUCTS STAR® PIPE PRODUCTSHOUSTON CORPORATE TOLL FREE 1-800-999-3009 FAX 281-558-9000www.starpipeproducts.com Page 2 Joint Restraint Submittal Form REV.13-1A TECHNICAL INFORMATION NOM. SIzE DI PIPE OD STEEL PIPE** OD WWP (PSI)øA øB C D øE SET SCREWS SIzE (qTy) SET SCREW TORqUE (FT-LBS) APPROx WT. (LBS) 3 3.96 3.50 350 4.06 6.19 7.69 8.87 3/4 5/8x2 (4)85 5 4 4.80 4.50 350 4.90 7.50 9.12 9.72 7/8 5/8x2 (4)85 7 6 6.90 6.63 350 7.00 9.50 11.12 11.82 7/8 5/8x2 (6)85 11 8 9.05 8.63 350 9.15 11.75 13.37 13.95 7/8 5/8x2 (9)85 15 10 11.10 10.75 350 11.20 14.00 15.62 16.00 7/8 5/8x2 (16)85 22 12 13.20 12.75 300 13.30 16.25 17.88 18.12 7/8 5/8x2 (16)85 27 14 15.30 N/A 250 15.44 18.75 20.25 20.20 7/8 5/8x2 (20)90 44 16 17.40 N/A 250 17.54 21.00 22.50 22.30 7/8 5/8x2 (24)90 55 18 19.50 N/A 150 19.64 23.25 24.75 24.40 7/8 5/8x2 (24)90 60 20 21.60 N/A 150 21.74 25.50 27.00 26.50 7/8 5/8x2 (28)90 73 24 25.80 N/A 150 25.94 30.00 31.50 30.70 7/8 5/8x2 (32)90 92 30 32.00 N/A 100 32.17 36.88 39.12 39.13 1/1/8 3/4x3 (40)90 169 36 38.30 N/A 100 38.47 43.75 46.00 45.43 1-1/8 3/4x3 (48)90 213 HEAVy DUTy RETAINER GLAND 600 SPECIFICATIONS* *All dimensions in inches except where indicated. ** Transition gasket required on steel pipe. Notes: Please check sizes: For Ductile Iron Mechanical Joints Heavy Duty Retainer Gland series 600 83 Consult factory for guidance in product selectionPhone (203) 385-0217, Fax (203) 385-0602 or visit our web site at www.ashcroft.com STANDARD RANGES (3)(4)(5) Pressure psi kg/cm2 - bar kPa 0/15 0/30 0/60 0/100 0/160 0/200 0/300 0/400 0/600 0/800 0/1000 0/1500 0/2000 0/3000 0/4000 0/5000 0/6000 0/7500 0/10,000 0/15,000 Vacuum 30 in./0 in.Hg –1/0 –100/0 Compound 30 in.Hg/15 psi –1/0/1.5 –100/0/150 30 in.Hg /30 psi –1/0/3 –100/0/300 30 in.Hg /60 psi –1/0/5 –100/0/500 30 in.Hg /100 psi –1/0/9 –100/0/900 30 in.Hg /150 psi –1/0/15 –100/0/1500 30 in.Hg /300 psi –1/0/24 –100/0/2400 Duralife® Pressure Gauge Type 1009, ASME B 40.1 Grade 1A (±1% of span) BOURDON SYSTEM SELECTION(1) Ordering Bourdon Tube Socket Tube Range Selection NPT Code & Tip Material(1) Material Type Limits (psi) Conn.(6) AW 316 stainless steel Bronze C-Tube Vac/600 1⁄1⁄14⁄4⁄ AW 316 stainless steel Bronze Helical 1000 1⁄1⁄14⁄4⁄ SW 316 stainless steel 316 stainless steel C-Tube Vac/600 1⁄1⁄14⁄4⁄ & 1⁄1⁄12⁄2⁄(2) SW 316 stainless steel 316 stainless steel Helical 800/15,000 1⁄1⁄14⁄4⁄ & 1⁄1⁄12⁄2⁄(2) (1) For selection of the correct Bourdon system material, see the media application table on page 243. (2) 1⁄1⁄12⁄2⁄ NPT available 31⁄1⁄12⁄2⁄˝ lower SW system only. (3) Type 1009 gauges may be ordered with metric single-scale dial: kPa,bar or kg/cm2. (4) Dual-scale dials will be supplied with standard metric inner scale and equivalent psi outer scale or with standard psi inner scale and equivalent metric outer scale–please specify. (5) Special logos and scales available upon request. (6) 1⁄1⁄14⁄4⁄˝ JIS, BSP or DIN threads available on SW systems. TO ORDER THIS 1009 DURALIFE PRESSURE GAUGE: Select: 35 1009 SW (L) 02L XXX 1000#Select: 35 1009 SW (L) 02L XXX 1000# 1. Dial size–21⁄1⁄12⁄2⁄˝, 31⁄1⁄1 2⁄2⁄˝ 2. Case type–1009 3. Tube and socket material 4. Liquid fi lled (glycerin), leave blank if dry 5. Connection size–1⁄1⁄18⁄8⁄ (01), 1⁄1⁄14⁄4⁄ (02) 1⁄1⁄12⁄2⁄ (04) 6. Connection location–Lower (L), Back (B) 7. Optional Features–see page 176 8. Standard pressure range–1000 psi Accessories: see pages 233-238 0/1 0/100 0/1.6 0/160 0/1.6 0/160 0/2.5 0/250 0/2.5 0/250 0/4 0/400 0/4 0/400 0/6 0/600 0/6 0/600 0/10 0/1000 0/10 0/1000 0/16 0/1600 0/16 0/1600 0/25 0/2500 0/25 0/2500 0/40 0/4000 0/40 0/4000 0/60 0/6000 0/60 0/6000 0/100 0/10,000 0/100 0/10,000 0/160 0/16,000 0/160 0/16,000 0/250 0/25,000 0/250 0/25,000 0/400 0/40,000 0/400 0/40,000 0/600 0/60,000 0/600 0/60,000 0/1000 0/100,000 0/1000 0/100,000 The following Table is not for conversion purposes. DESIGNED FOR SAFETY ANDLONGER LIFE • 5-year limited warranty • Patented PowerFlex™ movement isolates movement from shock and vibration for longer life • All stainless, all-welded construc-tion for long life • ASME Grade 1A, 1% accuracy full scale • True Zero™ pointer indication – no stop pin to mask false zero reading – ensures safety and process control • New PLUS!™ Performance Option:™ Performance Option:™ - Liquid-fi lled performance in a dry gauge - Fights vibration and pulsations without liquid-fi ll headaches - See pages 6-7 for details - Order as option XLL OTHER FEATURES: Available in 21⁄1⁄1 2⁄2⁄˝ and 3˝ and 3˝1⁄1⁄1 2⁄2⁄˝ dial sizes,˝ dial sizes,˝ Duralife® pressure gauges are liquid ® pressure gauges are liquid ® fi llable and fi eld convertible for panel mounting. Both zero and span adjust- ments are standard. The gauge is available dry, liquid- fi lled weatherproof or hermetically sealed and now with now with now PLUS!™ per-™ per-™ formance option. A fi ve year limited warranty is standard with the Duralife® 1009. ® 1009. ® FEATURES • 360° Instrument Rotation with SQR™ Option • Selection of 1˝ through 20˝ Nominal Pipe Size • Non-Clogging/Low Maintenance • Complete Instrument Protection • Ensure Reliable/Accurate Pressure Readings • Optional Retrofit Flange to Replace Competitive Units APPLICATIONS Wafer and Bolt-Thru models provide a solution to applications where plugging is a persistent problem. The durable “ring- like” design eliminates process build-up, ensuring reliable and accu- rate pressure measure- ment. The innovative patent pending Safe Quick Release™ (SQR™) allows safe, in-process instrument removal with- out loss of fill fluid and eliminates the need to shut down the process pressure. Ashcroft also offers a compre- hensive line of diaphragm seals. BULLETIN IR-1 SPECIFICATIONS Type/Size: 80 Wafer 2˝ to 20˝ 81 Bolt-Thru 1˝ to 10˝ Flexible Liner: Buna, Teflon®, EPDM, NaturalRubber and Viton® Liner ProcessTemperatureLimits: Buna-N –30/225°F (–34/107°C) Teflon –15/350°F (–25/177°C) Viton –15/350°F (–25/177°C) Natural Rubber –30/225°F (–34/107°C) EPDM –40/300°F (–40/149°C) Flange Material: 316L SS, Carbon Steel, CPVC(1) Flange(Bolt-Thru): Class 150, 300 (Type 80 waferdesign compatible with class 150 & 300 flanges). Body: 316L SS, Carbon Steel InstrumentConnection Size: 1⁄4, 1⁄2 NPT Fill Fluids:Glycerin 0/400°F (0/204°C)Silicone (10Cst):–40/500°F (–40/260°C)Silicone (50Cst):–40/600°F (–40/316°C)Halocarbon –70/300°F (–57/149°C) Consult Factory for Additional Fluids OPTIONS CodeAll Welded Assembly DURetrofit Flange IRSafe Quick Release™ (SQR™) QNeedle Valve VNeedle Valve & Safe Quick Release™ (SQR™) Z (1)1˝&11/2˝ only. Others on application. Type 80 Wafer andType 81 Bolt-Thru Isolation Ring Ashcroft Inc., 250 East Main Street, Stratford, CT 06614 USA Tel: 203-378-8281 • Fax: 203-385-0408 email: info@ashcroft.com • www.ashcroft.com All specifications are subject to change without notice. All sales subject to standard terms and conditions. © 2015 Ashcroft Inc 2/15 C R N A PP R OV ED NO W AVAIL A BLE I N 1˝ & 1.5˝ B OLT-T HRU 360° ROTATION SQR OPTION SHOWN NEEDLE VALVE OPTION SHOWN DIRECT MOUNT SHOWN Type 81 Bolt-Thru Isolation Ring Type 80 Wafer andType 81 Bolt-Thru Isolation Ring Ashcroft Inc., 250 East Main Street, Stratford, CT 06614 USA Tel: 203-378-8281 • Fax: 203-385-0408 email: info@ashcroft.com • www.ashcroft.com All specifications are subject to change without notice. All sales subject to standard terms and conditions. © 2015 Ashcroft Inc 2/15 80 02 E S S 02T Q 000 X CG IR Order Coding Example Order Information TYPE NOMINAL PIPE SIZE FLEXIBLE LINER FLANGE BODY INSTRUMENT CONNECTION INSTRUMENT REMOVAL OPTION FLANGE CLASS (Type 81 Only) FILL FLUID OPTIONS ADDITIONAL OPTIONS (80) Wafer (81) Bolt-Thru* * N/A in sizes larger than 10˝ (01) 1˝ NPS (15) 1.5˝ NPS (02) 2˝ NPS (03) 3˝ NPS (04) 4˝ NPS (06) 6˝ NPS (08) 8˝ NPS (10) 10˝ NPS (12) 12˝ NPS (14) 14˝ NPS (16) 16˝ NPS (18) 18˝ NPS (20) 20˝ NPS Consult factory for sizes larger than 20˝ (E) Buna N (T) Teflon* (P) EPDM (R) Natural Rubber (Y) Viton * N/A in sizes larger than 10˝, less than 2˝ (B) Carbon Steel (S) 316L SS (C) CPVC* (B) Carbon Steel (S) 316L SS (02T) 1⁄4˝ NPT (04T) 1⁄2˝ NPT (N) None (V) Valve/Needle (Q) Safe Quick Release (SQR) (Z) Needle Valve with Safe Quick Release (000) No Flange (150) Class 150* (300) Class 300* (CG) Glycerin (CK) Silicone 50 CTS (CF) Halocarbon (DJ) Silicone 10 Cst (NF) No Fill (IR) Retrofit Flange (DU) All Welded Stem Assembly Only offered with SS hub; no Safe Quick Release™ (SQR™) or Needle Valve (NH) Wired Tag Ø ID Ø OD H W Ø BC ØID H ØBD W ØOD Type 80 Wafer Isolation Ring * * *NEEDLE VALVE SHOWN * Type 81 Only * 1˝ & 1.5˝ Type 81 Only Nominal Pipe Size Inner Diameter (ID) Outer Diameter (OD) Width (W)Direct Outer Diameter (OD) Weight Lbs. 2˝2.07 4.00 2.00 1.89 2.04 1.70 4.0 3˝3.07 5.25 2.00 1.89 2.04 1.70 6.3 4˝4.03 6.75 1.50 1.89 2.04 1.70 8.0 6˝6.07 8.63 1.50 1.89 2.67 2.32 10.2 8˝7.98 10.88 1.50 2.39 2.67 2.32 14.9 10˝10.02 13.25 1.50 2.39 2.67 2.32 21.3 12˝12.00 16.00 1.75 2.39 2.67 2.32 39.1 14˝13.25 17.63 1.75 2.89 3.17 2.82 47.8 16˝15.25 20.13 1.75 2.89 3.17 2.82 61.8 18˝17.25 21.50 1.75 2.89 3.67 3.32 58.0 20˝19.25 23.75 1.75 2.89 3.67 3.32 68.6 ANSI Nom.Inner Outer Width Bolt Bolt No. OfASMEPipeDia.Dia.(W)Circle Dia.BoltClassSize(ID)(OD)(BC)(BD)Holes 1˝1.05 4.25 2.00 3.12 0.625 402.04 1.70 5.7 1˝1.05 4.25 2.25 3.12 0.625 402.04 1.70 4.0 1.5˝1.61 5.00 2.00 3.88 0.625 402.04 1.70 7.9 1.5˝1.61 5.00 2.25 3.88 0.625 402.04 1.70 5.6 150 2˝2.07 6.00 2.00 4.75 0.75 402.04 1.70 12.0 3˝3.07 7.50 2.00 6.00 0.75 402.04 1.70 18.4 4˝4.03 9.00 1.50 7.50 0.75 802.04 1.70 18.6 6˝6.07 11.00 1.50 9.50 0.88 802.04 1.70 23.9 8˝7.98 13.50 1.50 11.75 0.88 802.04 1.70 34.5 10˝10.02 16.00 1.50 14.25 1.00 12 0 2.04 1.70 44.5 2˝2.07 6.50 2.00 5.00 0.75 802.04 1.70 13.8 3˝3.07 8.25 2.00 6.62 0.88 802.04 1.70 22.0 300 4˝4.03 10.00 1.50 7.88 0.88 802.04 1.70 24.5 6˝6.07 12.50 1.50 10.62 0.88 12 0 2.04 1.70 34.9 8˝7.98 15.00 1.50 13.00 1.00 12 0 2.04 1.70 47.1 10˝10.02 17.50 1.50 15.25 1.13 16 0 2.04 1.70 58.8 Instrument Removal (H) Direct Safe Quick Needle Weight Release Valve Lbs. Instrument Removal (H) Direct Safe Quick Needle Release Valve BULLETIN IR-1 SPECIFY IF OPTIONS SS/CS CPVC SS/CS CPVC I979600 REV. A A Division of Conbraco Industries, Inc. Matthews, NC Pageland, SC Conway, SC 2 PIECE THREADED STEEL BALL VALVES WITH SPRING RETURN INSTALLATION, OPERATION, & MAINTENANCE GUIDE 76-500/89-500 Series INSTALLATION Two piece threaded end Apollo Ball valves are bi-directional. They may be installed in vertical or horizontal pipe runs without regard to flow direction and without regard to stem orientation. Note: Valves must be installed in piping systems that comply with the applicable portions of the ASME B31 standards. Special considerations must be taken with respect to pipe line expansions and contractions and the media expansion and contractions within the piping system. Pipe connections to be threaded into these valves should be accurately threaded, clean and free of foreign material or metal shavings. PTFE pipe tape is recommended for use as the pipe joint sealant. Two wrenches must be used when making up pipe joints to these valves. Apply one wrench on the valve end closest to the pipe joint being tightened and the other wrench to the pipe to prevent transmitting torque through the valve body joint. Typical pipe make-up is 1-1/2 turns after installing the pipe hand-tight. MAINTENANCE Regular Maintenance Normal stem packing wear can be compensated for by tightening the packing gland screw. (Wrench part number H371400 is available to ease this operation.) Tighten the packing gland screw clockwise in 1/8 turn increments until observed leakage stops. Do not exceed the values shown in Table 1. If all of the adjustments to the packing gland screw have been made, remove the handle assembly as described in steps 1-6 below. Remove packing gland screw and add one or two replacements bearings on top of the old packing. Reinstall the handle and handle nut. Caution: Do not disassemble valve while under pressure nor with entrapped hazardous fluids therein. Valve Repair Disassembly 1) Operate the valve fully opened to fully closed to assure there are no trapped fluids or pressure in the body cavity. Leave the valve in the closed position. 2) Remove handle extension. Clean and set aside for reuse. 3) Remove the two hex jam nuts and the washer. Then remove the nyloc hex nut and spring. 4) Remove anchor screw then remove spring rod from the spring return handle adapter. 5) Remove stem nut and spring return handle adapter. 6) Install pipe plugs in the body and retainer ports of NPT valves to prevent collapsing those areas. 7) Remove the retainer from the body. It may be necessary to heat the body joint above 450°F to breakdown the sealant used to secure the valve halves. 8) Remove the ball from the body cavity and inspect. The ball must be smooth and without pits, burrs or scratches. 9) Remove packing gland and push the stem from the outside into the body cavity and remove. 10) Remove all seals and seats from the body, stem and retainer then discard. Re-Assembly 1) Install stem bearing on to stem. 2) Fit stem into body from the retainer end and position the stem with the handle flats perpendicular to the flow axis. 3) Install stem packing over stem and fit into body recess. 4) Install packing gland screw into the threaded stem area. 5) Tighten the gland screw to manufacturing torque specifications: Tightened to the torque values shown in Table 1. 6) Apply suitable light lubricant to seat and fit into the seat pocket of the body. 7) Install the ball in the closed position interlocking with stem. 8) Apply suitable light lubricant to seat and fit into the seat pocket of the retainer. 9) Apply an adequate amount of thread sealant compound (Loctite® 609, 648 or 680) to the retainer threads so that it covers no less than two complete threads opposite of the retainer shoulder. 10) With the ball in the closed position, thread the retainer into the body and torque to manufacturing specification to secure the body joint. Tighten to the torque values shown in the table 1. 11) Apply thread locking compound to each socket head screw. Attach the anchor base using the two socket head screw. 12) Apply two drops of thread lock compound to the stem nut and attach spring return handle adapter to the stem. 13) Insert spring rod assembly thru the hole in the spring return handle adapter. Verify rod tip orientation as noted * in drawing. Apply thread lock compound to the anchor screw and attach the rod assembly to the anchor base. 14) Place spring over rod assembly and into the threaded hole of the spring return handle adapter. Slide the washer into place and secure with the nyloc hew nut. Tighten the nyloc nut to achieve dimension “A” shown in table. Assemble the other washer and two hex jam nuts at the end of the rod as shown in parts illustration and apply two drops of thread lock compound. 15) Place handle extension over spring assembly and apply two drops of thread sealant to the threads. Tighten the handle extension into the spring return handle adapter. 16) Cycle the valve to the open position and verify proper operation and alignment of handle and/or mechanism. Warning: Be sure extremities are free of flow path to prevent bodily harm. Table 1: Torque Requirements Valve Size Gland Screw Torque (+ or – 10%) (ft-lb) Retainer Torque (+ or – 10%) (ft-lb) 1/4" - 3/8"10-12 13 1/2"10-12 16 3/4"15 - 20 42 1"15 - 20 63 1-1/4"35 - 40 130 1-1/2"35 - 40 199 2"35 - 40 282 Table 2: “A” Height Requirements Valve Size A - Approx. 1/4", 3/8", 1/2"1-5/8" 3/4", 1"7/8" 1-1/4" - 2"1-7/8" PARTS ILLUSTRATION STEM HANDLE NUT GLAND SCREW STEM PACKING STEM BEARING SEAT BALL RETAINER HANDLE BODY .12 MA X . SPRING GRIP WASHERS (2) NYLOC NUT * A SOCKET HEAD SCREW (2) NOTE: POSITION OF ANCHOR SCREW OFFSET AT SPRING ROD TIP. MUST BE ASSEMBLED AS SHOWN. HANDLE EXTENSION (WITH GRIP) HEX NUTS (2) SPRING RETURN HANDLE ADAPTER w w w . v a l m a t i c . c o m L e v e r & W e i g h t A i r C u s h i o n L e v e r & S p r i n g A W W A S w i n g C h e c k V a l v e w w w . v a l m m a a t i c . c o m A W WA S W I N G C H E C K V A L V E Val-Matic’s qualit y o f d e s i g n a n d m e t i c u l o u s workmanship has s e t t h e s t a n d a r d s b y w h i c h all others are me a s u r e d . Q u a l i t y d e s i g n f e a - tures such as the A W W A E n e r • G ® B a l l V a l v e with its energy eff i c i e n t d e s i g n , f u s i o n b o n d e d epoxy and adjust a b l e r e s i l i e n t s e a t i n g . . . . C a m - Centric®Plug V a l v e s h a v e m o r e r e q u e s t e d features than a n y o t h e r e c c e n t r i c p l u g valve....America n - B F V ® B u t t e r f l y V a l v e s include a field re p l a c e a b l e s e a t w i t h o u t t h e need for special t o o l s . . . . T i l t e d D i s c ® C h e c k Valveswith high s t r e n g t h a n d w e a r r e s i s t a n t aluminum bronz e t r i m a s s t a n d a r d . . . . S i l e n t Check Valve s f e a t u r i n g c o m b i n e d resilient/metal-to- m e t a l s e a t i n g . . . . S u r e S e a l Foot Valvesprovi d e d w i t h a h e a v y d u t y s t a i n - less steel screene d i n l e t . . . . S w i n g - F l e x ® a n d Surgebuster®C h e c k V a l v e s d e s i g n e d w i t h an unrestricted f u l l f l o w a r e a . . . . D u a l D i s c ® Check Valves u t i l i t i n g s t a b i l i z e d c o m p o - nents to provide e x t e n d e d l i f e . . . . A i r R e l e a s e , Air/Vacuum and C o m b i n a t i o n A i r V a l v e s provided standard w i t h T y p e 3 1 6 s t a i n l e s s s t e e l trim....VaultSafe® f a m i l y o f p r o d u c t s i n c l u d e s the FloodSaf e ® I n f l o w P r e v e n t e r , FrostSafe®two - w a y d a m p e r a n d t h e VentSafe®vent p i p e s e c u r i t y c a g e . T h e s e features couple d w i t h o u r a t t e n t i o n t o detail put Val- M a t i c V a l v e s i n a c l a s s b y themselves.Val-Matic is totally c o m m i t t e d t o p r o v i d i n g t h e highest quality va l v e s a n d o u t s t a n d i n g s e r v i c e to our customers. C o m p l e t e c u s t o m e r s a t i s f a c - tion is our goal.Make t h e C h a n g e to Q u a l i t y ! S p e c i f y Val-Matic Valve a n d M a n u f a c t u r i n g C o r p . 905 Riverside D r i v e , E l m h u r s t , I L 6 0 1 2 6 Phone: 630-941 - 7 6 0 0 F a x : 6 3 0 - 9 4 1 - 8 0 4 2 ww w . v a l m a t i c . c o m valve s @ v a l m a t i c . c o m Copyright © 2011 V a l - M a t i c V a l v e & M f g . C o r p . ISO 9001:2 0 0 8 c e r t i f i e d c o m p a n y 1 1 / 1 1 B u l l e t i n 7 0 0 0 A. 100% Flow Area Energy savings provided with 100% unrestricted flow area. B. Disc Stabilization The fluid dynamic convex disc provides for lift, stabilization and strength. C. Adjustable Stop Adjustable resilient open stop to prevent disc flutter for applications outside the typical flow ranges. D. Full Domed Access Cover with Vent Port Full domed access cover allows for ease of maintenance without removing the valve from the line. E. Drop Tight Seating The field replaceable synthetic seat, with integral O-ring assures positive seating at high and low pressures. Body seats are stainless steel to extend the life of the valve and are also field replaceable. F. Non-Clog Design The unrestricted full flow area combined with smooth streamline contouring allows for passage of large solids to prevent potential clogging. G. Fusion Bonded Epoxy Fusion Bonded Epoxy (FBE) is provided standard on the interior and exterior of the valve. The FBE is NSF/ANSI 61 certified and complies with AWWA C550. H. Heavy Duty Disc Connections Heavy duty shaft and disc retaining pins constructed of high tensile 300 series stainless steel for superior strength, wear resistance and extended life. I. Integral Mounting Pads Integral mounting pads for ease of installation and support. Standard on 3” and larger. J. Closure Versatility The AWWA Swing Check Valve is available with three field adjustable closure options: Lever and Weight, Air Cushion and Lever and Spring. Feature Highlights Air Cushion Lever and Weight Lever and Spring A B E C H D J I 2 Front view of Mounting Pad G F 3 Features & Benefits The Val-Matic Swing Check Valve incorporates many design features and characteristics that will provide energy savings, ease of maintenance and extended valve life. The valve is designed for municipal and industrial water and wastewater applications. Closure Versatility Swing Check Valves can be supplied with Lever & Weight, Air Cushion or Lever & Spring for positive control in closing the disc. The Lever & Weight or Lever & Spring designs are suitable for installation in horizontal or vertical pipelines and are easily adjustable in the field. When rapid flow reversal occurs, the Swing Check Valves can be supplied with dual lever arms. A fully enclosed and adjustable Air Cushion can be added to the standard Lever & Weight to cushion valve closure. The Air Cushion allows unrestricted opening and cushioned closure of the valve disc. Drop Tight Seating The body is fitted with a 300 series stainless steel seat that is raised from the body to assure sealing in applications with high solids. A molded resilient seat mounted on the disc has integral O-ring sealing surfaces for drop tight sealing at high and low pressures. Both seats are secured with stainless steel fasteners and are field replaceable without removing the valve from the line. (See Figure 1) Ductile Iron Construction Val-Matic provides standard swing check valves with duc- tile iron construction rated to 250 psig Cold Working Pres- sure (CWP). Ductile iron provides a greater strength and toughness than conventional gray iron materials. With ductile iron construction, the body, disc, and disc arm can safely withstand high stresses and shock loads. Disc Pivot Action The disc arm is designed with dual precision pins to secure the disc and reduce vibration. The arm includes specified clearances to center the disc in the seat yet provide a pivot action to allow self-adjusting seating at all pressures. (See Figure 2) Shaft Seal System Val-Matic has enhanced the traditional design of V-Type packing system to prevent over load of the follower, the most common reason for packing leakage and failure. To prevent the packing from being over tightened, the shaft seal incorporates POP™ (Packing Overload Protection) Shims. Adjustment is easily accomplished by removing shims as necessary by utilizing the pull tab feature. (See Figure 3) Corrosion Resistance The body and disc are fully encapsulated with NSF/ANSI 61 certified fusion bonded epoxy per AWWA C550 to pre- vent corrosion and provide an extended service life. The shaft, disc pins, and seat hardware are constructed of 300 series stainless steel for the maximum corrosion resistance in severe service. Lead-Free Bronze bushings are provided in the body to provide smooth and reliable disc closure. Limit Switch In addition to the many features and characteristics of the Swing Check Valve, an optional SCADA compatible limit switch can be utilized for remote panel read outs and/or secondary system operations indicating the open or fully closed position of the valve. Advanced Technology Incorporating the latest in valve technology assures a high- quality valve that will provide long service. The design process utilized Solid Modeling and Finite Element Analysis (FEA) of the key structural components. Manufacturing technology uses automated process control in the foundry and ISO 9001 controlled manufacturing processes. Every valve is tested on automated hydraulic test rigs with calibrated gauges. CAPSCREW SEAT RETAININGRING DISC SYNTHETIC SEAT INTEGRAL O-RINGS BODY SEAT Figure 1 - Drop Tight Seating System ARM PINS DISC SHAFT Figure 2 - Disc Pivot Action BEARING V-PACKING SHAFT GLAND SHIMS Figure 3 - Shaft Seal System Installation Dimensions Dimensions in Inches Valve Size CWP (psig)A C F G H J LW Valve Weights AC Valve Weights 2 250 8.00 6.00 -4.34 5.39 4.38 104 - 2 1/2 250 8.50 7.00 -4.34 5.78 7.00 115 - 3 250 9.50 7.50 3.75 6.69 7.01 7.38 123 133 4 250 11.50 9.00 4.50 7.60 7.87 8.63 165 180 6 250 14.00 11.00 6.69 10.53 12.60 12.50 256 276 8 250 19.50 13.50 8.46 12.80 15.75 15.75 375 400 10 250 24.50 16.00 8.66 14.33 17.52 17.38 535 570 12 250 27.50 19.00 10.63 17.32 19.88 17.88 810 850 14 250 31.00 21.00 12.50 19.96 23.88 23.13 1064 1114 16 250 36.00 23.50 13.75 21.22 26.50 25.00 1253 1303 18 250 40.00 25.00 15.00 23.22 27.88 26.38 1521 1571 20 250 40.00 27.50 16.00 24.94 30.44 28.25 1890 1940 24 250 48.00 32.00 18.50 30.34 36.63 32.75 3052 3112 30 150 56.00 38.75 22.00 38.47 43.81 40.75 5514 5574250 36 150 63.00 46.00 25.50 43.22 51.41 45.06 8151 8211250 42 150 70.00 53.00 29.25 49.80 59.88 50.00 11380 11460250 48 150 76.00 59.50 32.75 56.38 68.38 55.13 16780 16860250 FLOW G F C A J H Flanges conform to ANSI B16.1 Class 125 G F C A J H Flanges conform to ANSI B16.1 Class 125 FLOW 4 Series 7000AC Air CushionSeries 7000LW Lever and Weight Headloss Chart Valve Construction HE A D L O S S I N F E E T O F W A T E R FLOW OF WATER IN GALLONS PER MINUTE CUBIC METERS PER HOUR ME T E R S O F W A T E R 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 10 0 20 0 30 0 40 0 50 0 60 0 70 0 80 0 1,0 0 0 2,0 0 0 3,0 0 0 4,0 0 0 5,0 0 0 6,0 0 0 7,0 0 0 8,0 0 0 10 , 0 0 0 20 , 0 0 0 30 , 0 0 0 40 , 0 0 0 50 , 0 0 0 60 , 0 0 0 70 , 0 0 0 80 , 0 0 0 10 0 , 0 0 0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7830 20 10 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 .8.7 .6 .5 .4 .3 .2 .1 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 10 0 20 0 30 0 40 0 50 0 60 0 70 0 80 0 1,0 0 0 2,0 0 0 3,0 0 0 4,0 0 0 5,0 0 0 6,0 0 0 7,0 0 0 8,0 0 0 10 , 0 0 0 20 , 0 0 0 36”30”24”20”16”14”12”10”8”42”48”20 FEET/SECOND VELOCITY 10 FEET/SECOND VELOCITY 15 FEET/SECOND VELOCITY 18” 6 FEET/SECOND VELOCITY 4 FEET/SECOND VELOCITY 21/2”3”4” 6”2” TYP I C A L V A L V E SIZ I N G R A N G E A W W A S W I N G CHE C K V A L V E PRESSURE RATINGS MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION MAXIMUM PRESSURE RATINGS SERIES DESCRIPTION SIZE RANGE FLANGE CONNECTION CWP (psig) 7800LW Lever & Weight 2” - 48” Class 150 Ductile Iron 2507800ACAir Cushion 3” - 48” 7800LS Lever & Spring 2” - 48” 7700LW Lever & Weight 30” - 48” Class 125 Gray Iron 1507700ACAir Cushion 30” - 48” 7700LS Lever & Spring 30” - 48” 6 Flow Coefficients Size Cv 2 95 2 1/2 150 3 210 4 380 6 850 8 1,515 10 2,370 12 3,410 14 4,640 16 6,060 18 7,670 20 9,470 24 13,600 30 21,300 36 30,700 42 41,750 48 54,550 COMPONENT STANDARD OPTIONAL Body and Cover 2” - 24” Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Gr 65-45-12 N/A Body and Cover 30” - 48” Gray Iron ASTM A126 Class B Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Gr 65-45-12 Disc and Disc Arm Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Gr 65-45-12 N/A Hinge Pin Seal V-Packing Buna-N Cartridge O-Ring EPDM Removable Body Seat Stainless Steel ASTM A276 Type 304 Stainless Steel ASTM A276 Type 316 Molded Resilient Seat Buna-N EPDM Interior Hardware T304 Stainless Steel T316 Stainless Steel Exterior Hardware Alloy Steel, Plated T316 Stainless Steel Interior/Exterior Coating System Fusion Bonded Epoxy NSF/ANSI 61 N/A Specifications SCOPE 1.1 This specification covers the design, manufacture, and testing of 2 in. (50 mm) through 48 in. (1200 mm) Swing Check Valves suitable for cold working pressures of 250 psig, 150 psig for 30 in. (800mm) and larger in water and wastewater service. 1.2 The check valve shall be of the full flow body type, with a domed access cover and vent port. 1.3 The check valve shall be capable of accepting lever and weight, air cushion or lever and spring. STANDARDS AND APPROVALS 2.1 The valves shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with American Water Works Association Standard ANSI/AWWA C508. 2.2 The valves used in potable water service shall be certified to NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects, and certified to be Lead-Free in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61, Annex G. 2.3 Manufacturer shall have a quality management system that is certified to ISO 9001 by an accredited, certifying body. CONNECTIONS 3.1 The Valves shall be provided with flanges in accordance with ANSI B16.1, Class 125 iron flanges or ANSI B16.42, Class 150 for ductile iron flanges. DESIGN 4.1 The valve body shall be full flow equal to nominal pipe diameter at all points through the valve and shall be equipped with a threaded adjustable open stop. The body seat shall be o-ring sealed and field replaceable without removing the valve from the line. The end flanges shall contain integrally cast mounting pads on sizes 3” and larger. 4.2 The top access port shall be full size, allowing removal of the disc without removing the valve from the line. The access cover shall be domed in shape to provide flushing action over the disc for operating in lines containing high solids content. 4.3 The disc shall be of one-piece construction and connected to the shaft with a disc arm and two pivot pins to provide pivot action to allow self-adjusting seating at all pressures. 14” and larger discs shall be convex shape for lift, stabilization and strength. 4.4 The disc seat shall be resilient with integral o-ring type sealing surface for drop tight shut-off at high and low pressures and for easy replacement in the field without removing the valve from the line. 4.5 The shaft seals shall consist of V-type packing in a fixed gland with an adjustable follower designed to prevent over compression of the packing and to meet design parameters of the packing manufacturer. Removable, slotted shims shall be provided under the follower flanges to provide for adjustment and prevent over loading of the packing. 4.6 When specified, the valve shall be factory equipped with a lever and weight assembly. The lever shall be equipped with three holes for adjusting the bolted weight assembly. When the valve is closed, the lever and weight shall be located 30 degrees below horizontal. 4.7 When specified, the valve shall be factory equipped with a lever and air cushion assembly mounted between the weight assembly. The air cushion assembly shall consist of a clevis mounted tie-rod type closed cylinder with the exhaust port piped to a brass flow control valve and the inlet port piped to a breather/filter. 4.8 When specified, the valve shall be factory equipped with a lever and spring assembly. The spring shall be mounted to a bracket on the side of the valve body with a bolt assembly to adjust the spring tension. MATERIALS 5.1 The valve body, cover and disc shall be constructed of ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron for sizes 2 in. (50 mm) through 24 in. (600 mm) and ASTM A126 class B, gray iron for sizes 30 in. (800mm) through 48 in. (1200mm), with optional body material ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron. 5.2 The exterior and interior of the valve shall be coated with an NSF/ANSI 61 approved fusion bonded epoxy coating. 5.3 The removable body seat shall be constructed of ASTM A276, Type 304 stainless steel. Optional body seat material includes ASTM A276, Type 316 stainless steel. 5.4 The removable resilient seat shall be precision molded Buna-N (NBR), ASTM D2000-BG. When specified, optional seat material includes EPDM. 5.5 The disc, arm, and external levers shall be ductile iron. OPTIONS 6.1 A pre-wired limit switch will be provided (when specified) to indicate open/closed position to a remote location. The mechanical type limit switch shall be activated by the external arm and rated for NEMA 4, 6, or 6P and shall have U.L. rated 5 amp, 125 or 250 VAC contacts. MANUFACTURE 7.1 Manufacturer shall demonstrate a minimum of five (5) years’ experience in the manufacture of swing check valves. 7.2 All valves shall be hydrostatically and seat tested per AWWA C508 to demonstrate zero leakage and structural integrity. When requested, the manufacturer shall provide test certificates, dimensional drawings, parts list drawings, and operation and maintenance manuals. 7.3 Swing Check Valves shall be Series #7000LW (lever and weight), 7000AC (air cushion and weight) or 7000LS (lever and spring) as manufactured by Val- Matic®Valve & Mfg. Corporation, Elmhurst, IL USA or approved equal. 7 w w w . v a l m a t i c . c o m L e v e r & W e i g h t A i r C u s h i o n L e v e r & S p r i n g A W W A S w i n g C h e c k V a l v e w w w . v a l m m a a t i c . c o m A W WA S W I N G C H E C K V A L V E Val-Matic’s qualit y o f d e s i g n a n d m e t i c u l o u s workmanship has s e t t h e s t a n d a r d s b y w h i c h all others are me a s u r e d . Q u a l i t y d e s i g n f e a - tures such as the A W W A E n e r • G ® B a l l V a l v e with its energy eff i c i e n t d e s i g n , f u s i o n b o n d e d epoxy and adjust a b l e r e s i l i e n t s e a t i n g . . . . C a m - Centric®Plug V a l v e s h a v e m o r e r e q u e s t e d features than a n y o t h e r e c c e n t r i c p l u g valve....America n - B F V ® B u t t e r f l y V a l v e s include a field re p l a c e a b l e s e a t w i t h o u t t h e need for special t o o l s . . . . T i l t e d D i s c ® C h e c k Valveswith high s t r e n g t h a n d w e a r r e s i s t a n t aluminum bronz e t r i m a s s t a n d a r d . . . . S i l e n t Check Valve s f e a t u r i n g c o m b i n e d resilient/metal-to- m e t a l s e a t i n g . . . . S u r e S e a l Foot Valvesprovi d e d w i t h a h e a v y d u t y s t a i n - less steel screene d i n l e t . . . . S w i n g - F l e x ® a n d Surgebuster®C h e c k V a l v e s d e s i g n e d w i t h an unrestricted f u l l f l o w a r e a . . . . D u a l D i s c ® Check Valves u t i l i z i n g s t a b i l i z e d c o m p o - nents to provide e x t e n d e d l i f e . . . . A i r R e l e a s e , Air/Vacuum and C o m b i n a t i o n A i r V a l v e s provided standard w i t h T y p e 3 1 6 s t a i n l e s s s t e e l trim....VaultSafe® f a m i l y o f p r o d u c t s i n c l u d e s the FloodSaf e ® I n f l o w P r e v e n t e r , FrostSafe®two - w a y d a m p e r a n d t h e VentSafe®vent p i p e s e c u r i t y c a g e . T h e s e features couple d w i t h o u r a t t e n t i o n t o detail put Val- M a t i c V a l v e s i n a c l a s s b y themselves.Val-Matic is totally c o m m i t t e d t o p r o v i d i n g t h e highest quality va l v e s a n d o u t s t a n d i n g s e r v i c e to our customers. C o m p l e t e c u s t o m e r s a t i s f a c - tion is our goal.Make t h e C h a n g e to Q u a l i t y ! S p e c i f y Val-Matic Valve a n d M a n u f a c t u r i n g C o r p . 905 Riverside D r i v e , E l m h u r s t , I L 6 0 1 2 6 Phone: 630-941 - 7 6 0 0 F a x : 6 3 0 - 9 4 1 - 8 0 4 2 ww w . v a l m a t i c . c o m valve s @ v a l m a t i c . c o m Copyright © 2011 V a l - M a t i c V a l v e & M f g . C o r p . ISO 9001:2 0 0 8 c e r t i f i e d c o m p a n y 1 1 / 1 1 B u l l e t i n 7 0 0 0 B B A R S S C R E R E E N S S T T T O O O O R R R R R M M M M F F F L L L O O W W S S U U U U R R R G G G G G E E E E T T T A T A A A N N K F L L U U U U E E E E E E E E E F F F F F F F F F F L L L L U F F F L L U U U C L L A A A R R R I I F F F ERPRIM A R Y SETTL I N G CAAAAATTTIOOONNRINATIONOROREEEFFFFFF L L L U U U U E E U U E E E N N N T T T U U E E GGGGGAATTTTIOO RAAAAATTTIOOONN A T I O N DDEDEDEDCCCCCCCCCLLLLLLCCCCCCCCLLLLLLOOONNNN GGRGGRGITITCCCHCHHHHHHHHHHAAAMAABEGEEEEEEEECHCHCHHHHHHCCCLLLOLRRRINNINAATATATATATTTAAATATTOIOIOIOIOIOOIOIOIONNNNNNNNNNNSLSLLLUUUUUUUUDDDDDDDDGWWWWWWWEWEWEEEEELLLLLGLEEEERRRTONNFFFLLLLLFFFOOOOCOCOCOCOCOCOCCCCCCULAAATITTITIOAEAEEEEENNGGGGGGEETTTTTTTTTTBBBBABAOONNNGNGGTTTTTTTTTTTTTTLILILNN D D E E E E N N N N T T T T T T T T T T T R R R R R R R A A A A T T T T I R R I I G G G G A A A T T T T A E R A T I O N S E T T L I N G B A S I N F L O C C U L A C H C H L O O L O L O L O L O L O L R I N A N A A T I T I T I O N O N O N C C B A B R S C S C S C S C R E E R E R E R E R E N E E N E w w w . v a l m a t i c . c o m G R G R I T I T C H A A M A M M M M M B E B E B B B B B R S S S S L S L L S S U U U U U U U D D D D D G E G E W E W E W E E E E W L L L L L L L L L L L L P R P R I I M A R R Y Y S E S E T T T T T T L I L I L I L I N G N G N N P r o v e n D e s i g n P r e f e r r e d F e a t u r e s A d v a n c e d T e c h n o l o g y D E D E C C T T T T I O I O O I I O O N N N N N I R R C L L C L L O O R O R O R O O O R O R I N I N I N I N I N A T A T A T A A T A T M e e t s A W W A C 5 1 7 N S F / A N S I 3 7 2 C e r t i fi e d C a m - C e n t r i c ® P l u g V a l v e s Val-Matic’s quality o f d e s i g n a n d m e t i c u l o u s workmanship has s e t t h e s t a n d a r d s b y w h i c h all others are meas u r e d . Q u a l i t y d e s i g n f e a - tures such as the A W W A E n e r • G ® B a l l V a l v e with its energy effici e n t d e s i g n , f u s i o n b o n d e d epoxy and adjustabl e r e s i l i e n t s e a t i n g . . . . C a m - Centric®Plug Val v e s h a v e m o r e r e q u e s t e d features than an y o t h e r e c c e n t r i c p l u g valve....American- B F V ® B u t t e r f l y V a l v e s include a field repl a c e a b l e s e a t w i t h o u t t h e need for special to o l s . . . . T i l t e d D i s c ® C h e c k Valveswith high st r e n g t h a n d w e a r r e s i s t a n t aluminum bronze t r i m a s s t a n d a r d . . . . S i l e n t Check Valves f e a t u r i n g c o m b i n e d resilient/metal-to- m e t a l s e a t i n g a n d a r e NSF/ANSI 61 & 37 2 C e r t i f i e d . . . . S u r e S e a l Foot Valvesprovid e d w i t h a h e a v y d u t y s t a i n - less steel screened i n l e t . . . . S w i n g - F l e x ® a n d Surgebuster®Che c k V a l v e s d e s i g n e d w i t h an unrestricted full f l o w a r e a . . . . S w i n g C h e c k Valveswith field a d j u s t a b l e c l o s u r e v e r s a t i l i - ty....Dual Disc®Che c k V a l v e s u t i l i t i n g s t a b i - lized components t o p r o v i d e e x t e n d e d life....Air Releas e , A i r / V a c u u m a n d Combination Air V a l v e s p r o v i d e d s t a n d a r d with Type 316 stainl e s s s t e e l t r i m . . . . V a u l t S a f e ® family of products i n c l u d e s t h e F l o o d S a f e ® Inflow Prevente r , F r o s t S a f e ® t w o - w a y damper and the V e n t S a f e ® v e n t p i p e s e c u - rity cage. These fe a t u r e s c o u p l e d w i t h o u r attention to detail p u t V a l - M a t i c V a l v e s i n a class by themselve s . A l l p r o d u c t s a r e W Q A certified Lead-Fre e i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h NSF/ANSI 372.Val-Matic is totally c o m m i t t e d t o p r o v i d i n g t h e highest quality valv e s a n d o u t s t a n d i n g s e r v i c e to our customers. C o m p l e t e c u s t o m e r s a t i s f a c - tion is our goal.Make t h e C h a n g e to Q u a l i t y ! S p e c i f y Val-Matic Valve a n d M a n u f a c t u r i n g C o r p . 905 Riverside Dri v e , E l m h u r s t , I L 6 0 1 2 6 Phone: 630-941-7 6 0 0 F a x : 6 3 0 - 9 4 1 - 8 0 4 2 www.v a l m a t i c . c o m valves@ v a l m a t i c . c o m Copyright © 2012 Va l - M a t i c V a l v e & M f g . C o r p . ISO 9001:200 8 c e r t i f i e d c o m p a n y 9 / 1 2 B u l l e t i n 5 0 0 0 Seat is Offsetfrom Center Line of the Shaft Center Lineof Plug Shaft 2 A. Non-Clog Design The unrestricted flow area com- bined with smooth streamline con- touring allows passage of large solids to prevent potential clogging and provide low headloss. B. Eccentric Action Provides positive shut off with wear resistant action and low torque. C. Full Top Access Cover Provides accessibility for inspection without removal of the valve from the line. D. Friction Collar with Memory Stop Secures valve plug in any position and includes a nylon bearing for ease of operation. E. V-Type Packing Field adjustable and replaceable without removal of worm gear or motor actuators. F. Removable POP™ Shims Packing Overload Protection Shims protect packing by preventing over- load during field adjustment. G. Radial Bearings Heavy Duty, T316 Stainless Steel, Permanently Lubricated. H. Thrust Bearing Upper:PTFE - Provides ease of actu- ation during operating conditions. Lower:Stainless Steel - Prevents wear to plug and Grit-Guard. I. Grit-Guard™ Shaft Seal The Val-Matic Exclusive Grit-Guard™ shaft seal extends packing and bear- ing life by minimizing contact with abrasive line media. J. Seat Welded overlay of 95% pure nickel applied directly to the body using a state-of-the-art robotic welding sys- tem for a consistent, high quality weld. Machined and ground to a smooth finish. K. Plug Fully rubber encapsulated molded plug eliminates exposed surfaces preventing corrosion and delamina- tion. Grit Seal ThrustBearing Radial Bearing A E F H I J K DB C I G Feature Highlights Open Memory Stop Closed Stop Nylon Bearing Friction Adjustment H Eccentric Action Friction Collar Lower Bearing Journal G Proven Design With installations worldwide, the Val-Matic Cam- Centric®Plug Valve has proven itself as the preferred valve for wastewater, industrial waste and process applications. The Cam-Centric®Plug Valve is a ¼ turn eccentric plug valve allowing cost effective, low torque actuation for pump control, shut-off and throttling service. The valve’s eccentric action rotates the plug in and out of the seated position with minimal contact, thereby preventing high torque and wear to the valve seat and plug. The combination of the eccentric action, stainless steel bearings, Grit-Guard™ seals and heavy duty nickel seat assures long life with minimal mainte- nance. Preferred Features The Cam-Centric®Plug Valve features a shaft sealing system that utilizes V-Type packing, a packing follower and a Grit-Guard™ seal for ease of maintenance and to reduce wear. The Grit-Guard™ seals reduce wear by preventing grit and media from reaching the bearings and packing to prevent plug lock up. The seals are standard in both the upper and lower journals (Figures 1 & 2). To prevent the packing from being over tight- ened, the shaft seal incorporates POP™ (Packing Overload Protection) Shims. The packing is easily adjusted by removing the POP™ shims as necessary uti- lizing the pull tab feature (Figure 1). Adjustment or replacement of the V-Type packing can be done with- out removal of the gear, motor or cylinder actuator. The Cam-Centric®bearing package consists of perma- nently lubricated, T316 stainless steel radial bearings in both the upper and lower journals. The upper thrust bearing is made of Teflon and the lower thrust bearing is T316 stainless steel. The bearings are protected from grit related wear by the Grit- Guard™ seals (Figures 1 & 2). The Cam-Centric®Plug Valve utilizes a totally encapsu- lated molded plug to protect exposure to corrosion and delamination in severe abrasive applications. The valve seat is a welded overlay of 95% pure nickel applied directly to the body on a machined surface using a state-of-the-art robotic welding system for a consistent, high quality weld (Figure 3). Advanced Technology Incorporating the latest in valve technology assures a high-quality valve that will provide long service. The design process utilized solid Modeling and Finite Element Analysis (FEA) of the key structural compo- nents. Flow and torque data was derived from flow tests, mathematical models and Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD). Manufacturing technology uses auto- mated process control in the foundry and ISO 9001 controlled manufacturing processes. Every valve is tested in accordance with AWWA C517 and MSS SP- 108 on automated hydraulic test rigs with gauges cali- brated per ISO standards. 3 Feature Benefits GLANDFOLLOWER GRIT-GUARD™ V-TYPEPACKING THRUSTBEARING RADIALBEARING POP™SHIMS WITHPULL TABS Figure 1. Upper Bearing Journal Figure 3. Robotic welding of nickel seat Grit-Guard ThrustBearing Radial Bearing Figure 2. Lower Bearing Journal The Cam-Centric®Plug Valve is available with a wide range of actuation options, from simple lever opera- tion to advanced pump control systems. Options include 2" operator nuts, worm gears, chainwheels, electric motor and cylinder actuation. A wide variety of accessories such as floor stands and extended bon- nets are also available (see accessories on page 7). Val- Matic Engineering personnel work closely with cylin- der and electric actuation manufacturers to assure actuator/valve compatibility. This assures the actuator you specify will deliver the performance you expect when utilized with a Cam-Centric®Plug Valve. 4 Actuation Direct Nut operated valve with memory stop: Electric Actuation:Val-Matic Cylinder Actuation: • Adjustable open memory stop for system balancing • Adjustable close stop • Adjustable friction collar • For use with lever accessories Val-Matic Worm Gears: • Heavy Duty, totally enclosed and sealed • For above ground and buried service applications • Bronze radial bearings and roller thrust bearings provide smooth operations and extended life • Compliance with AWWA C541 for Power Actuation • Pneumatic/Hydraulic • Single Acting or Double Acting • Fail Open/Closed for power failure • Modulating Service • Throttling Service • Limit Switches, Solenoid Valves, Positioners • Manual Overrides • Pump Control • 110 Single Phase, 230/460 Three Phase • Compliance with AWWA C542 for Power Actuation • Modulating Service • Throttling Service • Remote push button control and indication • Torque Switches, Limit Switches • De-clutchable handwheels • Available from a wide variety of manufacturers Worm Gear Features Val-Matic Worm Gear A valve actuator must perform to the same level as the valve. The Val- Matic worm gear is designed and built to provide the same long term service as our Cam-Centric®Plug Valve. The exclusive bearing pack- age in the worm gear includes four bronze sleeve bearings and two roller thrust bearings. This exclusive package assures smooth operation and long life regardless of the valve’s orientation or application. The ductile iron segment gear cou- pled with the upper and lower bronze radial bearings exceed the requirements of AWWA C517 for strength and durability. All worm gears are designed to exceed, a rim pull of 200 pounds on handwheels and input torques of 300 foot pounds for operator nuts without damage. Buried service worm gears are grease packed, sealed and include stainless steel shafts. Worm gears can be provided with hand- wheels, chainwheels or 2” operator nuts. A. Housing Heavy duty, totally enclosed and sealed. B. Worm Hardened steel for durability and long life. C. Radial Shaft Bearings Bronze shaft bearings extend life and provide ease of operation (rear shaft bearing not visible). D. Roller Thrust Bearings Provides smooth operation and extends life. E. Segment Gear Heavy duty ductile iron for high strength. Provided with precision bore and keyway for connection to the valve shaft in multiple posi- tions. F. Segment Gear Radial Bearings Upper and lower bronze bearings provide ease of operation and extend life (lower bearing not visi- ble). G. Cover Gasket Seals housing and prevents foreign material from entering actuator and prevents loss of grease. H. Shaft Seal Prevents foreign material from entering the actuator. I. External Stops Both open and closed stops are external and easily adjustable. J. Position Indicator Displays precise plug position on above ground service. A B C D I F G H E J 5 Ratings/Construction PRESSURE RATINGS MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION MAXIMUM PRESSURE RATINGS SERIES CONNECTION SIZE RANGE CWP (psig) 5400 ANSI Class 125 Flanged 4-Way 4”- 12”175 5500 ANSI Class 125 Flanged 3-Way 4”- 12”175 5600R ANSI Class 125 Flanged 100% Port 4”- 10”175 12”- 48”150 5700R AWWA C111 Mechanical Joint 100% Port 4”- 10”175 12”- 48”150 5800RTL ASME NPT Threaded 1/2”- 2”175 5800R ANSI Class 125 Flanged 2”- 12”175 14”- 54”150 5800HP ANSI Class 125 Flanged High Pressure 3”- 24”250 5900R AWWA C111 Mechanical Joint 3”- 12”175 14”- 54”150 5900HP AWWA C111 Mechanical Joint High Pressure 3”- 48”250 COMPONENT STANDARD Body (5600R, 5700R, 5800R, 5900R)Cast Iron ASTM A126, Class B Body (5400, 5500, 5800HP, 5900HP)Ductile Iron ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 Plug (5600R, 5700R, 5800R, 5900R)Cast Iron ASTM A126, Class B, Buna-N Encapsulated, ASTM D2000 Plug (5400, 5500, 5800HP, 5900HP)Ductile Iron ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12, Buna-N Encapsulated, ASTM D2000 Radial Shaft Bearings T316 Stainless Steel Top Thrust Bearing Teflon Bottom Thrust Bearing T316 Stainless Steel Available Coatings Two-Part Epoxy, Fusion Bonded Epoxy, Glass Lining, Rubber Lining OPEN Stem Guide Chainwheel SE A T E N D Extended Bonnet Space limitations and application specifics often require special accessories. In addition to those shown below, Val-Matic offers a wide range of accessories to meet your application requirements. OPEN OPEN Lever ChainleverFloor Stand with Extension Stem Accessories Ground Level Position Indicator 7 “T” Wrench 9 Flanged & Mechanical Joint End Connections Installation Dimensions Notes: 1. Replace Handwheel (HW) diameter in the model number (i.e. /7A08) with 02 for 2” square operating nut (i.e./7A02). 2. Add a C suffix to model number to include Chainwheel Kit (i.e. 5804R/7A08C). 3. Available with ISO/PN drilling. K1 A1 F G H SE A T E N D OPEN OPTIONAL 1/4” NPT PRESSURE PORTS A2 F G K2 H SE A T E N D 2" SQ. OPEN Series 5800R & 5800HP Flanged Series 5900R & 5900HP Mechanical Joint *Asterisk indicates valve model numbers without spur gear C OF VALVEL C OF ECCENTRIC SEATING SURFACEL C OF VALVEL C OF ECCENTRIC SEATING SURFACEL FLANGE DRILLING CONFORMS TOANSI B16.1 CLASS 125 MECHANICAL JOINT (MJ) ENDS CONFORM TO ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 Dimensions in Inches Valve Size Flanged Model No. MJ Model No.Reverse Direct A1 A2 F G H K1 K2 2 1/2 5825R/7A08*-175 175 7.50 -4.50 7.50 3.06 9.50 - 3 5803R/7A08*5903R/8A02A*175 175 8.00 11.50 4.50 7.50 3.06 9.50 9.005803HP/7A08*5903HP/8A02A*250 250 4 5804R/7A08*5904R/8A02*175 175 9.00 14.00 5.56 9.31 3.06 9.50 9.005804HP/7A08*5904HP/8A02*250 250 11.63 6 5806R/7A08*5906R/8A02*175 175 10.50 15.75 7.06 11.06 3.06 9.50 9.005806HP/7A12*5906HP/8A02*250 250 13.63 8 5808R/7A12*-100 175 11.50 17.25 8.75 12.62 3.06 11.50 9.005808R/7B16*5908R/8A02*175 175 9.385808HP/7B18*5908HP/8A02*250 250 10 5810R/7C12*5910R/8C02*100 175 13.00 18.75 10.44 16.25 4.75 13.13 7.885810R/7D16*5910R/8D02*175 175 11.005810HP/7D16*5910HP/8D02*250 250 12 5812R/7C16*5912R/8C02*100 175 14.00 19.75 12.50 17.69 4.75 11.00 7.885812R/7D24*5912R/8D02*175 175 16.755812HP/7D24*5912HP/8D02*250 250 14 5814R/7E18*-50 100 17.00 24.50 13.00 19.31 5.62 15.25 13.005814R/7G12 5914R/8F02*150 150 21.25 9.69 14.005814HP/7G12 5914HP/8F02*250 250 16 5816R/7E24*-50 100 17.75 24.75 14.50 20.62 5.62 17.12 13.005816R/7G14 5916R/8F02*150 150 22.56 9.69 14.62 5816HP/7G18 5916HP/8F02*250 250 15.62 18 5818R/7J30*-50 100 21.50 28.50 16.25 22.25 5.62 18.62 14.505818R/7L24 5918R/8K02 150 150 25.12 7.38 19.255818HP/7L24 5918HP/8K02 250 250 20 5820R/7M18 -50 100 23.50 30.50 17.50 26.25 7.38 19.00 14.505820R/7P30 5920R/8K02.5 150 150 21.885820HP/7P30 5920HP/8K02.5 250 250 24 5824R/7M24 -50 100 30.00 37.00 20.25 29.00 7.38 19.25 14.505824R/7Q36 5924R/8K02.5 150 150 11.50 23.255824HP/7Q36 5924HP/8K02.5 250 250 30 5830R/7R24 -50 100 37.50 45.50 24.00 31.00 4.06 16.12 14.445830R/7T30 5930R/8S02 150 150 36 5836R/7S30 -50 100 52.00 60.00 29.00 31.00 4.06 16.12 14.44 5836R/7W36 5936R/8T02 150 150 32.25 10.50 23.50 21.75 42 5842R/7X30 -50 100 62.00 70.00 36.50 44.00 14.00 25.25 27.605842R/7Z36 5942R/8Z02 150 150 48 5848R/7X30 -50 100 84.00 84.00 38.50 48.46 10.90 27.60 27.605848R/7Z36 5948R/8Z02 150 150 54 5854R/7X30 -50 100 96.00 -38.50 48.46 10.90 27.60 -5854R/7Z36 -150 150 60 Consult Factory Standard Port 13 Flow Characteristics PLUG POSITION (DEGREES FROM CLOSED POSITION ) PE R C E N T O F F U L L O P E N C V 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 900 0 10 100 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 BUTTERFLY BALL CAM-CENTRIC® PLUG INHERENT PUMP CONTROL FLOW CHARACTERISTICS To control pressure surges and provide good- controllability, the flow characteristics of valves should be considered. The graph at left shows the inherent flow characteristics at a constant ΔP for various valves. The Plug Valve has an inherent flow charac- teristic similar to a ball valve. When installed in a pipeline, the plug valve will approximate a linear flow characteristic because the piping system pressure losses will shift the flow curve to the left. A linear installed flow characteris- tic will help control surges and provide a wide range of controllability. Installations Cam-Centric®Plug Valve with worm gear actuator and chainwheel 3-Way Cam-Centric®Plug Valves with worm gear actuators Cam-Centric®Plug Valve with worm gear actuator and extension stemCam-Centric®Plug Valve with motor actuator Cam-Centric®Plug Valve with Val-Matic Swing-Flex® Cam-Centric®Plug Valve with worm gear actuator 14 2-Way Specification SCOPE 1.1 This specification covers the design, manufacture, and testing of 1/2 in. (15 mm) through 3 in. (80 mm) Threaded Eccentric Plug Valve, 2 ½ in. (60 mm) through 60 in. (1500 mm) Eccentric Plug Valve, and 4 in. (100 mm) through 60 in. (1500 mm) 100% Port Eccentric Plug Valve suitable for water or waste-water service with pressures up to 250 psig (1725 kPa).1.2 Plug Valves shall be quarter-turn, non-lubricated with resilient encapsulated plug. STANDARDS AND APPROVALS 2.1 2 ½ in. (60 mm) through 60 in. (1500 mm) plug valves shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accor- dance with American Water Works Association Standard ANSI/AWWA C517. 2.2 All Plug Valves shall be certified Lead-Free in accor- dance with NSF/ANSI 372.2.3 Manufacturer shall have a quality management sys- tem that is certified to ISO 9001 by an accredited,certifying body. CONNECTIONS 3.1 Threaded valves shall have threaded NPT full size inlets. The connection shall be hexagonal for a wrench connection. 3.2 Flanged valves shall have flanges with drilling to ANSIB16.1, Class 125.3.3 Mechanical Joint valves shall fully comply with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. DESIGN 4.1 Threaded and all other valves under 4” (100mm) shall have port areas of not less than 100% of pipe area. Port areas on other sizes are 85% on 16” (400 mm) and smaller, 80% on 18”-24” (150 mm- 600 mm), and 75% on 30” (800 mm) and larger. 4.2 Threaded valve seat shall be a machined seating sur-face. 4.3 2 ½ in. (60 mm) through 60 in. (1500 mm) plug valvesshall have a valve seat that is a welded overlay of 95% pure nickel applied directly to the body on apre-machined, cast seating surface and machined to a smooth finish.4.4 Threaded valves shall have shaft seals which consist of V-type lip seal in a fixed gland with a resilient O-ring spring. 4.5 2 ½ in. (60 mm) through 60 in. (1500 mm) plug valvesshall have shaft seals which consist of V-type packing in a fixed gland with an adjustable followerdesigned to prevent over compression of the pack- ing and to meet design parameter of the packingmanufacturer. Removable POP™ shims shall be pro- vided under the follower flanges to provide foradjustment and prevent over tightening. 4.6 Permanently lubricated, radial shaft bearings shallbe supplied in the upper and lower bearing journals. Thrust bearings shall be provided in the upper andlower journal areas, except for threaded type which only have upper thrust bearings. 4.7 Both the packing and bearings in the upper and lower journals shall be protected by a Grit-Guard™“drip tight” Buna-N shaft seal located on the valve shaft to minimize the entrance of grit into the bear-ing journal and shaft seal areas. 4.8 The threaded valve body shall have 1/8” NPTupstream and downsteam pressure ports. MATERIALS 5.1 Valve bodies and covers shall be constructed of ASTM A126 Class B cast iron for working pressures up to 175 psig (1200 kPa) and ASTM A536 Grade 65- 45-12 for working pressures up to 250 psig (1725 kPa). The words “SEAT END” shall be cast on theexterior of the body seat end. 5.2 Threaded valve plugs in sizes 1/2 in. (15 mm)through 3 in. (80 mm) shall be of one-piece construc- tion and made of ASTM A126 Class B cast iron fully encapsulated with a resilient facing per ASTM D2000-BG and ANSI/AWWA C517 requirements. 5.3 2 ½ in. (60 mm) through 60 in. (1500 mm) plugs shall be of one-piece construction and made of ASTM A126 Class B cast iron or ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron and fully encapsulated with resilient facing per ASTM D2000-BG and ANSI/AWWA C517 requirements. 5.4 Threaded valves shall have radial shaft bearings con- structed of self-lubricating Type 316 stainless steel. The top thrust bearing shall be Teflon. 5.5 2 ½ in. (60 mm) through 60 in. (1500 mm) plug valves shall have radial shaft bearings constructed of self- lubricating Type 316 stainless steel. The top thrust bearing shall be Teflon. The bottom thrust bearing shall be self-lubricating Type 316 stainless steel. Cover bolts shall be corrosion resistant with zinc plating. ACTUATION 6.1 Threaded valves shall be equipped with a hand lever with a dial indicator and open memory stop. 6.2 Valves 2 ½ in. (60 mm) to 8 in. (200 mm) and 4 in. (100mm) to 6 in. (150 mm) 100% ported shall be equipped with a 2 inch square nut for direct quarter turn operation. The packing gland shall include a friction collar and an open position memory stop. The friction collar shall include a nylon sleeve to provide friction without exerting pressure on the valve packing. 6.3 When specified valves 4 in. (100 mm) and larger shall include a totally enclosed and sealed worm gear actuator with position indicator (above ground serv- ice only) and externally adjustable open and closed stops. The worm segment gear shall be ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron with a precision bore and keyway for connection to the valve shaft. Bronze radial bearings shall be provided for the seg- ment gear and worm shaft. Alloy steel roller thrust bearings shall be provided for the hardened worm. 6.4 All gear actuators shall be designed to withstand, without damage, a rim pull of 200 lb. on the hand wheel and an input torque or 300 ft-lbs. for nuts. 6.5 Buried service actuators shall be packed with grease and sealed for temporary submergence to 20 feet of water. Exposed worm shafts shall be stainless steel. OPTIONS 7.1 When specified, the valve port area shall have not less than 100% of pipe area. 7.2 The interior and exterior of the valve shall be coat- ed with an NSF/ANSI 61 approved fusion bonded epoxy. 7.3 The interior of the valve shall be coated with 8 mils SG-14 glass lining or 1/8” soft rubber lining. MANUFACTURE 8.1 Manufacturer shall demonstrate a minimum of ten (10) years’ experience in the manufacture of plug valves. When requested, the manufacturer shall pro- vide test certificates, dimensional drawings, parts list drawings and operation and maintenance manu- als. 8.2 The exterior of the valve for above ground service shall be coated with a universal alkyd primer. Valve exterior for buried service shall be coated with an epoxy coating. 8.3 Valve shall be marked with the Serial Number, Manufacturer, Size, Cold Working Pressure (CWP) and the Direct and Reverse Actuator Pressure Ratings on a corrosion resistant nameplate. 8.4 Plug Valves shall be Series # 5600R (100% Port Flanged), 5700R (100% Port Mechanical Joint), 5800RTL (Threaded), 5800R (Flanged), 5800HP (Flanged), 5900R (Mechanical Joint) or 5900HP (Mechanical Joint) as manufactured by Val-Matic Valve and Mfg. Corporation, Elmhurst, IL. USA or approved equal. B B A R S S C R E R E E N S S T T T O O O O R R R R R M M M M F F F L L L O O W W S S U U U U R R R G G G G G E E E E T T T A T A A A N N K F L L U U U U E E E E E E E E E F F F F F F F F F F L L L L U F F F L L U U U C L L A A A R R R I I F F F ERPRIM A R Y SETTL I N G CAAAAATTTIOOONNRINATIONOROREEEFFFFFF L L L U U U U E E U U E E E N N N T T T U U E E GGGGGAATTTTIOO RAAAAATTTIOOONN A T I O N DDEDEDEDCCCCCCCCCLLLLLLCCCCCCCCLLLLLLOOONNNN GGRGGRGITITCCCHCHHHHHHHHHHAAAMAABEGEEEEEEEECHCHCHHHHHHCCCLLLOLRRRINNINAATATATATATTTAAATATTOIOIOIOIOIOOIOIOIONNNNNNNNNNNSLSLLLUUUUUUUUDDDDDDDDGWWWWWWWEWEWEEEEELLLLLGLEEEERRRTONNFFFLLLLLFFFOOOOCOCOCOCOCOCOCCCCCCULAAATITTITIOAEAEEEEENNGGGGGGEETTTTTTTTTTBBBBABAOONNNGNGGTTTTTTTTTTTTTTLILILNN D D E E E E N N N N T T T T T T T T T T T R R R R R R R A A A A T T T T I R R I I G G G G A A A T T T T A E R A T I O N S E T T L I N G B A S I N F L O C C U L A C H C H L O O L O L O L O L O L O L R I N A N A A T I T I T I O N O N O N C C B A B R S C S C S C S C R E E R E R E R E R E N E E N E w w w . v a l m a t i c . c o m G R G R I T I T C H A A M A M M M M M B E B E B B B B B R S S S S L S L L S S U U U U U U U D D D D D G E G E W E W E W E E E E W L L L L L L L L L L L L P R P R I I M A R R Y Y S E S E T T T T T T L I L I L I L I N G N G N N P r o v e n D e s i g n P r e f e r r e d F e a t u r e s A d v a n c e d T e c h n o l o g y D E D E C C T T T T I O I O O I I O O N N N N N I R R C L L C L L O O R O R O R O O O R O R I N I N I N I N I N A T A T A T A A T A T M e e t s A W W A C 5 1 7 N S F / A N S I 3 7 2 C e r t i fi e d C a m - C e n t r i c ® P l u g V a l v e s Val-Matic’s quality o f d e s i g n a n d m e t i c u l o u s workmanship has s e t t h e s t a n d a r d s b y w h i c h all others are meas u r e d . Q u a l i t y d e s i g n f e a - tures such as the A W W A E n e r • G ® B a l l V a l v e with its energy effici e n t d e s i g n , f u s i o n b o n d e d epoxy and adjustabl e r e s i l i e n t s e a t i n g . . . . C a m - Centric®Plug Val v e s h a v e m o r e r e q u e s t e d features than an y o t h e r e c c e n t r i c p l u g valve....American- B F V ® B u t t e r f l y V a l v e s include a field repl a c e a b l e s e a t w i t h o u t t h e need for special to o l s . . . . T i l t e d D i s c ® C h e c k Valveswith high st r e n g t h a n d w e a r r e s i s t a n t aluminum bronze t r i m a s s t a n d a r d . . . . S i l e n t Check Valves f e a t u r i n g c o m b i n e d resilient/metal-to- m e t a l s e a t i n g a n d a r e NSF/ANSI 61 & 37 2 C e r t i f i e d . . . . S u r e S e a l Foot Valvesprovid e d w i t h a h e a v y d u t y s t a i n - less steel screened i n l e t . . . . S w i n g - F l e x ® a n d Surgebuster®Che c k V a l v e s d e s i g n e d w i t h an unrestricted full f l o w a r e a . . . . S w i n g C h e c k Valveswith field a d j u s t a b l e c l o s u r e v e r s a t i l i - ty....Dual Disc®Che c k V a l v e s u t i l i z i n g s t a b i - lized components t o p r o v i d e e x t e n d e d life....Air Releas e , A i r / V a c u u m a n d Combination Air V a l v e s p r o v i d e d s t a n d a r d with Type 316 stainl e s s s t e e l t r i m . . . . V a u l t S a f e ® family of products i n c l u d e s t h e F l o o d S a f e ® Inflow Prevente r , F r o s t S a f e ® t w o - w a y damper and the V e n t S a f e ® v e n t p i p e s e c u - rity cage. These fe a t u r e s c o u p l e d w i t h o u r attention to detail p u t V a l - M a t i c V a l v e s i n a class by themselve s . A l l p r o d u c t s a r e W Q A certified Lead-Fre e i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h NSF/ANSI 372.Val-Matic is totally c o m m i t t e d t o p r o v i d i n g t h e highest quality valv e s a n d o u t s t a n d i n g s e r v i c e to our customers. C o m p l e t e c u s t o m e r s a t i s f a c - tion is our goal.Make t h e C h a n g e to Q u a l i t y ! S p e c i f y Val-Matic Valve a n d M a n u f a c t u r i n g C o r p . 905 Riverside Dri v e , E l m h u r s t , I L 6 0 1 2 6 Phone: 630-941-7 6 0 0 F a x : 6 3 0 - 9 4 1 - 8 0 4 2 www.v a l m a t i c . c o m valves@ v a l m a t i c . c o m Copyright © 2012 Va l - M a t i c V a l v e & M f g . C o r p . ISO 9001:200 8 c e r t i f i e d c o m p a n y 9 / 1 2 B u l l e t i n 5 0 0 0 3.04 ODOR CONTROL This section is structured as follows: 3.04.1 PASSIVE ODOR CONTROL 3.04.1 PASSIVE ODOR CONTROL DATA SHEETS FOLLOW THIS PAGE 7945 STONE CREEK DR STE 50 CHANHASSEN MN 55317 PHONE: 952.927.9215 FAX:952.927.9224 EMAIL: sales@synecosystems.com PEACEMAKER® 5x5 Converting Series Scrubber Copyright © 2016 Syneco Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved Page 1 PEACEMAKER® 5X5 CONVERTING SERIES SCRUBBER FAN See “VBW-6 FAN SPECIFICATIONS” for details. PHYSICAL Vessel 1.9 SG Black/White HDPE Cover 1/4″ Black/White ABS Influent Coupling (Foul air intake) 6″ Diameter Lower Air Diffuser 3/16″ Perforated HDPE With Coated Steel Support Height (without fan)76″ Diameter 60″ Media (maximum) 73 Cu-Ft Foot Print 61″x67″ Charged Weight 4,165 lbs. Airflow (maximum) 335 CFM Fan (maximum) VBW-6 MISCELLANEOUS Storage/Use Store and use away from acids and reducing agents. Do not add any chemicals to the scrubber other than those recommended by the manufacturer. Syneco Systems reserves the right to change specifications without prior notice. In no case will such changes have an adverse effect on the performance of the product. PHONE: 952.927.9215 FAX: 952.927.9224 EMAIL: sales@synecosystems.com WEB: www.synecosystems.com Odor Control Made Easy! PEACEMAKER® Converting/Polishing Dry Air Scrubbers Copyright © 2016 Syneco Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved Page 1 AN ADVANCEMENT IN ODOR CONTROL TECHNOLOGY PEACEMAKER® Dry Air Scrubbers provide two stage chemistry for the control of odors from hydrogen sulfide (H2S),mercaptans, ammonia, amines and other odors generated in wastewater collection and treatment systems. They are easy to use, effective and economic. Lift Stations Headworks Grit Rooms Sludge Processing In what follows, when we say “odor” we mostly mean H2S. We know there are other reduced- sulfur and nitrogen-based compounds involved and we have planned for them, but H2S is the main culprit and is most important in discussion and design. OUR DESIGN PRINCIPLE…..SIMPLICITY “The Best Solution Should be the Simplest, but Not Simpler.” — Albert Einstein Often it is the simplest solution that works the best. Complexity is the enemy of effective, long- term odor control. Too much fussing, too many bells and whistles spell trouble. Peacemaker scrubbers are one or two vessel fixed-bed systems, containing two stages of media. There is one moving part, a blower. Only one thing can happen – foul air goes in, clean air comes out. There are no chemicals to add and there is no maintenance to do for the service life of the scrubber. When your Peacemaker does need attention, the entire scrubber is replaced or the media is replaced, depending upon the size of the scrubber and whether you choose to lease, buy or a service contract. But no matter how simple and easy, odor control solutions must be effective to be worthwhile. PHONE: 952.927.9215 FAX: 952.927.9224 EMAIL: sales@synecosystems.com WEB: www.synecosystems.com Page 2 PEACEMAKER® SCRUBBERS GET THE JOB DONE STAGE ONE – PERSNICKETY® H2S CONVERTING® MEDIA Converting technology uses a patented polymeric amine, formulated for maximum removal of H2S and volatile mercaptans. The combination of multiple amine sites and organophilic properties allows for fast, efficient removal of these problematic compounds. This chemistry reacts with H2S and mercaptans to form water-soluble and non-volatile poly sulfides that are readily biodegradable. In simple words, gaseous H2S is turned into a stable liquid polymer. All of our scrubber systems are designed to achieve a H2S reduction of 99% through the Stage 1 media bed. STAGE TWO – PERSNICKETY® POLISHING® MEDIA Activated carbon does a very efficient job of scrubbing low levels of H2S and other malodors. 99% of the H2S and the majority of volatile mercaptans, organic amines and organic sulfurs are removed in the converting bed. With that being accomplished, the polishing bed will easily remove the remaining low level malodors. This results in complete and economic odor control. PHONE: 952.927.9215 FAX: 952.927.9224 EMAIL: sales@synecosystems.com WEB: www.synecosystems.com Odor Control Made Easy! PEACEMAKER® Converting/Polishing Dry Air Scrubbers Copyright © 2016 Syneco Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved Page 3 CORROSION CONTROL IT ISN’T ALWAYS JUST ABOUT ODOR Corrosion control is a substantial secondary benefit, and in some cases it is primary. H2S accumulates in enclosed spaces. Turbulence releases it to atmosphere, but Henry’s Law is in play, too. It is not unusual to find several hundred ppm of H2S in enclosed spaces. It eventually forms sulfuric acid, a highly corrosive compound. In most cases, H2S cannot simply be exhausted into a neighborhood. But when it is continuously drawn off and scrubbed, corrosion commonly reduces by ninety percent or more, and complaints stay in check. SIZING PEACEMAKER® SCRUBBERS THERE ARE TWO ESSENTIAL QUESTIONS TO BE ANSWERED. How much airflow is required? Benefits accrue from moving only enough air to maintain a slight negative pressure. This will prevent fugitive malodors and provide the best economics. Higher-than-necessary airflow increases static pressure through the media bed and reduces residence time. A larger scrubber may be needed and cost would increase. PHONE: 952.927.9215 FAX: 952.927.9224 EMAIL: sales@synecosystems.com WEB: www.synecosystems.com Odor Control Made Easy! PEACEMAKER® Converting/Polishing Dry Air Scrubbers Copyright © 2016 Syneco Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved To calculate optimum airflow we must determine the potential for air displacement (e.g. gpm pumped into a wet well). Of course, if there is an air exchange requirement for confined space entry or a need for higher airflow for any other reasons, it can be accommodated. Page 4 LEASE, BUY OR SERVICE CONTRACT LeaseThe length of “term” for most PEACEMAKER® leases is one to three years. At the end of term, we provide a new scrubber, if you wish, and you return the old one to us, freight collect. If conditions change from one term to the next, we can change the new scrubber to match the new conditions. You will never be stuck with out-grown and useless equipment. In addition, our lease agreement is like our scrubbers — simple and straightforward. Buy If your PEACEMAKER® needs to come from a capital budget, this is obviously the way to go. It will still be a great value. Lease or buy, labor and maintenance costs will be minimal. There just is not much to do once the scrubber is up and running besides enjoying the nice clean air and the very quiet phone. Service ContractThe length of “term” for most PEACEMAKER® service contracts is three to five years. With a service contract, H2S loadings and CFM would have to be well documented and we would guarantee the life of the scrubber system for the life of the service contract based on those levels. How much H2S is in that air? This can be a difficult question to answer. It can be influenced by time of day, time of year, residence time, measuring techniques and numerous additional factors. Truth is it is hard to escape applying some judgment in making this determination. Experience helps, of course, but Peacemaker systems have built-in flexibility and scalability, which helps, too. Ultimately, the formula is simple: cfm airflow x ppm H2S = quantity of media required. This is an important process, and we need to work together. We start with a review of “PEACEMAKER® Converting/Polishing Dry Air Scrubber Sizing Information.” AVAILABLE SIZES When we have determined the quantity of media required, we simply match that need to the correct vessel size and add the right fan to provide desired airflow at the existing static pressure. PHONE: 952.927.9215 FAX: 952.927.9224 EMAIL: sales@synecosystems.com WEB: www.synecosystems.com Odor Control Made Easy! PEACEMAKER® Converting/Polishing Dry Air Scrubbers Copyright © 2016 Syneco Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved Limited Warranty: Our only obligation shall be to replace or pay for any material proved defective. Beyond the purchase price of materials supplied by us, we assume no liability for damages of any kind and the user accepts the product “as is” and without warranties, expressed or implied. The suitability of the product for an intended use shall be solely up to the user. outline dimensions: [note: motor shown is for 50Hz performance. Motor dimensions for 60Hz operation may vary] Motor type:Squirrel cage induction motor IP55 as std, IP65 available nominal supply: 220/240V or 115V 1Ph 50/60Hz 380/420VY / 220/240VD 3Ph 50Hz 440/480VY / 250/280VD 3Ph 60Hz options:Inlet & discharge guards, Inlet filters, Spigots Materials:Fancase: Cast aluminium LM6 Impellers: Galvanised sheet steel Finishes:Unpainted/Stove enamel (black) as std Mounting options:Motor feet or Pedestal noise levels:86.5dB(A) Free Air, 1M Weight:14Kgs / 31Lbs Motor Variations:ATEX, CE, CSA, UL available Please note (1) - all drawings measurements are in millimeters (mm) Please note (2)- above technical specifications are subject to change VBW-6 FAN SPECIFICATIONS [Please note - image above may not be representative of the unit supplied] PHONE: 952.927.9215 FAX: 952.927.9224 EMAIL: sales@synecosystems.com WEB: www.synecosystems.com VBW6 Fan Specifications Copyright © 2016 Syneco Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved Page 1 4. ELECTRICAL Rev. 1-3-18 This section is structured as follows: 4.01 CONTROL PANEL SCOPE OF SUPPLY 4.02 LEVEL SENSORS 4.02.1 DATA SHEETS 4.03 GENERATOR 4.03.1 SIZING REPORT 4.03.2 GENSET DRAWINGS 4.03.3 ANCHORING 4.03.4 ATS 4.03.5 CERTIFICATES Control Panel Scope of Supply HIGHGATE COMMUNITY BAKERSFIELD ,CA 6/3/19 General information - ELECTRICAL SERVICE - 480V, 3 Phase - PUMPS - (2) 14.8HP, 480V, 3PH, 19.9 FLA - PUMPS - MODEL HIDROSTAL E5K-L - PRIMARY CONTROLLER - SIEMENS LC150 configured for DUPLEX - ODOR CONTROL FAN - 480V/3PH, 1.6FLA - PANEL MOUNTING - FLOOR MOUNTED - DEVICE MOUNTING - INNER DOOR Liquid level sensing - PRIMARY LEVEL SENSING - A1000i PRESSURE TRANSDUCER WIRED FOR INTRINSICALLY SAFE - BACKUP LEVEL SENSING - THREE FLOATS NOLTA MS1 WIRED FOR INTRINSICALLY SAFE Station Control Panel Qty.Description 1 NEMA 3R STAINLESS STEEL, 60"H X 60"W X 18"D 2-door enclosure, 3 point padlocking latch. 1 12" skirted leg kit -22mm Metal bezel operator devices 1 Enclosure 200W heater and thermostat 1 Main disconnect 1 Generator circuit breaker interlocked with the main circuit breaker 1 Generator reverse service receptacle 1 Enclosure LED strip light and door activated switch 1 Circuit breaker used to supply power to heater and light circuits 1 Phase monitor - used to prevent pumps from running in a failed position - one contact to MicroLogix controller, one contact to control circuit 1 TVSS advanced surge suppression 1 Enclosure fan kit with shrouds 2 Pump motor circuit breakers, MCP style sized for 10HP pumps, with Lock out device attached. 2 Full voltage starters w/electric reset 1 Siemens LC150 Pump Control-Telemetry Unit -Set maximum height of operator touch screen to 4'-11" to center. 1 Allen-Bradly UPS #1609B100D 1 DC Power Supply sized at 125% full load. 2 HOA selector switches for manual pump control 1 HOA selector switches for odor control fan. 1 Redundant back-up operating system Redundant pump stop/high level alarm Redundant lag pump on control Redundant lag/lag pump on control 1 1.5kVA control power transformer, 1 phase, 480VAC/120VAC Circuit breaker used on primary and secondary side of control power transformer. 4 Separate circuit breakers mounted on the operator interface to control the following functions - Convenience outlet 5A - Disconnect panel Control Panel 5A - Area lighting 5A - Odor Control - 5A 1 Alarm beacon, red flashing light 1 GFCI inner panel mounted receptacle w/5 amp circuit breaker 1 "Redundant High Level" pilot light, blue LED, push to test, located on dead front. 1 "High-High Level" pilot light, blue LED, push to test, located on dead front. 1 Black "Alarm Beacon" reset push-button 2 "Run" pilot light, green LED, push to test, located on dead front 2 "Pump Reset" pilot light, red LED, push to reset, located on dead front 1 Autodialer Dialog Scout 1 Danger 480 volts label Emedco or equivalent. 1 Warning arc flash and shock hazard label Emedco #QS3743 or equivalent. 1 Danger this equipment has a back-up power supply label Emedco #QS3569 or equivalent. *One pump running maximum on standby power. -Terminal blocks used for interconnecting field devices Disconnect Panel Qty.Description 1 NEMA 4X stainless steel cabinet, 30"H x 30"W x 8"D 1 Enclosure heater (100W) forced air and thermostat 1 Non-fused disconnect switch used to supply heater 2 PTC Resistor Relay for pump thermal protection Siemens #3RN2012-1BW30 2 Intrinsically safe barriers for floats 2 Intrinsically safe barriers for motor leak detector 2 Leak probe monitoring relays Littlefuse #1SS-102ACI-MC 1 Intrinsically safe barrier for pressure transducer. Stahl 9002/12-280-110-01 1 Intrinsically safe barrier for wet well intrusion switch. 1 Desiccant filter for pressure transducer vent tube XX Terminal blocks used for interconnecting disconnect cabinet to control cabinet 6 Cable connectors Appleton #20LPX0505 .390-.630 Dia. 4.02 LEVEL SENSORS Rev. 1-3-18 This section is structured as follows: 4.02.1 DATA SHEETS PRESSURE TRANSDUCER FLOATS 4.02.1 DATA SHEETS DATA SHEETS FOLLOW THIS PAGE A1000i Loop Powered/4-20MA Submersible Level Transmitter Water Technologies The A1000i Submersible Level Transducer is the industry’s most highly engineered and advanced submersible level transmitter for the measurement of liquids containing high amounts of solids such as raw sewage/wastewater.The unit works equally well in potable water applications.The robustness and high reliability of the A1000i is based on its maintenance free design and simplicity of operation allowing it to operate in harsh environments.The unit is unaffected by turbulence,foaming,false echoing,solids build up, and atmospheric changes that often cause other level transmitter technologies to fail.A selection of pressure ranges is available to fit most wet well level/pressure measurement applications from high accuracy weir level/flow rate measurement to the deepest of wet wells and storage tanks.Several mounting options are available including vessel,pipe, fixed and suspension kits. Theory of Operation The A1000i utilizes pressure,the most reliable means to measure liquid level.The sensor assembly is mounted at a low point (fixed or suspended)within the liquid media and uses a sensing diaphragm to measure the hydrostatic head-pressure.The pressure produced is proportional to the height of the liquid above the sensing diaphragm.The protruding (no cavity)flexible Teflon®coated Buna-N diaphragm uses a liquid fill to transfer the external diaphragm pressure to a stable and accurate gauge pressure type piezoresistive sensor.The transducer uses the loop power excitation source (9-30VDC)and converts the pressure to a proportional (4-20mA)electrical signal. The transducer is barometrically compensated via a rigid breather tube connected to a panel mounted sealed breather system. Applications Wastewater Sewage lift station wet wells Headworks Combined Sewer Overflow (CSO) Sequencing Batch Reactors (SBR) Lagoons/Ponds,Lakes &Rivers Equalization Basins Weir Flow Measurement Contact Tanks Sumps Water Raw Water Intake Level Filter Water Levels Clearwells Backflush Decant Tanks Above or Below Ground Storage Tanks Standpipes Features Economically priced Easy trouble free installation Rugged,debris-free non-fouling Teflon® coated 316 stainless steel housing Large protruding (no cavity to clean) 2 5/8”(6.7 cm)Teflon®Coated–Buna-N sensing diaphragm Maintenance free “Rigid Sealed Breather System”reliably equalizes atmospheric pressure Versatile mounting arrangements Intrinsically safe,Class I,Div.1 A ,B, C &D rated with approved barrier Pre-calibrated Pressure ranges from 1.5 PSI (0.1 Bar)to 30 PSI (2.1 Bar) 0-3.5ft (0-1.1 m)to 0-69.3ft (0-21.1m) Transducer electronic components are electronically and physically isolated from sensed media Teflon isa registered trademark of E.I.du Pont de Nemoursand Company. The information providedin thisliterature contains merely general descriptions or characteristics ofperformance whichin actual case of usedo notalways apply as described or which maychangeasa result of furtherdevelopment of the products.An obligationto provide therespective characteristics shallonlyexist ifexpressly agreedin theterms of thecontract. A1000i Loop Powered/4-20MA Submersible Level Transmitter www.siemens.com/water Siemens Water Technologies 1239 Willow Lake Boulevard Vadnais Heights,MN 55110 800.224.9474 phone 651.766.2700 phone 651.766.2701 fax ©2010 SiemensWaterTechnologiesCorp. CS-A1Kidr-DS-0710 Subject to change without prior notice. Specifications Housing 316 Cast Stainless Steel,Teflon®Coated Cable Heavy-duty Polyurethane with Vent Tube,Shielded 16 AWG Conductors Atmosphere Ventilation No Maintenance Sealed Breather System Equalizes Atmospheric Pressure Mounting Suspension Cable Mount or 1“(2.54 cm)Pipe Mount Exposed Materials 316 Cast Stainless Steel,Teflon®Coated,PVC,Synthetic Rubber and Urethane Sensing head Two Layer Diaphragm With Teflon®and Buna-N Material Power Required 9 –30 VDC (750 ohm load @ 24VDC) Signal Output 4 –20mA Agency Approval FM and CSA Intrinsically Safe Class I,Div.1,Groups A,B,C,D with Approved Barrier Accuracy 0.25 %Full Scale with Long Term Stability of 0.2 %Full Scale per Year Pressure Ranges 1.5 PSI to 30 PSI (0.1 Bar to 2.1 Bar)(Consult factory for ranges over 30 PSI (2.1 Bar)) Max Over Pressure Range 1.5 PSI (0.1 Bar)8X Full Scale 5.0 PSI (0.3 Bar)4X Full Scale 15 PSI &30 PSI (1.0 Bar &2.1 Bar)2X Full Scale Temperature Range -40 to +185°F (-40 to 85°C)(Liquid must remain fluid) Complete Control Capabilities Siemens Water Technologies offers a single,high- quality source for everything from simple level sensors to telemetry systems involving complex system control engineering and software.Based in Vadnais Heights,Minnesota,Control Systems is part of the Siemens Water Technologies leading global provider of industrial,municipal and residential water and wastewater treatment systems,products and services.As a major manufacturer/integrator with an extensive selection of specialized product lines in the areas of SCADA and telemetry,power equipment integration,automation and measurement,Control Systems is uniquely positioned to provide cost effective,comprehensive solutions for water,wastewater and process control and telemetry applications. Description Part Number A1000i Sensors 5 PSI (0.3 Bar)4-20mA Output (0-11.5 ft (0-3.5 m) of water)W2T294099 15 PSI (1.0 Bar)4-20mA Output (0-34.7 ft (0-10.6 m)of water)W2T294101 30 PSI (2.1 Bar)4-20mA Output (0-69.3 ft (0-21.1m) of water)Consult Factory For Ranges Over 30 PSI W2T295696 Housing/Cable Assembly A1000 Housing/Cable Sub-Assembly 20ft (6.1 m)W2T294060 A1000 Housing/Cable Sub-Assembly 30ft (9.1 m)W2T296821 A1000 Housing/Cable Sub-Assembly 40ft (12.2 m)W2T294061 A1000 Housing/Cable Sub-Assembly 60ft (18.3 m)W2T294062 A1000 Housing/Cable Sub-Assembly 80ft (24.4 m)W2T294063 A1000 Housing/Cable Sub-Assembly 100ft (30.5 m)W2T294064 Mounting Hardware and Accessories B100 9G CLS Stainless Steel Pipe Mounting Clamps W3T4748 Cable Suspension Mounting Pipe (without SS cable)W2T292717 Stainless Steel Cable;Each Additional 10 ft (3.1 m)(XX)W3T490X Breather Assembly Kit (Required for all A1000i sensors)W3T4801 Terminal Connection (Junction)Box with Built-in Breather Assembly W3T4804 Breather Assembly Kit (required with A1000i)Dual breather bags (2)for over 85'(25.9 m)W3T4802 1”NPT(2.54 cm) 8.00”(20.3 cm) 4.50”(11.4cm) 4.03 GENERATOR This section is structured as follows: 4.03.1 SIZING REPORT 4.03.2 GENSET DRAWINGS 4.03.3 ANCHORING 4.03.4 ATS 4.03.5 CERTIFICATES Recommended Generator Report 19-Sep-2018 Page 1 Recommended Generator Report - C45 N6 Project - Highgate Lift Station Comments - Two 10HP Pumps Project Requirements Frequency, Hz :60.0 Generators Running in Parallel :1 Duty :Standby Site Altitude, ft(m) :361(152) Voltage :277/480, Series Wye Site Temperature, °C :25 Phase :3 Max. Altr Temp Rise, °C :125 Fuel :NaturalGas Project Voltage Distortion Limit, % : Emissions :EPA, stationary emergency application Calculated Individual Generator Set Load Running and Peak Requirements Running kW :21.3 Max. Step kW :39.5 In Step 1 Cumulative Step kW :48.2 Running kVA :23.9 Max. Step kVA :71.0 In Step 1 Cumulative Step kVA :81.0 Running PF :0.89 Peak kW :None Cumulative Peak kW :None Running NLL kVA :0.0 Peak kVA :None Cumulative Peak kVA :None Alternator kW :21.34 Pct Rated Capacity :46.7 Generator Set Configuration Alternator :UC2D Engine :QSJ5.9G-G1 BCode :B943 Fuel :NaturalGas Excitation :PMG Displacement, cu in. (Litre) :359.0(5.9) Voltage Range :220/440-240/480 Cylinders :6 Number of Leads :6 Altitude Knee, ft(m) :2200(671) Reconnectable :Yes Altitude Slope, % per 1000ft(304.8m) :4 Full Single Phase Output :No Temperature Knee, °F(°C) :104(40) Increased Motor Starting :No Temperature Slope, % per 18°F(10.0°C) :2 Extended Stack :No Emissions :EPA NSPS Part 60 Cooling Package : Set Performance Load Requirements Running At :46.7% Rated Capacity Max. Step Voltage Dip, % :15 Max. Allowed Step Voltage Dip :20 In Step 1 Max. Step Frequency Dip, % :6 Max. Allowed Step Frequency Dip :7 In Step 1 Peak Voltage Dip, % :Peak Voltage Dip Limit % :20.0 Peak Frequency Dip, % :Peak Frequency Dip Limit % :7 Site Rated Standby kW/kVA :45 / 56 Running kW :21.3 Running kVA :23.9 Site Rated Max. SkW :52 Effective Step kW :39.0 Max. SkVA :191 Effective Step kVA :81.0 Temp Rise at Full Load, °C :120 Percent Non-Linear Load :0.0 Voltage Distortion :Voltage Distortion Limit : Site Rated Max Step kW Limit :Max Step kW : *Note: Higher temperature rise at full rated load. *Note: All generator set power derates are based on open generator sets. Note: GenSize output for lean burn natural gas generator sets is based on tests using natural gas with LHV of 33.44 mJ/Nm3 (905 BTU/ft3). and coolant return temperatures within the stated data sheet limits. For operation on gas with lower heating values or with MI lower than stated Data Sheet limit or coolant return temperatures greater than Data Sheet limits, consult application engineering. Loads and Steps Detail Report 19-Sep-2018 Page 1 Loads Summary Report Project - Highgate Lift Station Comments - Two 10HP Pumps Loads Summary List *Note: Detailed Loads and Step Report available below *Note: Detailed Loads and Step Report available below Project Requirements Frequency, Hz :60.0 Generators Running in Parallel :1 Duty :Standby Site Altitude, ft(m) :361(152) Voltage :277/480, Series Wye Site Temperature, °C :25 Phase :3 Max. Altr Temp Rise, °C :125 Fuel :NaturalGas Project Voltage Distortion Limit, % : Emissions :EPA, stationary emergency application Step No.Load Name Quantity Running kW kVA Starting kW kVA Peak kW kVA Dip Limits, % Vdip Fdip VTHD% Limit Step01 Light Load 1 1 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 None None 20.0 7.0 0.0 Step01 Motor Load 1 1 8.67 9.97 35.51 67.0 None None 20.0 7.0 0.0 Step Summary 13.0 14.0 40.0 71.0 None None 20.0 7.0 0.0 Step02 Motor Load 2 1 8.67 9.97 35.51 67.0 None None 20.0 7.0 0.0 Step Summary 9.0 10.0 36.0 67.0 None None 20.0 7.0 0.0 Project Summary Running kW kVA Max Starting kW kVA Cumulative Step kW kVA Cumulative Peak kW kVA Project VTHD% Limit 21.3 23.9 39.5 71.0 48.2 81.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Loads and Steps Detail Report 19-Sep-2018 Page 2 Loads and Steps Detail Report Project - Highgate Lift Station Comments - Two 10HP Pumps Project Requirements Frequency, Hz :60.0 Generators Running in Parallel :1 Duty :Standby Site Altitude, ft(m) :361(152) Voltage :277/480, Series Wye Site Temperature, °C :25 Phase :3 Max. Altr Temp Rise, °C :125 Fuel :NaturalGas Project Voltage Distortion Limit, % : Emissions :EPA, stationary emergency application Calculated Individual Generator Set Load Running and Peak Requirements Running kW :21.3 Max. Step kW :39.5 In Step 1 Cumulative Step kW :48.2 Running kVA :23.9 Max. Step kVA :71.0 In Step 1 Cumulative Step kVA :81.0 Running PF :0.89 Peak kW :None Cumulative Peak kW :None Running NLL kVA :None Peak kVA :None Cumulative Peak kVA :None Alternator kW :21.34 Step1 Calculated Individual Generator Set Step Load Requirements Running kW :13.0 Starting kW :40.0 Cumulative Step kW :40.0 Running kVA :14.0 Starting kVA :71.0 Cumulative Step kVA :71.0 Running Amps :17.0 Starting Non-linear kVA :0.0 Running Non-linear kVA :0.0 Alternator kW :12.67 Voltage Distortion Limit for step :0 Light Load 1 Single Phase Quantity :1 In this Step Category : Light - Incandescent Running kW :4.0 Starting kW :4.0 Peak kW :None Running kVA :4.0 Starting kVA :4.0 Peak kVA :None Running PF :1.0 Starting PF :1.0 Cyclic :No Running Amps :8.33 Max. % Voltage Dip :20.0 Max. % Frequency Dip :7.0 Alternator kW :4.0 Voltage :480 Motor Load 1 Three Phase Quantity :1 In this Step Category : Motor Running kW :8.67 Starting kW :35.51 Peak kW :None Running kVA :9.97 Starting kVA :67.0 Peak kVA :None Running PF :0.87 Starting PF :0.53 Cyclic :No Loads and Steps Detail Report 19-Sep-2018 Page 3 Running Amps :12.01 Max. % Voltage Dip :20.0 Max. % Frequency Dip :7.0 Alternator kW :8.67 Voltage :480 Shaft Hp :10.0 Method :Across the line Shaft kW :7.46 Low Inertia :No Efficiency (%) :0.86 LRkVA Factor :6.7 Design :Standard NEMA Design B,C or D LRkVA Code :H Load Factor :100.0 Step2 Calculated Individual Generator Set Step Load Requirements Running kW :9.0 Starting kW :36.0 Cumulative Step kW :48.0 Running kVA :10.0 Starting kVA :67.0 Cumulative Step kVA :81.0 Running Amps :12.0 Starting Non-linear kVA :0.0 Running Non-linear kVA :0.0 Alternator kW :8.67 Voltage Distortion Limit for step :0 Motor Load 2 Three Phase Quantity :1 In this Step Category : Motor Running kW :8.67 Starting kW :35.51 Peak kW :None Running kVA :9.97 Starting kVA :67.0 Peak kVA :None Running PF :0.87 Starting PF :0.53 Cyclic :No Running Amps :12.01 Max. % Voltage Dip :20.0 Max. % Frequency Dip :7.0 Alternator kW :8.67 Voltage :480 Shaft Hp :10.0 Method :Across the line Shaft kW :7.46 Low Inertia :No Efficiency (%) :0.86 LRkVA Factor :6.7 Design :Standard NEMA Design B,C or D LRkVA Code :H Load Factor :100.0 Steps and Dips Detail Report 19-Sep-2018 Page 1 Steps and Dips Details Report Project - Highgate Lift Station Project Requirements Frequency, Hz :60.0 Generators Running in Parallel :1 Duty :Standby Site Altitude, ft(m) :361(152) Voltage :277/480, Series Wye Site Temperature, °C :25 Phase :3 Max. Altr Temp Rise, °C :125 Fuel :NaturalGas Project Voltage Distortion Limit, % : Emissions :EPA, stationary emergency application Calculated Individual Generator Set Load Running and Peak Requirements Running kW :21.3 Max. Step kW :39.5 In Step 1 Cumulative Step kW :48.2 Running kVA :23.9 Max. Step kVA :71.0 In Step 1 Cumulative Step kVA :81.0 Running PF :0.89 Peak kW :None Cumulative Peak kW :None Running NLL kVA :0.0 Peak kVA :None Cumulative Peak kVA :None Alternator kW :21.34 Generator Set Configuration Model :C45 N6 Alternator :UC2D Engine Model :QSJ5.9G-G1 Excitation :PMG Fuel :NaturalGas Step Level Dips Summary Step # Voltage Dip Limit (%) Expected Step Voltage Dip (%) Voltage Recovery Time (s) ** Frequency Dip Limit (%) Expected Frequency Dip (%) Frequency recovery Time (s) ** 1 20 15 2.9 7 6 1.5 2 20 15 2.4 7 5 1.4 Note: Please refer to the model Spec. sheet for bandwidths used to report recovery times. For products manufactured in the United Kingdom it may be assumed that recovery times are based on ISO8528-5 G2 class bandwidths. Voltage and frequency recovery times are estimates. Typically, allow five to ten seconds between application of load steps when designing your system. **Please note that in some cases the voltage and frequency recovery time estimates are not shown in list. This is a result of "dummy" data points temporarily being used to fill data gaps in the GenSize database. Please disregard these blank results. Steps and Dips Detail Report 19-Sep-2018 Page 2 VDip Actual VDip Limit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Value Step 1 Step 2Ste p # 15.0 15.0 20.0 20.0 FDip Actual FDip Limit 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 Value Step 1 Step 2Ste p # 6.0 5.0 7.0 7.0 Project: City of Bakersfield Highgate Community Lift Station Cummins 4601 East Brundage Ln. Bakersfield, California, 93307 Romtec Utilities Inc 18240 N Bank Rd Roseburg, Oregon, 97470 Main: 541-496-3541 Item Notes ID Description Qty 1 a Spark Ignited Genset: 60Hz-45kW 1 Install-US-Stat U.S. EPA, Stationary Emergency Application C45 N6 45kW, 60HZ, Standby, Natural Gas/Propane Genset A331-2 Duty Rating-Standby Power L090-2 Listing-UL 2200 L193-2 NFPA 110 Type 10 Level 1 Capable L225-2 OSHPD Seismic Certification L228-2 Certification-Seismic, IBC2000, IBC2003, IBC2006, IBC2009, IBC2012 L155-2 Emissions Certification-Spark Ignited, EPA, Emergency, Stationary, 40CFR60 C284-2 Single Gas Fuel - NG or LP Vapor F217-2 Enclosure-Aluminum,Sound Att,Level 2, w/Exh System R002-2 Voltage-277/480,3 Phase,Wye,4 Wire B943-2 Alternator-60Hz,12L,480/277V,120C,40C amb H700-2 Generator Set Control-PowerCommand 1.1 B184-2 Exciter/Regulator-Pmg, 3 Phase Sensor A366-2 Engine Governor-Electronic, Isochronous Only H536-2 Display Language-English H012-2 Gauge-Oil Pressure K796-2 Stop Switch-Emergency H720-2 AmpSentryTM Protective Relay H609-2 Control Mounting-Left Facing KV03-2 Load Connection-Single KV38-2 CB,Loc A,80A,3P,600VAC,80%,UL P176-2 Enclosure Color-Green,Aluminum Enclosure F252-2 Enclosure - Wind Load 180MPH, ASCE7-10 F179-2 Skidbase-Housing Ready A422-2 Engine Starter - 12 VDC Motor A333-2 Battery Charging Alternator-Normal Output BB89-2 Battery Charger - 6 Amp, Regulated E125-2 Engine Cooling-High Ambient Air Temperature E089-2 Extension-Engine Coolant Drain H669-2 Engine Coolant-50% Antifreeze, 50% Water Mixture E154-2 Coolant Heater, Extreme Cold Ambient D041-2 Engine Air Cleaner-Normal Duty H487-2 Engine Oil Heater-120 Vac, Single Phase H706-2 Engine Oil L186-2 ST 5YR 2500HR Parts + Labor L050-2 Literature-English A322-2 Packing-Skid, Poly Bag L260-2 Ship Loose-Green SL2 Baffle Page 1 of 8 H268-2 Extension-Oil Drain F253-2 Rack, Larger Battery CP01-2 Common Parts Listing SPEC-A Product Revision - A A052M018 Sound Level2 Baffle, Shipped Loose A045J201 Annunciator-RS485, Panel Mount w/ Enclosure ACC-BAT-34 BATTERY GROUP 34: C34-HC 2 a Transfer Switch-Power Command: 150A 1 OTPC150 Transfer Switch-Onan,PwrCmd,150 Amp A028-7 Poles-3 A035-7 Application-Utility To Genset A046-7 Listing-UL 1008/CSA Certification A080-7 Certificate-IBC Seismic A044-7 Frequency-60 Hertz A042-7 System-3 Phase,3 Wire Or 4 Wire R026-7 Voltage-480 Vac B002-7 Cabinet-Type 3R C023-7 Control-Transfer Switch,Level 1 M017-7 Switch,Key,Front Panel Security M018-7 Display-Digital M031-7 Interface-Communications Network,FTT-10 G013-7 Transfer Switch Warranty - Yr 0-5: Comprehensive, Yr 6-10: Main Contacts Only CP01-7 Common Parts Listing SPEC-A Product Revision - A 3 e Start & Test 1 45 C45 N6 (Restricted):Install Batteries (grp 31 down), Start & Test, 2 Hour Load Bank Test, 1 Hour Building Load Test 1 Item Notes ID Description Qty Cummins Terms & Conditions NOTES Please use this as a reference for the "note" column in the quote. a. Factory Assembled. b. Assemble at Cummins facility. c. Shipped loose items. Assemble/Install by Cummins at Job Site. d. Shipped loose items. Assemble/Install by customer at Job Site. e. Start and Test performed by Cummins. f. Start and Test performed by customer. OPTIONS 1) We have not included remote web-based monitoring and controls. This proposal includes a remote annunciator panel. Page 2 of 8 This quote was based on limited specification and this package may or may not fit the owner¿s application. INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC) CERTIFICATION The products in this quotation identified as meeting the requirements of the 2009 IBC have been certified by their respective manufactures via a combination of analytical testing and shaker table testing. Not all products have been shaker table tested. OFFICE OF STATEWIDE HEALTH PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT (OSHPD) OSHPD seismic requirements are continuing to evolve. Please contact Cummins for the most current requirements for meeting OSHPD applications. SELECTIVE COORDINATION FOR NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE (NEC) ARTICLE 700 AND 701 LOADS Cummins generators are equipped with the manufacturer¿s recommended circuit breaker. Information regarding this device can be supplied upon request. This quotation is not valid if any changes to this circuit breaker(s) is required to coordinate with other devices in the electrical distribution system. If changes are required, the customer must provide a copy of the coordination study listing the manufacturers part number of the disconnect device to be supplied with the generator and a revised quotation will be issued CUMMINS STANDARD EXCLUSIONS Exhaust System All off-engine piping, hangers, flanges, gaskets, bolts, insulation, other materials and labor to install. Fuel System All fuel piping and materials not limited to; supply, return, venting, valves, coolers, filters, pumps, fittings, primary fuel regulator, storage tank & senders, external to genset package. All fuel for testing and initial fill. Fuel tank vent extensions and flame arrestors unless specifically listed in the Bill of Materials. Cooling System Intake louvers, exhaust louvers, air dampers, sheet metal ducting, flex adapters, sound attenuators/baffles. All off engine piping, flexible connections, labor and coolant for remote cooling systems. Electrical All off-engine wiring, field terminations of wiring, and lugs other than those detailed in our submittal. Mounting Mounting bolts and anchors. Vibration isolators (if included) may be shipped loose for installation at the jobsite by others. Seismic engineering calculations. Electrical Testing Not limited to InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA), infrared scanning, harmonic content or other independent agency testing of switchgear, switchboards, protective relays, circuit breaker, electrical coordination studies, arc flash studies and reactive load site testing. Environmental Testing Page 3 of 8 Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), local air quality district or other Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), including acoustical. Programming All protective relay settings, breaker settings, PLC programming or other user configurable device programming. Documentation Electronic submittals and operation and maintenance manuals will be provided. Printed copies are available upon request, additional charges may apply. Miscellaneous Site specific labeling. Exhaust backpressure, airflow restriction or vibration analysis Design Cummins is not responsible for system design or engineering and does not guarantee system performance standards. Cummins will supply documentation and reasonable assistance to others responsible for system engineering, design and performance. Taxes and Permit Any applicable sales tax, permits, fees, licenses. Bonds Any bid bond, payment or performance bond or other type of bond. All items listed above are excluded and will only be supplied by Cummins if agreed upon, in writing, by a sales representative for Cummins. TRAINING, START UP SERVICES, INSTALLATION. Startup services, load bank testing and owner training are not provided, unless otherwise stated. Site startup will be subject to the open credit account being current and will be performed during regular Cummins business hours, Monday to Friday. Additional charges may be added for work requested to be done outside standard business hours, on weekends or holidays. One visit is allowed unless specified otherwise in the Quote. A minimum of two-week prior notice is required to schedule site startups and will be subject to prior commitments and equipment and travel availability. A signed site check sheet confirming readiness will be required, and Cummins personnel may perform an installation audit prior to the startup being completed. Any issues identified by the installation audit shall be corrected at the Customer's expense prior to the start-up being accomplished. Portable load banks for site test (if offered in the Quote) are equipped with 100 feet of cable. Additional lengths may be arranged at an extra cost. Startup services assume unencumbered access to the equipment. Restricted access may require additional pricing. SHIPPING, DELIVERY Equipment is quoted FOB origin, freight prepaid to first US destination or port, unless otherwise stated. A reasonable storage fee, as determined by Cummins, may be assessed if delivery of the Equipment is delayed, deferred, or refused by Customer. Offloading, handling and placement of Equipment and crane services are the responsibility of Customer and not included in proposal, unless otherwise stated. All shipments are made within normal business hours, Monday through Friday. Any delivery, shipping, installation or performance dates indicated in this Agreement are estimated and not guaranteed. Further, delivery time is subject to confirmation at time of order and will be in effect after engineering drawings have been approved for production. Cummins shall use best efforts to meet estimated dates, but shall not be liable for any delay in delivery, shipping, installation or performance, however occasioned. Cummins may deliver in installments. Unless otherwise agreed to, packaging method, shipping documents and manner, route and carrier and delivery shall be as Cummins deems appropriate. DELAY IN DELIVERY, STORAGE CHARGES If Buyer cannot accept delivery of the Equipment as scheduled or otherwise requests a delayed delivery, Buyer shall submit a revised delivery schedule to Cummins. Buyer agrees to sign a Storage Agreement for the revised delivery and agrees to pay a monthly storage fee of no less Page 4 of 8 than 1.5% of the invoiced purchase price for every month or portion thereof during which the equipment is stored. Equipment may be subject to additional handling and delivery charges. Cummins will prepare a separate quote for such charges. Cummins agrees to hold the Equipment for a maximum of sixty (60) days following the original scheduled delivery. Payment of the invoice shall be due according to PAYMENT TERMS and based upon invoice date, not delivery date. Buyer is responsible for procuring insurance for the stored Equipment and will be required to provide a Certificate of Insurance naming `Cummins Inc¿ as an additional insured. Buyer shall be responsible for all added freight or special equipment charges resulting from any delay in delivery, including, but not limited to, any applicable delivery cancellation fees and rescheduling fees. PAYMENT TERMS, CREDIT, RETAINAGE If Customer has approved credit, as determined by Cummins, payment terms are net thirty (30) days from the date of invoice unless otherwise agreed to in writing or specified in the Quote. If payment is not received when due, in addition to any rights Cummins has under the law and charges that Cummins may levy against Customer under statute (including attorney fees and costs of collection), Cummins may charge Customer eighteen percent (18%) interest annually, or the maximum amount allowed by law, on late payments. Payment shall be due in advance if Customer does not have approved credit. Retainage is not acceptable nor binding, unless accepted and confirmed in writing by Cummins prior to shipment. TAXES, EXEMPTIONS Unless otherwise stated, the Quote excludes all applicable local, state and federal sales and/or use taxes, permits and licensing. Customer must provide a valid resale or exemption certificate prior to shipment of Equipment or applicable taxes will be added to the invoice. TITLE, RISK OF LOSS Title and risk of loss for the Equipment shall pass to Customer with delivery made in accordance with the delivery terms set forth above. INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Customer shall inspect the Equipment upon delivery, before offloading, for damage, defects and shortage. Any and all claims which could have been discovered by such inspection shall be deemed absolutely and unconditionally waived unless noted by Customer on the bill of lading. Where Equipment is alleged to be non-conforming or defective, written notice of defect must be given to Cummins within fourteen (14) days from date of delivery after which time Equipment shall be deemed accepted. Cummins shall have a commercially reasonable period of time in which to correct such non-conformity or defect. If non-conformity or defect is not eliminated to Customer¿s satisfaction, Customer may reject the Equipment (but shall protect the Equipment until returned to Cummins) or allow Cummins another opportunity to undertake corrective action. In the event startup of the Equipment is included in the services, acceptance shall be deemed to have occurred upon successful startup. LIEN, SECURITY AGREEMENT To secure payment, Customer grants Cummins a Purchase Money Security Interest (PMSI) in the Equipment. If any portion of the balance is due to be paid following delivery, Customer agrees to execute and deliver such security agreement, financing statements, deed of trust and such other documents as Cummins may request from time to time in order to permit Cummins to obtain and maintain a perfected security interest in the Equipment; or in the alternative, Customer grants Cummins a power of attorney to execute and file all financing statements and other documents needed to perfect this security interest. Cummins may record this Agreement, bearing Customer's signature, or copy of this Agreement in lieu of a UCC-1; provided that it shall not constitute an admission by Cummins of the applicability or non-applicability of the UCC nor shall the failure to file this form or a UCC-1 in any way affect, alter or invalidate any term, provision, obligation or liability under this Agreement. The security interest shall be superseded if Customer and Cummins enter into a separate security agreement for the Equipment. Prior to full payment of the balance due, Equipment will be kept at the Customer¿s location noted in this Agreement, will not be moved without prior notice to Cummins, and is subject to inspection by Cummins at all reasonable times. CANCELLATION; CHARGES If Customer cancels all or a portion of this Agreement after its release to Cummins, Customer may incur a cancellation charge, in addition to the actual, non-recoverable costs incurred by Cummins and in no case less than 25% of the order amount. Written cancellation notice is required WARRANTY New equipment purchased hereunder is accompanied by an express written manufacturer¿s warranty and is the only warranty offered on the Equipment. A copy of the express manufacturer¿s warranty is available. Cummins¿ obligations under this warranty are limited to repair or replacement, at Cummins' option, of any defective component. Installing the engine for any other purpose than for its intended application on the data plate may be a violation of federal law subject to civil penalty. WARRANTY PROCEDURE Prior to the expiration of the applicable warranty, Customer must give notice of a warrantable failure to Cummins and deliver the defective Equipment to a Cummins location or other location authorized and designated by Cummins to make the repairs during regular business hours. In no event shall Cummins be liable for failures resulting from improper repair by others; the use of parts not approved by Cummins; Customer or operator abuse or neglect, such as operation without adequate coolant, fuel or lubricants, over fueling, lack of maintenance of lubricants, fuels, cooling or intake systems; improper storage, starting, warm-up, running or show down practices. Cummins shall not be liable for towing charges, maintenance items such as oil filters, belts, hoses, etc., communication expenses, meals, lodging, and incidental expenses incurred by Customer or employees of Customer, "downtime" expenses, overtime expenses, cargo damages and all business costs and losses of revenue resulting from a warrantable failure. Page 5 of 8 LIMITATIONS ON WARRANTIES Cummins expressly disclaims all warranties, either express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability and warranty for fitness of a particular purpose, to the extent permitted by law. The warranties set forth herein are the sole warranties made by Cummins. Some states do not allow limitation on warranties, so these limitations may not apply to you. The limited warranty does not cover Equipment failures resulting from: (a) inappropriate use relative to designated power rating; (b) inappropriate use relative to application guidelines; (c) inappropriate use of an EPA-SE application generator set relative to EPA¿s standards; (d) normal wear and tear; (e) improper and/or unauthorized installation; (f) negligence, accidents or misuse; (g) lack of maintenance or unauthorized repair; (h) noncompliance with any Cummins published guideline or policy; (i) use of improper or contaminated fuels, coolants or lubricants; (j) improper storage before and after commissioning; (k) owner¿s delay in making Equipment available after notification of potential Equipment problem; (l) replacement parts and accessories not authorized by Cummins; (m) use of battle short mode; (n) owner or operator abuse or neglect such as: operation without adequate coolant or lubricants; overfueling; overspeeding; lack of maintenance to lubricating, cooling or air intake systems; late servicing and maintenance; improper storage; starting, warm-up, run-in or shutdown practices, or for progressive damage resulting from a defective shutdown or warning device; or (o) damage to parts, fixtures, housings, attachments and accessory items that are not part of the generating set. INDEMNITY Customer shall indemnify and hold harmless Cummins, its affiliates, subsidiaries, officers, directors, agents and employees for losses, costs, liabilities, damages and expenses, including reasonable attorney and expert fees relating to the Equipment and caused by Customer. Customer¿s indemnity obligations shall survive the expiration or termination of this Agreement. Customer shall present any claims covered by this indemnification to its insurance carrier unless Cummins directs that the defense will be coordinated by Cummins' legal counsel. LIMITATIONS ON REMEDIES THE MAXIMUM LIABILITY, IF ANY, OF CUMMINS FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, AGREEMENT DAMAGES AND DAMAGES FOR PROPERTY, WHETHER ARISING FROM CUMMINS¿ BREACH OF AGREEMENT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, OR OTHER TORT, IS LIMITED TO AN AMOUNT NOT TO EXCEED THE PRICE OF THE EQUIPMENT PAID BY CUSTOMER UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WHICH SHALL BE THE SOLE REMEDY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL CUMMINS BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DOWNTIME, PROPERTY DAMAGE, LOSS OF PROFIT OR REVENUE, LOSS OF DATA, DAMAGE TO GOODWILL) HOWSOEVER CAUSED ARISING FROM THIS AGREEMENT OR THE BREACH OF THIS AGREEMENT, WHETHER IN INDEMNITY, TORT, CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE. NOTHING IN THIS AGREEMENT EXCLUDES OR LIMITS LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY CAUSED BY CUMMINS¿ GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT. BY ACCEPTANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT, CUSTOMER ACKNOWLEDGES CUSTOMER¿S SOLE REMEDY AGAINST CUMMINS FOR ANY LOSS SHALL BE THE REMEDY PROVIDED UNDER THIS ENTIRE AGREEMENT. FORCE MAJEURE Cummins is not responsible for the occurrence of any unforeseen event, circumstance, or condition beyond its reasonable control including, but not limited to, acts of God, actions by any government authority, civil strife, fires, floods, windstorms, explosions, riots, natural disasters, embargos, wars, strikes or other labor disturbances, civil commotion, terrorism, sabotage, late delivery by Cummins' suppliers, fuel or other energy shortages, or an inability to obtain necessary labor, materials, supplies, equipment or manufacturing facilities. If any such cause results in delayed performance, the date of performance shall be extended for a period equal to time lost and shall be Customer's exclusive remedy. DEFAULT, REMEDIES Customer shall be in breach and default if: (a) any of the payments or amounts due under this Agreement are not paid; (b) Customer fails to comply, perform, or makes any misrepresentation relating to, any of the Customer's obligations or covenants under this Agreement; or (c) prior to full payment of the balance due, Customer ceases to do business, becomes insolvent, makes an assignment for the benefit of its creditors, appoints a receiver, commences an action for dissolution or liquidation, or becomes subject to bankruptcy proceedings, or the Equipment is attached, levied upon, seized under legal process, is subjected to a lien or encumbrance, or transferred by operation of law or otherwise, to anyone other than Cummins. Upon the occurrence of any event of Customer's default, Cummins, at its sole option and without notice, shall have the right to exercise concurrently or separately any one or all of the following remedies, which shall be cumulative and not alternative: (a) to declare all sums due, and to become due, under this Agreement immediately due and payable; (b) to commence legal proceedings, including collection actions and specific performance proceedings, to enforce performance by the Customer of any and all provisions of this Agreement, and to be awarded damages or injunctive relief for the Customer's breach; (c) to require the Customer to deliver the Equipment to Cummins' branch specified on the face of this Agreement; (d) to exercise one or more of the rights and remedies available to a secured party under the Uniform Commercial Code, whether or not this Agreement is subject thereto; and (e) to enter, without notice or liability or legal process, onto any premises where the Equipment may be located, using force permitted by law, and there to disconnect, remove and repossess the Equipment, the Customer having waived further right to possession after default. A waiver of any event of default by Cummins shall not be a waiver as to any other or subsequent default. CUSTOMER REPRESENTATIONS, RELIANCE Customer is responsible for obtaining, at its cost, permits, import licenses and other consents in relation to the Equipment, and if requested by Cummins, Customer shall make these permits, licenses and consents available to Cummins prior to shipment. Customer represents that it is familiar with the Equipment and understands operating instructions and agrees to perform routine maintenance services. Until the balance is paid in full. Customer shall care for the Equipment properly, maintain it in good operating condition, repair and appearance; and Customer shall use it safely and within its rated capacity and only for purpose it was designed. Even if Customer receives technical information, drawings or advice, Customer has sole responsibility for intended use, for installation and design and performance where it is part of a power, propulsion or other system. Limitation of warranties and remedies and all disclaimers apply to all such technical information, drawings or advice. Customer acknowledges and agrees by accepting delivery of the Equipment that the Equipment purchased is of the size, design, capacity and manufacture selected by the Customer, and that the Customer has relied solely on its own judgement in selecting the Equipment. Page 6 of 8 CONFIDENTIALITY Each party shall keep confidential any information received from the other that is not generally known to the public and at the time of disclosure, would reasonably be understood by the receiving party to be proprietary or confidential, whether disclosed in oral, written, visual, electronic or other form, and which the receiving party (or agents) learns in connection with this Agreement including, but not limited to: (a) business plans, strategies, sales, projects and analyses; (b) financial information, pricing, and fee structures; (c) business processes, methods and models; (d) employee and supplier information; (e) specifications; and (f) the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Each party shall take necessary steps to ensure compliance with this provision by its employees, and agents. GOVERNING LAW This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Indiana without giving effect to any choice or conflict of law provision. The parties agree that the courts of the State of Indiana shall have exclusive jurisdiction to settle any dispute or claim arising in connection with this Agreement. INSURANCE Upon Customer¿s request, Cummins will provide to Customer a Certificate of Insurance evidencing Cummins¿ relevant insurance coverage. ASSIGNMENT This Agreement shall be binding on the parties and their successors and assigns. Customer shall not assign this Agreement without the prior written consent of Cummins. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY Any intellectual property rights created by Cummins in the course of the performance of this Agreement or otherwise shall remain Cummins¿ property. Nothing in these conditions shall be deemed to have given Customer a licence or any other rights to use any of the intellectual property rights of Cummins. Customer¿s rights in and to the Cummins¿ intellectual property are limited to those rights as expressly set forth in this Agreement. All rights not expressly granted to Customer under this Agreement are expressly reserved by Cummins. MISCELLANEOUS Cummins shall be an independent contractor under this Agreement. All notices under this Agreement shall be in writing and be delivered personally, mailed via first class certified or registered mail, or sent by a nationally recognized express courier service to the addresses set forth in this Agreement. No amendment of this Agreement shall be valid unless it is writing and signed by the parties hereto. Failure of either party to require performance by the other party of any provision hereof shall in no way affect the right to require such performance at any time thereafter, nor shall the waiver by a party of a breach of any of the provisions hereof constitute a waiver of any succeeding breach. Any provision of this Agreement that is invalid or unenforceable shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remaining terms hereof. These terms are exclusive and constitute entire agreement. Customer acknowledges that the provisions were freely negotiated and bargained for and Customer has agreed to purchase of the Equipment pursuant to these terms and conditions. Acceptance of this Agreement is expressly conditioned on Customer's assent to all such terms and conditions. Neither party has relied on any statement, representation, agreement, understanding or promise made by the other except as expressly set out in this Agreement. In the event of a conflict in the terms of this Agreement with any Customer terms or conditions or agreement (whether referenced in an order submitted by Customer as the terms that govern the purchase of the Equipment or otherwise) or any terms set forth in any other documentation of Customer with respect to the Equipment, the terms of this Agreement shall govern. DIESEL EXHAUST EMISSIONS COMPLIANCE Cummins generators are designed to comply with the current exhaust emissions standards of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), and the California Air Resources Board (CARB). However, some specific applications will require additional emissions control equipment. Also, each local air district has the option to impose more stringent requirements than those of the EPA or CARB, and they may require additional emissions control equipment. It is recommended that Buyer contact the local air management district to determine the permitting requirements for Buyer¿s specific application. Unless specifically listed in this Quotation¿s Bill of Materials, NO ADDITIONAL EMISSIONS EQUIPMENT, EMISSIONS TESTING OR SOURCE TESTING IS INCLUDED IN THIS PROPOSAL. Such items can be quoted separately upon request. Note: The local Air Quality Management District (AQMD) may perform a Risk Screen Analysis (RSA) for all new generator installations. The RSA may determine the annual test/maintenance hours allowed. LOCAL CODE REQUIRED FUEL STORAGE FEATURES Increasingly, local fire code enforcement entities are requiring fuel storage system features, over and above that which is required by National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) or California Fire Code (CFC), such as fuel fill spill containment basins and automatic fuel fill shut-off solenoids. Other requirements may apply to your specific project. We recommend that you contact the fire enforcement entity, having jurisdiction over your project, to determine their specific requirements. MISCELLANEOUS CHARGES Cummins may incur additional charges which will be passed on to the Customer, as applicable. COMPLIANCE Customer acknowledges that the Equipment, and any related technology that are sold or otherwise provided hereunder may be subject to export and other trade controls restricting the sale, export, re-export and/or transfer, directly or indirectly, of such Equipment or technology to certain countries or parties, including, but not limited to, licensing requirements under applicable laws and regulations of the United States, the United Kingdom and other jurisdictions. It is the intention of Cummins to comply with these laws, rules and regulations. Any other provision of this Agreement to the contrary notwithstanding, Customer shall comply with all such applicable all laws relating to the cross-border movement of goods or technology, and all related orders in effect from time to time, and equivalent measures. Customer shall act as the importer of Page 7 of 8 record with respect to the Equipment and shall not resell, export, re-export, distribute, transfer or dispose of the Equipment or related technology, directly or indirectly, without first obtaining all necessary written permits, consents and authorizations and completing such formalities as may be required under such laws, rules and regulations. In addition, Cummins has in place policies not to distribute its products for use in certain countries based on applicable laws and regulations including but not limited to UN, U.S., UK, and European Union regulations. Customer undertakes to perform its obligations under this Agreement with due regard to these policies. Strict compliance with this provision and all laws of the territory pertaining to the importation, distribution, sales, promotion and marketing of the Equipment is a material consideration for Cummins entering into this Agreement with Customer and continuing this Agreement for its term. Customer represents and warrants that it has not and shall not, directly or through any intermediary, pay, give, promise to give or offer to give anything of value to a government official or representative, a political party official, a candidate for political office, an officer or employee of a public international organization or any other person, individual or entity at the suggestion, request or direction or for the benefit of any of the above-described persons and entities for the purposes of inducing such person to use his influence to assist Cummins in obtaining or retaining business or to benefit Cummins or any other person in any way, and will not otherwise breach any applicable laws relating to anti-bribery. Any failure by Customer to comply with these provisions will constitute a default giving Cummins the right to immediate termination of this Agreement and/or the right to elect not to recognize the warranties associated with the Equipment. Customer shall accept full responsibility for any and all civil or criminal liabilities and costs arising from any breaches of those laws and regulations and will defend, indemnify and hold Cummins harmless from and against any and all fines, penalties, claim, damages, liabilities, judgments, costs, fees and expenses incurred by Cummins or its affiliates as a result of Customer¿s breach. Page 8 of 8 Sheet 1 of 3 Part Name: A051P365 Revision: A Drawing Name: A051P366 Revision: A Sheet 2 of 3 Part Name: A051P365 Revision: A Drawing Name: A051P366 Revision: A Part A051P365 A Part Specifications :A051P365 A Description Legacy Name External Regulations Application Status Release Phase Code Security Classification Alternates OUTLINE,ENCLOSURE A051P365 None Production Only Production Public Name Description Legacy Name A030B356 SPECIFICATION,MATERIAL CES10903 A051P366 DRAWING,ENGINEERING A051P366 Sheet 3 of 3 Part Name: A051P365 Revision: A Drawing Name: A051P366 Revision: A Sheet 1 of 5 Part Name: A051N157 Revision: C Drawing Name: A051N158 Revision: C Sheet 2 of 5 Part Name: A051N157 Revision: C Drawing Name: A051N158 Revision: C Sheet 3 of 5 Part Name: A051N157 Revision: C Drawing Name: A051N158 Revision: C Sheet 4 of 5 Part Name: A051N157 Revision: C Drawing Name: A051N158 Revision: C Part A051N157 C Part Specifications :A051N157 C Description Legacy Name External Regulations Application Status Release Phase Code Security Classification Alternates INSTALLATION,GENSET A051N157 IBC,OSHPD Production Only Production Proprietary Name Description Legacy Name A030B356 SPECIFICATION,MATERIAL CES10903 A051N158 DRAWING,ENGINEERING A051N158 Sheet 5 of 5 Part Name: A051N157 Revision: C Drawing Name: A051N158 Revision: C ECO-160476 Sheet 1 of 2 Part Name: A050P698 Revision: C Drawing Name: A050P699 Revision: C Part A050P698 C Part Specifications :A050P698 C Description Legacy Name External Regulations Application Status Release Phase Code Security Classification Alternates OUTLINE,GENSET A050P698 No External Regulations Apply Production Only Production Confidential Name Description Legacy Name A030B356 SPECIFICATION,MATERIAL CES10903 A050P699 DRAWING,ENGINEERING A050P699 ECO-160476 Sheet 2 of 2 Part Name: A050P698 Revision: C Drawing Name: A050P699 Revision: C power.cummins.com ©2018 Cummins Inc. | S-1270 (06/18) Specification sheet OTPC Transfer switch open and closed transition 40 - 4000 Amp Description Features OTPC transfer switches are designed for operation and switching of electrical loads between primary power and Standby generator sets. They are suitable for use in emergency, legally required and optional Standby applications. The switch monitors both power sources, signals generator set startup, automatically transfers power, and returns the load to the primary power source when the utility returns and stabilizes. OTPC transfer switches are available with closed transition transfer. By briefly connecting the two sources (for 100 msec or less), the transfer from the alternate source back to the normal source occurs without interruption in the power supply to loads. PowerCommand® control – A fully featured microprocessor-based control with digital display. Controls allow operator to enter settings and make adjustments to software-enabled features easily and accurately. Accommodates up to eight event schedules. Programmed transition – Open transition timing can be adjusted to completely disconnect the load from both sources for a programmed time period, as recommended by NEMA MG-1 for transfer of inductive loads. Advanced transfer switch mechanism – Unique bi- directional linear actuator provides smooth, Continuous transfer switch action during automatic operation. Robust control system design – Optically isolated logic inputs and isolation transformers for AC power inputs provide high-voltage surge protection. Main contacts – Heavy-duty silver alloy contacts with multi-leaf arc chutes are rated for motor loads or total system load transfer. They require no routine contact maintenance. Continuous load current not to exceed 100% of switch rating and Tungsten loads not to exceed 30% of switch rating. Communications capability – The transfer switch is capable of communicating with other transfer switches, SCADA and remote monitoring systems, or Cummins generators utilizing LonWorks® protocol. Easy service/access – Single-plug harness connection and compatible terminal markings simplify servicing. Access space is ample. Door-mounted controls are field-programmable; not tool is required. Complete product line – Cummins offers a wide range of equipment, accessories and services to suit virtually any backup power application. Warranty and service - Products are backed by a comprehensive warranty and a worldwide network of distributors with factory-trained service technicians. power.cummins.com ©2018 Cummins Inc. | S-1270 (06/18) Transfer switch mechanism • Transfer switch mechanism is electrically operated and mechanically held in the source 1 and source 2 positions. The transfer switch incorporates electrical and mechanical interlocks to prevent inadvertent interconnection of the sources. • Independent break-before-make action is used for both 3-pole and 4-pole/ switched neutral switches. This design allows use of sync check operation when required, or control of the operating speed of the transfer switch for proper transfer of motor and rectifier-based loads (programmed transition feature). • True 4-pole switching allows for proper ground (earth) fault sensing and consistent, reliable operation for the life of the transfer switch. The neutral poles of the transfer switch have the same ratings as the phase poles and are operated by a common crossbar mechanism, eliminating the possibility of incorrect neutral operation at any point in the operating cycle, or due to failure of a neutral operator. • High pressure silver alloy contacts resist burning and pitting. Separate arcing surfaces further protect the main contacts. Contact wear is reduced by multiple leaf arc chutes that cool and quench the arcs. Barriers separate the phases to prevent interphase flashover. A transparent protective cover allows visual inspection while inhibiting inadvertent contact with energized components • Switch mechanism, including contact assemblies, is third party certified to verify suitability for applications requiring high endurance switching capability for the life of the transfer switch. Withstand and closing ratings are validated using the same set of contacts, further demonstrating the robust nature of the design Specifications Voltage rating 600 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz. Arc interruption Multiple leaf arc chutes provide dependable arc interruption. Neutral bar A full current-rated neutral bar with lugs is standard on enclosed 3-pole transfer switches. Auxiliary contacts Two isolated contacts (one for each source) indicating switch position are provided for customer use. Contacts are normally open, and close to indicate connection to the source. Wired to terminal block for easy access. Rated at 10 amps Continuous and 250 VAC maximum. UL recognized, and CSA-certified. Operating temperature -40 ˚F (-40 ˚C) to 140 ˚F (60 ˚C) Storage temperature -40 ˚F (-40 ˚C) to 140 ˚F (60 ˚C) Humidity Up to 95% relative, non-condensing Altitude Up to 10,000 ft (3,000 m) without derating Surge withstand ratings Voltage surge performance and testing in compliance with the requirements of IEEE C62.41 (Category B3) and IEEE C62.45. Total transfer time (source-to-source) Will not exceed 6 cycles at 60 Hz with normal voltage applied to the actuator and without programmed transition enabled. Manual operation handles Transfer switches rated through 1000 amps are equipped with permanently attached operating handles and quick-break, quick-make contact mechanisms suitable for manual operation. Transfer switches over 1000 amps are equipped with manual operators. All switches must be de-energized before manual operation is attempted. power.cummins.com ©2018 Cummins Inc. | S-1270 (06/18) Transition modes Open transition/programmed: Controls the time required for the device to switch from source to source, so that the load generated voltages decay to a safe level before connecting to an energized source. Recommended by NEMA MG-1 to prevent nuisance-tripping breakers and load damage. Adjustable 0-60 seconds, default 0 seconds. Programmed transition is standard on 150-1200 amp switches, and optional on 1600-4000 amps. Open transition/in-phase: Initiates open transition transfer when in-phase monitor senses both sources are in phase. Operates in a break-before-make sequence. Includes ability to enable programmed transition as a back-up. If sources are not in phase within 120 seconds, switches from 40-1200 amps will transfer using programmed transition (not available on open transition switches over 1200 amps). Closed transition: Used in applications where loads are sensitive to the momentary power interruption that occurs when performing open transition between sources. Closed transition is accomplished by briefly (<100 msec) paralleling two good sources to eliminate the momentary break in the power supply. Closed transition is only available as an option on OTPC models from 1000-4000 amps. Genset-to-genset: Either genset can be designated as the lead genset. If the lead genset goes down or is taken offline, the transfer switch starts the second genset and transfer the load. The control can be programmed to alternate between the two gensets at a set interval up to 336 hours (2 weeks). PowerCommand control PowerCommand controls are microprocessor based and developed specifically for automatic transfer switch operation. The control includes all of the features and options required for most applications. • LED lamps indicate source availability, source connected, exercise mode and test mode. • Flash memory stores the control settings. • Contents of the memory are not lost even if power to the controller is lost. • On-board battery maintains the real-time clock setting and the engine start time delay. • Choice of two control packages allows selection of the most suitable control for the application. power.cummins.com ©2018 Cummins Inc. | S-1270 (06/18) Control functions Level 1 control (C023) Level 2 control (C024) Open transition (in-phase) Open transition (programmed) Utility-to-genset applications Software adjustable time delays: • Engine start: 0 to 120 sec • Transfer normal to emergency: 0 to 120 sec Re-transfer emergency to normal: 0 to 30 min • Engine stop: 0 to 30 min • Programmed transition: 0 to 60 sec Undervoltage sensing: 3-phase normal, 1-phase emergency • Accuracy: =/- 2% • Pickup: 85% to 100% of nominal voltage • Dropout: 75% to 98% of pickup setting • Dropout time delay: 0-4 sec Overvoltage sensing: 3-phase normal, 1-phase emergency • Accuracy: =/- 2% • Pickup: 95% to 99% of dropout setting • Dropout: 105% to 135% of nominal voltage • Dropout time delay: 0 to 120 sec Over/under frequency sensing: • Accuracy: ±0.05 Hz • Pickup: ±5% to ±20% of nominal frequency • Dropout: 1-5% beyond pickup • Dropout time delay: 0.1 to 15.0 sec Programmable genset exerciser: One event/schedule with or w/o load Basic indicator panel: • Source available/connected LED indicators • Test/exercise/override buttons • Digital display – optional (M018) • Analog bar graph meter display – optional (D009) Date/time-stamped event recording: 50 events Load sequencing: Optional with network communications module M031. Provides control for eight steps of load with an adjustable time delay for each step on transfer, re- transfer or both. Open transition (in-phase) Open transition (programed) Closed transition: Includes fail-to-disconnect timer to prevent extended paralleling with the utility Utility-to-genset applications Utility-to-utility applications Genset-to-genset applications Software adjustable time delays: • Engine start: 0 to 120 sec • Transfer normal to emergency: 0 to 120 sec • Re-transfer emergency to normal: 0 to 30 • min Engine stop: 0 to 30 min • Programmed transition: 0 to 60 sec Undervoltage sensing: 3-phase normal, 3-phase emergency • Accuracy: +/- 2% • Pickup: 85% to 100% of nominal voltage • Dropout: 75% to 98% of pickup setting • Dropout time delay: 0-4 sec Overvoltage sensing: 3-phase normal, 3-phase emergency • Accuracy: ± 2% • Pickup: 95% to 99% of dropout setting • Dropout: 105% to 135% of nominal voltage • Dropout time delay: 0 to 120 sec Over/under frequency sensing: • Accuracy: =/- 0.05 Hz • Pickup: ±5% to ±20% of nominal frequency • Dropout: 1-5% beyond pickup • Dropout time delay: 0.1 to 15.0 sec Voltage imbalance sensing: • Dropout: 2% to 10% • Pickup: 90% of dropout • Time delay: 2.0 to 20.0 sec Phase rotation sensing: • Time delay: 100 msec Loss of single phase detection: • Time delay: 100 msec Programmable genset exerciser: Eight events/schedules with or w/o load Basic indicator panel: • Source available/connected LED indicators • Test/exercise/override buttons • Digital display – standard • Analog bar graph meter display – optional (D009) Date/time-stamped event recording: 50 events Load sequencing: Optional with network communications module M031. Provides control for eight steps of load with an adjustable time delay for each step on transfer, re- transfer, or both. Genset-to-genset: Same functions as above for lead and secondary generators. Utility-to-utility: Same functions as above, for preferred and alternate source power.cummins.com ©2018 Cummins Inc. | S-1270 (06/18) Time-delay functions Engine start: Prevents nuisance genset starts due to momentary power system variation or loss. Not included in utility- to-utility systems. Transfer normal to emergency: Allows genset to stabilize before application of load. Prevents power interruption if normal source variation or loss is momentary. Allows staggered transfer of loads in multiple transfer switch systems. For genset-to-genset applications, delays transfer of load from lead to secondary generator. Re-transfer emergency to normal: Allows the utility to stabilize before re-transfer of load. Prevents needless power interruption if return of normal source is momentary. Allows staggered transfer of loads in multiple transfer switch systems. For genset-to-genset applications, delays re-transfer of load from secondary back to lead generator. Engine stop: Maintains availability of the genset for immediate reconnection if the normal source fails shortly after retransfer. Allows gradual genset cool down by running unloaded. Not included in utility-to-utility systems. Elevator pre-transfer signal: Requires optional relay signal module (M023). Signals elevator system that transfer is pending and delays transfer for pre-set interval of 0-60 seconds to prevent a power interruption during elevator operation User interfaces Basic interface panel LED indicators provide at-a-glance source and transfer switch status for quick summary of system conditions. Test and override buttons allow delays to be bypassed for rapid system checkout. Digital display (M018) The digital display provides a convenient method for monitoring load power conditions, adjusting transfer switch parameters, monitoring PowerCommand network status or reviewing transfer switch events. Password protection limits access to adjustments to authorized personnel. The digital display is optional with the PowerCommand Level 1 control and comes standard with the Level 2 control. User interface options Front panel security key (M017) Locks front panel to prohibit access to digital control settings. Prevents unauthorized activation of transfer or test functions. Bar graph meter display (D009) An LED bar graph display provides an easy-to-read indicator of the level of power being supplied to the load. Information displayed includes: 3-phase voltage and current, frequency, power factor, and kilowatts. Green, amber, and red LEDs provide at-a-glance indication of system acceptability. Available as an option with the Level 2 PowerCommand microprocessor control. Control options Relay signal module (M023) Provides relay output contacts for sending information to the building monitoring and control system. Relay outputs include: source 1 connected/available, source 2 connected/available, not in auto, test/exercise active, failed to disconnect, failed to synchronize, failed to transfer/re- transfer, and elevator control pre-transfer signal. Loadshed (M007) Removes the load from the emergency power source by driving the transfer switch to the neutral position when signalled remotely. Transfers load back to the emergency source when the signal contacts open. Immediately re- transfers back to the primary source when available. Available for utility-to-genset applications only. PowerCommand network interface (M031) Provides connection to the PowerCommand network. LonWorks compatible for integration with building monitoring and control system. Load power and load current monitoring (M022) Measures load phase and neutral current, power factor, real power (kW) and apparent power (kVA). Warns of excessive neutral current resulting from unbalanced or nonlinear loads. Minimum current level detection is 3%. power.cummins.com ©2018 Cummins Inc. | S-1270 (06/18) UL withstand and closing ratings OTPC transfer switches must be protected by circuit breakers or fuses. Referenced drawings include detailed listings of specific breakers or fuse types that must be used with the respective transfer switches. Consult with your distributor/dealer to obtain the necessary drawings. Withstand and closing ratings (WCR) are stated in symmetrical RMS amperes. Transfer switch ampere MCCB protection Special circuit breaker protection WCR @ volts max with specific manufacturers MCCBs Max MCCB ratings Drawing reference With specific current limiting breakers (CLB) Max CLB rating Drawing reference 40, 70, 125 3-pole 14,000 at 480 225 A A050J441 200,000 at 480 225 A A048J566 14,000 at 600 100,000 at 600 40, 70, 125 4-pole 30,000 at 480 400 A A048E949 200,000 at 480 400 A A051D533 30,000 at 600 100,000 at 600 150, 225, 260 30,000 at 480 400 A A048E949 200,000 at 480 400 A A051D533 30,000 at 600 100,000 at 600 300, 400, 600 65,000 at 480 1200 A A056M829 200,000 at 480 1200 A A048J564 65,000 at 600 100,000 at 600 800, 1000 open 65,000 at 480 1400 A A056M821 150,000 at 480 1400 A A048J562 50,000 at 600 100,000 at 600 1000, 1200 closed 85,000 at 480 1600 A A052L319 200,000 at 480 1600 A A048P186 65,000 at 600* 200,000 at 600 1200 open, delayed 85,000 at 480 1600 A A056M825 65,000 at 600* 1600, 2000, 3000, 4000 These amperages don’t have specific circuit breaker ratings. See 3 cycle ratings table. *CSA only power.cummins.com ©2018 Cummins Inc. | S-1270 (06/18) Fuse protection Transfer switch ampere WCR @ volts max. with current limiting fuses Max fuse, size and type Drawing reference 40, 70, 125 3- and 4-pole 200,000 at 480 200 A Class, J, RK1, RK5, T A050J441 200,000 at 600 150, 225, 260 200,000 at 480 600 A Class, J, RK1, RK5 1200 A Class L or T A048E949 200,000 at 600 300, 400, 600 200,000 at 480 600 A Class, RK1 or RK5 1200 A Class L or T A056M829 200,000 at 600 800, 1000 open 200,000 at 480 600 A Class, J, RK1 or RK5 1200 A Class T 2000 A Class L A056M821 200,000 at 600 1000, 1200 closed 200,000 at 480** 3000 A Class L A052L319 1200 open 200,000 at 480 600 A Class, J, RK1 or RK5 1200 A Class T 2000 A Class L A056M825 200,000 at 600 1600, 2000 200,000 at 480** 2500 A Class L A052L322 3000 200,000 at 480** 4000 A Class L A052L322 4000 200,000 at 480** 6000 A Class L A052L324 200,000 at 600* *CSA only **UL only 3-cycle ratings Transfer switch ampere WCR @ volts max 3 cycle rating Max MCCB rating Drawing reference 300, 400, 600 25,000 at 600 1200 A A056M829 800, 1000 35,000 at 600 1400 A A056M821 1000, 1200 closed 50,000 at 480 1600 A A052L319 42,000 at 600* 1200 open 50,000 at 480 1600 A A056M825 42,000 at 600 1600, 2000 100,000 at 480 4000 A A052L322 65,000 at 600* 3000 100,000 at 480 4000 A A052L322 65,000 at 600* 4000 100,000 at 480 5000 A A052L324 85,000 at 600* *CSA only power.cummins.com ©2018 Cummins Inc. | S-1270 (06/18) Transfer switch lug capacities All lugs are 90°C rated and accept copper or aluminium wire unless indicated otherwise. Amp rating Cables per phase Size 40, 70, 125 3-pole 1 #12 AWG-2/0 40 4-pole 1 #14 AWG-2/0 70, 125 4-pole 1 #6 AWG - 300 MCM 150, 225 1 #6 AWG - 300 MCM 260 1 #6 AWG - 400 MCM 300, 400 2 Two hole lug, one accepts 3/0 AWG – 600 MCM and the other accepts #4 AWG – 250 MCM 600 2 250 - 500 MCM 800, 1000 open, delayed 4 250 - 500 MCM 1000, 1200 closed 4 #2 AWG to 600 MCM 1200 open, delayed 4 # 2 AWG to 600 MCM, standard (Feature N045) 1/0 AWG to 750 MCM, optional (Feature N066) Compression Lug Adapter, optional (feature N032)** 1600, 2000 8 #2 AWG to 600 MCM (lugs optional) 3000 8 #2 AWG to 600 MCM (lugs optional) 4000 12 1/0 AWG to 750 MCM (lugs optional) **Recommended Compression lugs (½” stud , 1-3/4” centers) Lug mounting hardware included 750 MCM 600 MCM 500 MCM Manufacturer CRA- 750L2 CRA-600L2 CRA-500L2 ILSCO 2ACL-750 2ACL-600 2ACL-500 2IACL-750 2IACL-600 2IACL-500 54223 54289 54286 THOMAS & BETTS 60278 60275 60273 60278N 60278N 60278N LCN75 LCN600 LCN500 ATL502 ATL602 ATL5002 YA39-2LN YA36-2LN YA34-2LN BURNDY YA39-2N YA36-2N YA34-2N YA44L-2NTC-LD - YA38L-2NTC-FX YAG44L-2NTC-LD - YAG38L-2NTC-LD YA44-2N-FXB - YA38-2N-FXB YA39A5 And YA39AM2 YA36A3 YA34A3 power.cummins.com ©2018 Cummins Inc. | S-1270 (06/18) Enclosures Dimensions - transfer switch in UL type 1 enclosure Amp rating Height Width Depth Weight 3-pole type Outline drawing Door closed Door open in mm in mm in mm in mm lb kg 40, 70, 12 5 3-pole 27.0 686 20.5 521 12.0 305 31.5 800 82 37 0310-0544 40, 70, 125 4-pole 35.5 902 26.0 660 16.0 406 41.0 1042 165 75 0500-4896 150, 225 35.5 902 26.0 660 16.0 406 41.0 1042 165 75 0310-0414 260 43.5 1105 28.5 724 16.0 406 43.0 1093 170 77 0310-0540 300, 400, 600 54.0 1372 25.5 648 18.0 457 42.0 1067 225 102 0310-1307 800, 1000 open 68.0 1727 30.0 762 20.6 524 48.5 1232 360 163 0310-0417 1000, 1200 closed 76.3 1937 36.0 915 22.7 577 54.0 1372 450 204 0310-0482 1200 open, delayed 90.0 2290 39.0 991 27.5 699 64.7 1644 730 331 A030L605 1600, 2000* 90.0 2290 39.0 915 48.0 1219 84.0 2134 1100 499 0310-0483 3000* 90.0 2290 36.0 915 48.0 1219 84.0 2134 1250 567 0310-0484 4000* 90.0 2290 46.5 1180 60.0 1520 106 2700 1850 839 0500-4485 Dimensions - transfer switch in UL type 3R, 4, 4x, or 12 enclosure Amp rating Height Width Depth Weight Cabinet type Outline drawing Door closed Door open in mm in mm in mm in mm lb kg 40, 70, 125 3-pole 34.0 864 26.5 673 12.5 318 36.5 927 125 57 3R, 12 0310-0453 4 0310-0445 40, 70, 125 4-pole 42.5 1080 30.5 775 16.0 406 44.0 1118 190 86 3R, 12 0500-4896 4 0500-4896 150, 225 42.5 1080 30.5 775 16.0 406 44.0 1118 215 97 3R, 12 0310-0454 4 0310-0446 260 46.0 1168 32.0 813 16.0 406 46.0 1168 255 102 3R, 12 0310-0455 4 0310-0447 300, 400, 600 59.0 1499 27.5 699 18.5 419 41.5 1054 290 132 3R, 12 0310-1315 4 0310-1316 800, 1000 open 73.5 1867 32.5 826 20.8 529 49.5 1257 410 186 3R, 12 0310-0457 4 0310-0449 1000, 1200 closed 76.3 1937 36.0 915 22.7 577 54.0 1372 450 204 3R, 12, 4 0310-0482 1200 open 90.0 2290 39.0 991 27.5 699 64.7 1644 730 331 3R, 12 A030L605 4 A041N372 1600, 2000* 90.0 2290 38.0 826 50.9 1293 80.0 2032 1100 499 3R, 12, 4 0310-0744 3000* 90.0 2290 38.0 965 51.0 1295 84.5 2146 1250 567 3R 0310-0745 4000* 90.0 2290 49.0 1244 60.0 1524 105 2654 1850 839 3R 0500-4486 power.cummins.com ©2018 Cummins Inc. | S-1270 (06/18) Dimensions - transfer switch in UL type 4X stainless steel enclosure Amp rating Height Width Depth Weight Cabinet type Outline drawing Door closed Door open in mm in mm in mm in mm lb kg 40, 70, 125 3-pole 46.0 1168 32.0 813 16.0 406 46.0 1168 255 102 4X 0500-4184 40, 70, 125 4-pole 46.0 1168 32.0 813 16.0 406 46.0 1168 1168 255 4X 0500-4896 150, 225 46.0 1168 32.0 813 16.0 406 46.0 1168 255 102 4X 0500-4184 260 46.0 1168 32.0 813 16.0 406 46.0 1168 255 102 4X 0500-4184 300, 400, 600 73.5 1867 32.5 826 19.5 495 49.5 1257 410 186 4X 0500-4185 800, 1000 open 73.5 1867 32.5 826 19.5 495 49.5 1257 410 186 4X 0500-4185 1000, 1200 closed 7.0 1778 40.0 1016 19.8 502 59.0 1499 450 204 4X 0310-0482 1200 open 90.0 2290 39.0 991 27.5 699 64.7 1644 730 331 4X A041N372 1600, 2000* 90.0 2290 35.5 826 50.9 1293 80.0 2032 1100 499 4X 0310-0744 * Rear and side access is required for installation. Dimensions shown are for 4-pole. For information on 3-pole switches, call factory. power.cummins.com ©2018 Cummins Inc. | S-1270 (06/18) Submittal detail Amperage ratings • 40 • 70 • 125 • 150 • 225 • 260 • 300 • 400 • 600 • 800 • 1000 • 1200 • 1600 • 2000 • 3000 • 4000 Voltage ratings • R020 120* • R038 190 • R021 208 • R022 220 • R023 240 • R024 380 • R025 416 • R035 440 • R026 480 • R027 600 * Single phase connection (not available on 1200-4000 amps) Pole configuration • A028 Poles - 3 (solid neutral) • A029 Poles - 4 (switched neutral) Frequency • A044 60 Hertz • A045 50 Hertz Transfer mode • A077 Open transition/in-phase • A078 Open transition/programmed • A079 Closed transition (available 1000-4000 amps, for closed transition below 1000 amps, see CHPC spec sheet S-1437) Application • A035 Utility to genset • A036 Utility to utility • A037 Genset to genset System options • A041 Single Phase, 2-wire or 3-wire (not available 1200- 4000 amps) • A042 Three Phase, 3-wire or 4-wire Enclosure • B001 Type 1: Indoor use, provides some protection against dirt (similar to IEC type IP30) • B002 Type 3R:Intended for outdoor use, provides some protection from dirt, rain and snow (similar to IEC type IP34) • B003 Type 4: Indoor or outdoor use, provides some protection from wind-blown dust and water spray (similar to IEC type IP65) • B004 Open Construction: No enclosure – includes automatic transfer switch and controls (call factory for dimensions) • B010 Type 12: Indoor use, some protection from dust (similar to IEC type IP61) • B025 Type 4X: Stainless steel, indoor or outdoor use, provides some protection from corrosion (similar to IEC Type IP65) Standards • A046 UL 1008/CSA certification • A064 NFPA 20 compliant (not available on 1200-4000 amp switches) • A080 Seismic certification Controls • C023 PowerCommand control - Level 1 • C024 PowerCommand control - Level 2 Control options • M017 Security key - front panel • M018 Digital display • M022 Load monitoring (min current level 3%) • M023 Relay signal module. Includes pre-transfer module for elevator control • M031 LonWorks network communications module (FTT-10) Meter • D009 Analog bar graph meter Battery chargers • K001 2 amps, 12/24 volts • KB59 15 amps, 12 volts • KB60 12 amps, 24 volts Protective relays (closed transition) • M045 Paralleling timer and lock-out relays, ANSI/IEEE 62PL and 86 • M046 Paralleling timer, lock-out and reverse power relays, single phase, ANSI/IEEE 62PL, 86 and 32R • M047 Paralleling timer, lock-out and reverse power relays, three phase, ANSI/IEEE 62PL, 86 and 32R • Auxiliary relays - Relays are UL listed and factory installed. All relays provide two normally closed isolated and two normally open contacts rated 10 amps at 600 VAC. Relay terminals accept from one 18 gauge to two 12 gauge wires per terminal. • L101 24 VDC coil - installed, not wired (for customer use). • L102 24 VDC coil - emergency position - relay energized when switch is in Source 2 (emergency) position. • L103 24 VDC coil - normal position - relay energized when switch is in Source 1 (normal) position • L201 12 VDC coil - installed, not wired • L202 12 VDC coil - emergency position - relay energized when switch is in Source 2 (emergency) position • L203 12 VDC coil - normal position - relay energized when switch is in Source 1 (normal) position Miscellaneous options • M003 Terminal block - 30 points (not wired) • N020 Terminal block – re-transfer inhibit • M007 Load shed - from emergency - drives switch to neutral position when remote signal contact closes • N009 Power connect - bus Stabs (1200 amp open construction only) • N013 Extension harness (open construction only) Lug Kits (select one) • N008 Cable lugs, mechanical, 600 MCM, 8 per pole (1600A, 2000A, 3000A only) • N032 Lug adapters, compression, ½ Stud (1200A only) • N045 Cable lugs, mechanical, 600 MCM, 4 per pole (1200A only) • N066 Cable lugs, mechanical, 750 MCM, 4 per pole (1200A only) • N056 Cable Lugs, mechanical, 750 MCM, 12 per pole (4000A only) Warranty • G010 Years 0-2: Parts, labor and travel Years 3-5: Parts only Years 6-10: Main contacts only • G013 Years 0-5: Comprehensive Years 6-10: Main contacts only Shipping • A051 Packing - export box Accessories • AC-167 Accessories specifications sheet For more information contact your local Cummins distributor or visit power.cummins.com ©2018 Cummins Inc. All rights reserved. Cummins is a registered trademark of Cummins Inc. PowerCommand, AmpSentry, InPower and “Our energy working for you.” are trademarks of Cummins Inc. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Specifications are subject to change without notice. S-1270 (06/18) Certification All switches are UL 1008 Listed with UL Type Rated cabinets and UL Listed CU-AL terminals. All switches comply with NEMA ICS 10. All switches are certified to CSA 282 Emergency Electrical Power Supply for Buildings, up to 600 VAC. All switches comply with IEEE 446 Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems. Suitable for use in emergency, legally required and Standby applications per NEC 700, 701 and 702. This transfer switch is designed and manufactured in facilities certified to ISO9001. All switches comply with NFPA 70, 99 and 110 (Level 1). Sheet 1 of 3 Sheet 2 of 3 Part A004Y414 H Part Specifications :A004Y414 H Description Legacy Name External Regulations Application Status Release Phase Code Security Classification Alternates OUTLINE,CONTROL BOX 0310-0454 None Production Only Production Proprietary Name Description Legacy Name A012T897 DRAWING,INSTALLATION 0310-0454 Sheet 3 of 3 5. INSTALLATION INFORMATION & FIELD SERVICES Rev. 5-14-18 This section is structured as follows: 5.01 MECHANICAL INFORMATION & RECOMMENDATIONS 5.01.1 INSTALL REPORT 5.02 ELECTRICAL INFORMATION & RECOMMENDATIONS 5.03 START-UP TESTING & TRAINING SERVICES 5.03.1 PRE-START UP CHECKLIST 5.03.2 FIELD START-UP REPORT 5.01 MECHANICAL INFORMATION & RECOMMENDATIONS Rev. 2-27-18 1. Pre-installation & installation advisory services a. Romtec Utilities provides on-site underground structure and mechanical advisory services to the installing contractor on the site. One day is provided. b. Romtec Utilities personnel at the project site during installation of the system are there only in an advisory capacity. Romtec Utilities does not perform work during this phase of the project. c. Typically the delivery of the underground portion of the Romtec Utilities system is done in conjunction with its installation. In other words, the system is unloaded from the Romtec Utilities trucks and installed directly into the prepared hole. 2. Scheduling installation advisor a. Romtec Utilities and all associated technical personnel require at least two (2) weeks advance notice to schedule an installation date. b. Installation begins at 8 am and will take a minimum of one full day depending on the type of system. 3. Romtec Utilities provides the following items in the typical structural and mechanical system delivery and the contractor should be aware of the following: a. Pre-cast Base Slab i. Base slab is ready to set on the site engineer approved foundation. b. Pre-cast Barrels i. All discharge and inlet holes shown on the component drawing are pre-cored unless otherwise noted. Pipe boots are provided separately to use at the contractor’s discretion. ii. If the wet well includes Ameron T-Lock lining, all joints, cored holes and all penetrated concrete must be welded by a “Certified” Ameron welder. All piping going through the wet well must be installed prior to the welding. c. Pre-cast Top Slab i. Top slab is ready to set with the hatch pre-installed. d. The Accessory Pallet includes the following: i. Concrete joint gaskets and sealers ii. Discharge piping Note: The supplied discharge piping is intentionally too long. The contractor must measure the piping and trim to fit. The Contractor must also plumb the discharge pipe and secure it to the wet well using the pre-installed bracket. iii. Level sensing devices Note: Store the level sensors for installation at start-up. iv. Guiderails and Brackets Note: Guiderails are intentionally supplied long and must be trimmed to fit. Install the guiderails per the approved wet well component drawing. Confirm that the guiderails are plumb before tightening the mounting hardware. 4. The following are strongly recommended on site during delivery, and installation of the system: a. A person on-site whose sole purpose is to be in charge of safety. b. Shoring for safe working space in the hole. c. Crane to off load and set all concrete components. Forklift to offload accessory pallet and control panel (may be shipped separately at a later date). Make sure that all overhead obstructions have been identified prior to delivery. d. Secure covered area for accessory pallet, control panel and pumps. These items may need to be hauled to a secure site. Please provide a truck to transfer these items to a separate site if necessary. 5.01 MECHANICAL INFORMATION & RECOMMENDATIONS Rev. 2-27-18 5. Recommended lifting method for concrete a. All concrete components are designed to be lifted and set in the excavated hole by use of the Romtec Utilities supplied anchors and lifting gear. b. The installing contractor shall excavate, complete the foundation as specified by the site engineer, provide a safe OSHA approved cave-in protection method (shoring) and a crane of adequate size to lift and set the heaviest structural piece. Note: Please consult with the site design engineer regarding the required compacted base for any structural concrete. Special Note: The specification and process for creating a stable compacted “footing” or “base” for the Romtec Utilities wet well, valve vault or any other provided structures is by others. In other words, creating a compacted base that will not allow the Romtec Utilities structures to “settle” and/or “tilt” during or after installation is not the responsibility of Romtec Utilities. c. The installing contractor must provide the appropriate lifting cables, straps or chains and connection devices to attach the cables to the crane and the ring clutches. d. All lifting cables, straps or chains must be long enough so the lifting rigging does not put pressure on the upper concrete joint which can cause damage. e. The use of a spreader bar will greatly reduce the risk of the lifting rigging breaking the concrete upper joints. f. Refer to concrete production drawings for weights of individual components. 6. Recommendations for extended pump storage: a. Never store pumps in the wet well. Store pumps upright in a dry location free of extreme temperatures and direct sunlight. b. The pump impeller should be rotated by hand every month to insure that all rotating parts (seals, bearings, and impellers) are free for installation and start-up. Use silicone spray or rust inhibiting oil, and spray into the lower casing completely coating the impeller and inner lower case. In addition, fully coat the discharge flange face. c. Protect pump cables from damage and moisture. Cables should be placed so that there is no tension on the cable entry point into the pump. The free end of the cable should be protected from moisture at all times during storage and handling. Never lift the pump by the power cable. d. Consult pump manufacturer for further recommendations. Page 1 of 3 REV: 5/14/18 INSTALL REPORT INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND COMPONENTS DATE: / / PROJECT: Highgate Community RU INSTALLATION ADVISOR: 1. DELIVERY A. Has the BOM been reviewed with the customer representative? Yes No B. Is there any missing equipment or parts? Yes No List any missing equipment: C. Where will the accessory pallet be stored? *PLEASE BE SURE TO STORE THE ACCESSORY PALLET IN A SAFE, DRY AREA. SOME ITEMS ON THIS PALLET REQUIRE PROTECTION FROM WEATHER. 2. CONSTRUCTION CHECKLIST A. Was the base verified to be level? Yes No B. Were all gaskets, joint wraps, and sealants installed? Yes No C. Shoring? Yes No D. Dewatering? Yes No E. Rock base? Yes No F. If not rock, what material was used as a base and how deep? G. What are your plans for backfill? H. What material will be used as backfill? I. How deep will the backfill be? Page 2 of 3 REV: 5/14/18 3. CONFIRMATION OF ELEVATIONS RU ELEVATION INSTALL ELEVATION DO THEY MATCH WET WELL RIM Page 3 of 3 REV: 5/14/18 COMMENTS 5.02 ELECTRICAL INFORMATION & RECOMMENDATIONS Rev. 2-27-18 This section provides important information and recommendations regarding the electrical design and installation of this system. 1. Electrical advisory services a. Romtec Utilities will provide advisory services by phone to the licensed electrical contractor installing the system electrical components. b. Romtec Utilities strongly suggests having the installing electrician contact Romtec Utilities directly to discuss the electrical design prior to beginning installation. 2. Communication Equipment Supply a. If an antenna is supplied by Romtec Utilities for radio communication or any other communication, all coaxial cable, fittings and the mast are supplied by others. Romtec Utilities does not design or supply this equipment unless otherwise noted. 3. Pump Cable Inspection and Installation Recommendations: a. Inspect the full length of the pump cable for any signs of damage including abrasions, cuts, crushed insulation, and signs of moisture entry. If cable damage is found, further testing of the cable and its overall integrity will need to be performed by a qualified technician. Note: A high percentage of cable failures are due to mechanical damage, which typically occurs during transportation, handling and installation. b. When cables are installed in a raceway, underground electrical duct or cable tray, the following factors should be considered: i. Cable configuration ii. Raceway or cable tray fill iii. Physical limitations of cables iv. Installation equipment v. Ambient temperature and conditions Note: Low temperatures are a cause for concern when installing cables. c. Prior to performing a low temperature (less than 10°F) cable installation, cables should be pre-conditioned by storing for a minimum of 24 hours at a temperature of 55°F or higher. Do not impact, drop, kink or bend cable sharply in low temperatures. d. All cables installed in a raceway shall be pulled together. They should be trained and guided into the raceway using an approved pulling compound or lubricant when necessary. e. Conduits shall be cleaned prior to installing cables to ensure that the outer jacket is not damaged. f. Pump cables shall be supported vertically in the wet well by stainless steel wire mesh support grips sized for the application. g. All hardware including fittings, hangers, supports, and fasteners shall have corrosion protection suitable for the atmosphere. h. Conduit bushing shall be installed where required to prevent cable damage. i. Pump cables shall be installed in the wet well with adequate length to allow for removal of the pumps without disconnecting the cables. j. Extra cable length shall be secured so as not to interfere with pump intake. k. Extra cable length shall be secured to a 3/8” stainless steel cable hanger with heavy duty, non-releasable, UV resistant cables ties. l. Excessive cable length that may interfere with pump operation shall be trimmed to length. 4. Recommendations for extended control panel storage: a. Store the control panel upright in a dry location free of extreme temperatures and direct sunlight. 5.02 ELECTRICAL INFORMATION & RECOMMENDATIONS Rev. 2-27-18 b. When storing the control panel for a prolonged period (more than 30 days), make sure to seal all conduit entries and place desiccant packs within the enclosure to capture moisture in the air. c. Installing the control panel at the project site without energizing the panel for a prolonged period can lead to moisture issues within the enclosure. i. The control panel enclosure is designed based on the assumption that the energized panel is going to create a certain amount of internal heat. ii. This heat helps repel the buildup of condensation which can lead to corrosion. iii. If the control panel is installed without being energized, then measures must be taken to protect the control panel from the elements. iv. Control panels stored outside or for long periods of time without following recommended procedures are not warrantable. 5. Storage Recommendations for Transducers: a. Receiving i. Upon receipt, inspect the transmitter for damage during shipping. ii. Check the packaging for accessories. iii. During intermediate storage or transport, store the pressure transducer in the original packaging in a warm dry atmosphere. Note: Most submersible transmitters rely on a vented cable to properly “reference” the sensor to atmospheric pressure. Care must be taken to prevent moisture (including humidity) from entering the cable through the vent tube, and in some cases moisture wicking into the cable between the conductors, which will severely affect reliability and service life. 5.02 ELECTRICAL INFORMATION & RECOMMENDATIONS Rev. 2-27-18 b. Installation i. Inspect the full length of the transducer cable for any signs of damage which may include abrasions, cuts, crushed insulation, and signs of moisture entry. ii. Whenever possible, the process of trimming and terminating the cable should be done under dry conditions. When cable termination must be done under rainy or wet conditions, care should be taken to keep the end of the cable sealed and dry until it is placed in a protective enclosure. iii. Electrical connections may only be performed by qualified personnel in accordance with the electrical circuit diagrams. The electrical connection information in the manual must be observed; otherwise, the applicable protection type may be affected. iv. Conduits shall be cleaned prior to installing the transducer cable to ensure that the outer jacket is not damaged. v. All hardware including fittings, hangers, supports, and fasteners shall have corrosion protection suitable for the atmosphere. vi. Conduit bushing shall be installed where required to prevent cable damage. vii. Do not kink the cable during installation, as this will cause blockage to the breather tube inside the cable. viii. Install a protective barrier that guards against moisture buildup in the cable vent tube such as a desiccant filter or aneroid bellows. Note: Protective barriers ensure reliable operation and long life as they protect sensitive electronic components within the pressure transducer from mildew and prevent the formation of a liquid column in the vent tube. Any such liquid column directly affects calibration of the transducer and may render the transducer unusable. Special Note: It is not advisable to mount the transmitter or route the transmitter cable in close proximity to a source of electrical noise such as a variable-speed drive, or other high-powered electrical device. 5.03 START-UP TESTING & TRAINING SERVICES Rev. 2-27-18 Romtec Utilities provides the following services for system testing and training. The required actions during this time for the contractor and Romtec Utilities are defined below. 1. Start-up services a. Romtec Utilities will direct all system start-up activities at the project site for the components supplied by Romtec Utilities on the designated start-up day. One day is provided. Romtec Utilities performs all applicable system tests specified in the Field Start-Up Report and provides test results to the customer. Note: Romtec Utilities may choose to assist in the start-up of components not supplied by Romtec Utilities. However, Romtec Utilities is not responsible for the start-up of components not supplied by Romtec Utilities. Romtec Utilities start-up checklist may include sections for components not supplied by Romtec Utilities (ex. Generator). This does not mean that Romtec Utilities is therefore required or obligated to perform the start-up of these components. Special Note: Additional start-up, testing and/or training services requested or required by the regulatory agency or any other party will not be conducted by Romtec Utilities unless under a separate contract. b. No other party shall operate the system until after the start-up and testing procedures are completed by Romtec Utilities. 2. Prior to start-up the contractor must: a. Connect and Verify Supply Power i. Contractor to ensure that the main electrical service meter is energized, and the appropriate feeder wires are ran to the Romtec Utilities control panel along with a properly terminated ground wire. Note: Romtec Utilities’ panel is not to be energized prior to Romtec Utilities arriving on-site for startup unless otherwise agreed upon in writing by Romtec Utilities. b. Supply ALL electrical conduit i. Conduit specification, placement, and appropriate seal-offs are to be determined by the electrical contractor in accordance with local, state, national electrical codes. Romtec Utilities does not supply conduit (unless otherwise specified by Romtec Utilities). c. Supply ALL Wiring External Romtec Utilities’ Control Panel i. All wiring external of the Romtec Utilities supplied Control Panel is to be supplied by the electrical contractor. ii. This includes but is not limited to the following connections: Junction box to Romtec Utilities control panel Electrical service meter to Romtec Utilities control panel Automatic transfer switch to Romtec Utilities control panel Romtec Utilities control panel to Romtec Utilities disconnect panel or enclosure Note: The electrical contractor is expected to incorporate the appropriate conduit wire sizes and abide by all state and local code requirements. d. Place Pumps at Surface Level i. Pumps (submersible) need to be accessible at surface level, and not lowered into the Wet Well prior to Romtec Utilities Personnel arriving onsite. Note: The Pumps must be at surface level as Romtec Utilities’ field technician will need to put the pump(s) through a series of mechanical and electrical checks prior to being lowered into the well. Note: If the pumps were stored in the wet well, pumps need to be brought out of the well and placed at surface level. 3. During start-up the contractor must: a. Terminate ALL Wires Connecting Romtec Utilities Supplied Control Panel to Field Devices. 5.03 START-UP TESTING & TRAINING SERVICES Rev. 2-27-18 Note: Romtec Utilities Startup Technicians are not certified electrical contractors, and thus will not be responsible for the work on any/all wire terminations. b. Provide All Wire Termination Methods NOT Supplied by Romtec Utilities i. All methods of wire terminations outside of the Romtec Utilities control panel and not supplied by Romtec Utilities are the responsibility of the electrical contractor (i.e. wire nuts, terminating lugs, etc). Note: The electrical contractor is expected to incorporate appropriate terminating methods and abide by all state and local code requirements. c. Ensure Items Required For Startup Are Readily Accessible i. The following components must be readily accessible at the time of startup. Level sensing devices Remaining items from accessory pallet (i.e. Kellems grips, cable hanger assemblies, grip eye etc.) d. Provide An Appropriately Sized Lifting Device i. The Contractor must provide an appropriately sized lifting device. If the pumps are required to be lowered into the Wet Well, the lifting device will need to be readily available throughout the duration of the Startup. Note: In addition to the lifting device, an appropriate means for connecting to the Romtec Utilities supplied grip eye tool is required (i.e. lifting strap, chain, cable, etc.). If there is not a readily available method to connect the lifting device to the grip eye, it is the responsibility of the site contractor to locate an acceptable means for connecting to, and lifting the pump(s). e. The following personnel are required to be on-site during the time of startup. i. Electrical Contractor – The Electrical Contractor needs to be present or readily available for the full extent of Romtec Utilities’ specified startup period less the day designated for personnel training. ii. Installing Contractor - Site contractor needs to be present or readily available for the full extent of Romtec Utilities specified startup period. 4. During start-up both the contractor and Romtec Utilities will: a. Verify that all structural/mechanical aspects of the system have been installed per the approved design. b. Verify the installation of all conduit and wire supplied by the electrical contractor. c. Verify that all remaining items for the lift station are present and accounted for (i.e. pumps, level sensing equipment, items from accessory pallet, etc.) d. Quality control check Romtec Utilities’ control panel. e. Verify incoming power, in addition to proper system grounding and bonding. f. Subject pumps to all required mechanical/electrical checks as stated in Romtec Utilities’ field startup report. g. Prepare pumps and level sensing for installation into the WW. h. Energize the Romtec Utilities control panel and Verify system control functionality. i. Lower the pumps and level sensing into the wet well. j. Fill the wet well with water, and verify system control functionality. k. Cycle valve vault valves if applicable. l. Perform draw down test to verify pump performance. Record pressure readings if applicable. m. Confirm all I/O for the system. n. Verify ‘Automatic’ operation for the lift station. o. Provide training for required personnel. 5. Training services 5.03 START-UP TESTING & TRAINING SERVICES Rev. 2-27-18 a. Training is provided contiguous to the start-up date. If the testing and training is not scheduled and/or completed the day following start-up, there will be additional charges for Romtec Utilities to return and complete the testing and training services. b. It is required that the main contact to be in charge of operation and maintenance of the system, through the duration of the warranty period, be identified and present at the training. This individual is responsible for troubleshooting issues with the help of Romtec Utilities. 6. Training Outline a. Mechanical System: i. Pumps, guide rails, elbows ii. Level sensors iii. Hatches iv. Valves v. Generator, odor control, metering, etc. (if included) b. Control Panel: i. Overview (front and inside panel) ii. Operating and power-up procedure iii. Back-up system operations iv. Primary level operation/lead-lag, alternations, starts/stops. v. Controller operation c. System Protection Methods/Devices: i. Seal thermal-moisture seals ii. Phase monitor and surge suppression d. Alarms e. Trouble shooting i. Hands on and who to call first 7. Scheduling Start-Up and Training a. Romtec Utilities’ requires four (4) weeks advance notice to schedule a start-up date. The pre start-up checklist included in the SSDS must also be completed two weeks prior to the requested start-up date. b. Start-up and training must be contiguous weekdays. Romtec Utilities does not schedule start- ups over Saturdays or Sundays. c. The individual responsible for signing off that the system is complete and functioning must be identified prior to start-up and training. This individual is required to be present at the completion of training for the official sign off that initiates the warranty. If the individual or their designated representative is not present for sign off, then Romtec Utilities will assume that the system has been approved unless informed otherwise within (2) business days. d. If Romtec Utilities is providing services from a generator or pump supplier to the customer during start-up and training, these vendors will only be available the same days that Romtec Utilities’ personnel are on-site. e. The technicians for systems not supplied by Romtec Utilities must also be available on the same days that Romtec Utilities’ personnel are on-site. This could apply to pumps or a generator that was supplied by others but incorporated into the Romtec Utilities system design. 8. Operation & Maintenance Manual a. The Romtec Utilities Operation & Maintenance (O&M) Manual will be delivered after start-up of the system. b. This document contains the as-built drawings, component operation & maintenance manuals, and manufacturer warranties for the associated mechanical and electrical components. 5.03 START-UP TESTING & TRAINING SERVICES Rev. 2-27-18 c. The electronic copy of the Romtec Utilities Operation & Maintenance Manual will be provided to the customer at start-up of the system. d. Requests for hard copies will result in an additional fee. PRE START-UP CHECKLIST This document ensures that all necessary components have been installed and that your system is prepared and ready for start-up. This form and associated photos must be completed by the customer and returned before Romtec Utilities will schedule or confirm any Start-up Testing and Training dates. 1. MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION REVIEW A.DO NOT lower the pumps into the wet well without the Romtec Utilities Start-up Technician.Store the pumps in a dry location until start-up. Have the pumps been lowered into the wet well? Yes No B.Is the wet well clean and free of any debris? Yes No C.Have the influent line(s) and force main been flushed of all debris? Yes No D.Do you have permission from the appropriate parties to pump water out of the system? Yes No E.Discharge pipes connected to elbows? Yes No The Romtec Utilities Start-up Technician will oversee the contractor lowering the pumps into the wet well during start- up, in accordance with the pump warranty. If you lower the pumps on your own, you risk voiding the warranty. Notes: Notes: Notes: Notes: Notes: Wet Well Discharge Pipes F.Discharge pipes are plumb and connected to discharge pipe brackets? Yes No Notes: G.Discharge pipes are connected to the force main? Yes No Notes: Send this completed checklist to your Romtec Utilities project manager. H.Valve Vault is connected to force main? Yes No Notes: Valve Vault (If applicable) I.Upstream valves are open for wet well discharge? Yes No Notes: Project Name: 1 of 6 PRE START-UP CHECKLIST 1. MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION REVIEW (continued) J.Stainless steel pump guide bars installed? Yes No Notes: Guide Bars K.Guide bar brackets are installed and tight? Yes No Notes: A.Have the conduits been installed between the wet well and the main control panel (at least one(1) for each pump cable and one (1) for the level control device)? Yes No 2. ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION REVIEW Note: High Voltage in use. Only licensed and qualified personnel should perform electrical services before and during start-up. Notes: B.Please confirm the size and quantity of conduits installed for the pumps and level control: Pumps Level Control Size: Quantity: Size: Quantity: C.The pump power cables will be pulled through the conduit during start-up by the contractor’selectrician with the Romtec Utilities start-up technician present. Please confirm. Yes No Level control devices will be set at the appropriate level during start-up. DO NOT install the level control devices.Notes: D.Have the interconnecting wires been pulled between the control panel and any intermediate junction box (if applicable)? Yes No Notes: E.Have the meter base and main disconnect been installed and inspected? Yes No Notes: F.Have the panel power wires been installed between the main disconnect, automatic transfer switch (if applicable), and the control panel? Yes No Notes: 2 of 6 PRE START-UP CHECKLIST 2. ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION REVIEW (continued) G.Is the control panel able to be energized? Yes No Notes: H.Has the power company energized the meter? Yes No Permanent utility power to the job site is required in order to perform start-up, testing, and training.Notes: I.Is all necessary field wiring complete? Yes No Romtec Utilities will charge for the time required to complete any field wiring.Notes: 3. GENERATOR (if applicable) A.Has the generator been delivered and installed? Yes No Notes: B.Is the fuel for the generator on site? Yes No Notes: C.Has the automatic transfer switch been wired into the electrical system? Yes No Notes: D.If the generator has been supplied by others, will the manufacturer’s representative be on site for start-up? Yes No Notes: 4. COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT (if applicable) A.Has all required communication equipment (radio, phone line, cellular, etc.) been installed and confirmed as operational? Yes No Notes: B.Will the system integrator for communication be present on site for start-up? Yes No Notes: 3 of 6 PRE START-UP CHECKLIST 5. WATER AVAILABILITY Note: DO NOT fill the wet well before directed to do so by Romtec Utilities Start-up Technician. A.Is enough water available to fill the wet well two (2) times? Yes No Notes: 6. REQUIRED PHOTOS Note: The following photos must be provided with this checklist. A.Photo of the inside of the control panel (specifically the terminal blocks at the base of the panel). Yes No Notes: B.Photo of the inside of the control panel from approximately 5 feet away. Yes No Notes: C.Photo of the inside of the disconnect panel (if applicable) from approximately 5 feet away. Yes No Notes: D.Photo of the inside of the wet well. Yes No Notes: E.Photo of the inside of the valve vault (if applicable). Yes No Notes: F.Photo of the inside of the meter vault (if applicable). Yes No Notes: 7. PUMPS A.If the pumps have been supplied by others, will the manufacturer’s representative be on site during start-up? Yes No Notes: B.The pumps are required to be on site when the Romtec Utilities Start-up Technician arrives. Please confirm that the pumps will be on site. Yes No Notes: 4 of 6 PRE START-UP CHECKLIST 7. PUMPS (continued) C.Lifting equipment must be available at all times during start-up, in case the pumps need to be lowered and lifted multiple times for troubleshooting. Please confirm lifting equipment will be available. Yes No Notes: 8. REQUIRED PERSONNEL DURING START-UP AND TESTING Note: It is the contractor’s responsibility to invite and schedule all appropriate parties, including the individual responsible for signing to acknowledge the system’s completion. Please identify which individual is the one responsible for final sign off below. Name: Safety Manager Company: Phone: Email: Name: Site Engineer’s Representative Company: Phone: Email: Name: Owner’s Representative Company: Phone: Email: Name: Site Electrician Company: Phone: Email: Name: Main Operation and Maintenance contact for the duration of the warranty Company: Phone: Email: 5 of 6 PRE START-UP CHECKLIST Additional Notes: By completing the Pre Start-up Checklist document, you acknowledge the following: 1.Romtec Utilities is providing its customer with two (2) contiguous days for start-up, testing, and training (unless another timeframe was previously negotiated). 2.If Romtec Utilities comes to the site at the agreed to date and finds that the site and/or required personnel are not ready to perform start-up, Romtec Utilities will charge for another trip and the time (two days) on the job site to perform start-up services. 3.The system warranty is not provided to the customer and/or owner until system start-up, testing, and training have been completed by Romtec Utilities. 4.By signing this document, you agree to reimburse Romtec Utilities for any costs incurred by Romtec Utilities or by a related vendor due to on-site delays caused by inaccurate representations of the info above. Typical costs attributed to delays include labor, travel and lodging. However, this list is not exhaustive, and other costs may apply. 5.Please send this completed checklist and the required photos to Romtec Utilities a minimum of two (2) weeks before the scheduled start-up and training dates. Proposed start-up and training dates: Signature Date 6 of 6 Start-up report to be completed by Romtec Utilities start-up technician 1. STRUCTURAL / MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION A.Are all the components for the wet well and valve vault installed as approved in the design? Yes No PROJECT NAME: DATE: B. Discharge connection level tight? Yes No C. Guide bars vertical and tight? Yes No D.Pump lifting cable free of damage and connected securely? Yes No E.Pump station free of debris? Yes No F.Manual valves cycled from open to closed? Yes No G.Are all the components for the wet well and valve vault installed as approved in the design? Yes No H.All drain backs completed back to wet well? Yes No I.Are all the components for the wet well and valve vault installed as approved in the design? Yes No N/A N/A N/A N/A START-UP REPORT SITE REVIEW 1 of 19 START-UP REPORT SITE REVIEW 2. ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION A.Contractor who installed the conduits and wiring between the system components: B.Have the conduits been installed between the wet well and the main control panel minimum (one (1) for each pump, one (1) for level control)? Yes No C.Have the “pump power” wires been pulled between the main control panel and the wet well? Yes No D.Have the level control signal wires been pulled between the pump control panel and the wet well? Yes No E.Have the level control wires been landed on the appropriate terminals inside the control panel? Yes No F.Have the panel power wires been installed between the main disconnect, automatic transfer switch (if present) and the pump control panel? Yes No G.Have the meter and main disconnect been installed and inspected? Yes No H.Has the power company energized the meter? Yes No I.Have all potting kits for flow meters or other equipment been installed? Yes No N/A J.Junction boxes, conduits, seals installed correctly? Yes No 2 of 19 2. ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION (CONTINUED) K.Is the system properly grounded and bonded? Yes No L.Are the working clearance requirements maintained as per code in regards to spacing around and in front of electrical equipment? Yes No M.Is there any electrical equipment installed within a classified space that is not rated for that classification? Yes No N.Has disconnect panel been installed? Yes No N/A 3. WATER AVAILABILITY A.Is there enough water available for a minimum of ½ hour of pumping? Yes No B.Do you have permission to discharge water from the wet well? Yes No 4.PRIMARY LEVEL SETTINGS: (Distances measured from floor in feet) A.High/High level alarm: B.High level alarm: C.Lag/second pump start: D.Lead pump start: E.Lag/second pump stop: F.Lead pump stop: G.Low level alarm: H. Secondary level sensors present? Yes No START-UP REPORT SITE REVIEW 3 of 19 START-UP REPORT PUMPS Start-up report to be completed by Romtec Utilities start-up technician PROJECT NAME: DATE: Pump#: 1 of Pump Description (if needed): 1.VISUAL INSPECTION A.Were the pumps and/or cables found to be damaged during inspection? Yes No B.Was the seal chamber full of oil (if possible to check based on pump style)? Yes No N/A C.Does impeller spin freely when rotated by hand? Yes No D.Impeller rotation: CW CCW Intake Discharge Viewed from: 4 of 15 2.ELECTRICAL INSPECTION A.Are cord grips properly installed? Yes No 1.(1)~(2) 2.(2)~(3) 3.(3)~(1) B.Resistance of motor and cable: 1.Thermal) 2.Seal Test Up) 3.Seal Test Down) C.Sensor loop resistance: Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω N/A START-UP REPORT PUMPS 1.(1)~GRD 2.(2)~GRD 3.(3)~GRD 1.T1~T2 2.T2~T3 3.T3~T1 E.Volts, pump operating system G.Abnormal noise/vibration? Yes No 3.DRAW DOWN TESTING DIAMETER GAL/FT. 4 94 5 146.8 6 211.5 8 376 10 587.5 A.FT B.GPM C.Does the above meet the approved scope of supply? Yes No D.Pressure readings available? Yes No 5 of 15 Pump#: 1 of 2.ELECTRICAL INSPECTION (continued) D.Insulation to ground (should be > 10MΩ): F.Amps, pump operating 1.T1 2.T2 3.T3 MΩ MΩ MΩ V V V A A A 4. PUMP DATA A.Model Number B.Serial Number C.Horsepower D.Full Load Amps E.Impeller START-UP REPORT PUMPS Start-up report to be completed by Romtec Utilities start-up technician PROJECT NAME: DATE: Pump#: 2 of Pump Description (if needed): 1.VISUAL INSPECTION A.Were the pumps and/or cables found to be damaged during inspection? Yes No B.Was the seal chamber full of oil (if possible to check based on pump style)? Yes No N/A C.Does impeller spin freely when rotated by hand? Yes No D.Impeller rotation: CW CCW Intake Discharge Viewed from: 4 of 15 2.ELECTRICAL INSPECTION A.Are cord grips properly installed? Yes No 1.(1)~(2) 2.(2)~(3) 3.(3)~(1) B.Resistance of motor and cable: 1.Thermal) 2.Seal Test Up) 3.Seal Test Down) C.Sensor loop resistance: Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω Ω N/A START-UP REPORT PUMPS 1.(1)~GRD 2.(2)~GRD 3.(3)~GRD 1.T1~T2 2.T2~T3 3.T3~T1 E.Volts, pump operating system G.Abnormal noise/vibration? Yes No 3.DRAW DOWN TESTING DIAMETER GAL/FT. 4 94 5 146.8 6 211.5 8 376 10 587.5 A.FT B.GPM C.Does the above meet the approved scope of supply? Yes No D.Pressure readings available? Yes No 5 of 15 Pump#: 2 of 2.ELECTRICAL INSPECTION (continued) D.Insulation to ground (should be > 10MΩ): F.Amps, pump operating 1.T1 2.T2 3.T3 MΩ MΩ MΩ V V V A A A 4. PUMP DATA A.Model Number B.Serial Number C.Horsepower D.Full Load Amps E.Impeller START-UP REPORT CONTROL PANEL Yes No N/A Start-up report to be completed by Romtec Utilities start-up technician PROJECT NAME: DATE: 1.COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT A.Has all required communication equipment (radio, phone, cellular) been installed and tested and operational? 2. LEVEL SENSING 1.Type 2.Mfg. 3.Model A.Primary Level Control B.Secondary Level Sensing present? Yes No C.Are all level sensing devices installed as designed and properly documented? Yes No 3. PHYSICAL INSPECTION 1.L1~L2 2.L2~L3 3.L1~L3 A.Have all of the terminals and lugs been checked for tightness? Yes No B.Are the schematics accurate? Yes No 4.OPERATIONAL INSPECTION A.Supply voltage, pumps off V V V B.Does this meet the approved scope of supply? Yes No 6 of 15 START-UP REPORT CONTROL PANEL 1.Voltage: 2.Delay: 3.% Imbalance: C.Phase monitor settings: 4. OPERATIONAL INSPECTION (continued) D.Starter Type/Mfg./Model: E.O.L. Type/Setting: 1.Amp F.Do pump(s) shut down and lockout when sensor lead(s) are disconnected? Yes No G.Have VFD’s been programmed and do they work correctly? Yes No N/A I.Has controller been programmed and is it working correctly? Yes No N/A J.Does the primary level control work correctly? Yes No K.Does the high level warning work correctly? Yes No L.Does the redundant level control system work correctly? Yes No N/A M.Does flow meter work correctly? Yes No N/A 7 of 15 START-UP REPORT CONTROL PANEL 4.OPERATIONAL INSPECTION (continued) N.Are the grounding rings installed for the flow meter? Yes No N/A O.Has the autodialer been powered up and does it work correctly? Yes No N/A P.Has all SCADA/external monitoring I/O or dry contacts been checked out and verified? Yes No Q.Have all communications issues been tested and signed off by owner/contractor? Yes No 1.Type of communication: 2.SCADA dialer: 8 of 15 START-UP REPORT DISCONNECT PANEL/JUNCTION BOX Start-up report to be completed by Romtec Utilities start-up technician PROJECT NAME: DATE: A.Are all wire terminations tight and connected securely? Yes No 1. INSTALLATION B.Are the Meltric connectors installed correctly? Yes No N/A C.Are all wire terminations properly protected from water instrusion? Yes No D.Is drain back properly installed? Yes No E.Are the seal offs properly installed? Yes No F.Are there any signs of water instrusion during the time of start-up? Yes No 9 of 15 N/A N/A START-UP REPORT DISCONNECT PANEL/JUNCTION BOX 2.TESTING A.Is the flood alarm float operational within the junction box? Yes No N/A B.Is the disconnect panel functioning properly as a safe means of disconnecting power from the pumps and level sensing? Yes No N/A C.Is the junction box operating as intended and in good order for future maintenance? Yes No N/A 10 of 15 START-UP REPORT GENERATOR Start-up report to be completed by Romtec Utilities start-up technician PROJECT NAME: DATE: A.Does the generator appear to have been installed and wired correctly? Yes No 1. INSTALLATION B.Has the automatic transfer switch been wired into the electrical system? Yes No C.Has the generator control been wired into the electrical system? Yes No A.Is a representative from the generator manufacturer on-site to perform the start-up and testing of the generator? Yes No 2. TESTING B.Is the fuel for the generator on-site? Yes No C.For a portable generator configuration, has it been tested with the system? Yes No N/A 11 of 15 START-UP REPORT ODOR CONTROL Start-up report to be completed by Romtec Utilities start-up technician PROJECT NAME: DATE: Yes No 1.INSTALLATION A.Has the odor control system been installed as per the approved submittal? B.Are the valves operational and open where necessary for proper operation? Yes No C.Is the pump operational? Yes No B.Does the odor control system operate automatically as designed when the lift station is operating? Yes No 2.TESTING A.Is there fluid in the storage tank for testing? Yes No N/A (Gravity feed) 12 of 15 START-UP REPORT TRAINING SIGN-IN WARRANTY Romtec Utilities limited warranty is clearly defined within Romtec Utilities’ Scope of Supply and Design Submittal and should be reviewed by all parties who will maintain the system throughout the warranty period. Please note that Romtec Utilities will help to assist all warranty troubleshooting over the phone. All on-site troubleshooting will be the responsibility of the maintaining entity until it is determined that goods have been incorrectly manufactured or are defective. Once any claims are established, Romtec Utilities will proceed as described within the limited warranty policy. 1 of 2 START-UP REPORT TRAINING SIGN-IN PROJECT NAME: DATE: Romtec Utilities Advisor: 1.Fill out completely to certify your training sign-in Name: Title: Company: Phone: Email: Name: Title: Company: Phone: Email: Name: Title: Company: Phone: Email: Name: Title: Company: Phone: Email: Name: Title: Company: Phone: Email: Name: Title: Company: Phone: Email: Name: Title: Company: Phone: Email: Name: Title: Company: Phone: Email: 2 of 2 START-UP REPORT NOTES Start-up report to be completed by Romtec Utilities start-up technician PROJECT NAME: DATE: 13 of 15 START-UP REPORT APPROVAL Start-up report to be completed by Romtec Utilities start-up technician PROJECT NAME: DATE: 1.Romtec Utilities technician performed all of the following activities: A.Verify electrical supply voltage. B.Field check control panel. C.Perform start-up procedure for pumps. D.Set level controls per approved scope of supply. E.Testing of pumping rate to the expected performance curve. F.Field check back-up power (if applicable). G.Placed the system in “Auto” and verified that the system functions normally. H.Any remaining unresolved punch list items are noted in the preceding notes page. I.All parties agree that Romtec Utilities has fulfilled all requirements above for the system. The system is fully approved and commissioned. 2.The parties listed below agree that the Romtec Utilities technician performed all of the above work as defined in the approved Scope of Supply and Design Submittal: A.Romtec Utilities Start-up Technician: Name: Signature: Company: Phone: B.Romtec Utilities’ Direct Customer Respresentative Name: Signature: Company: Phone: 14 of 15 3. Start-up Attendees: START-UP REPORT APPROVAL A.Contractor Representative: Name: Phone: B.Electrical Contractor: Name: Phone: C.Generator Start-up Technician: Name: Phone: D.Pump Start-up Technician: Name: Phone: E.Owner’s Representative: Name: Phone: 4. Main contact for operation and maintenance through duration of the warranty period: Name: Company: Phone: Note: This person is responsible for troubleshooting with Romtec Utilities over the phone in the event of a warranty issue during the warranty period beginning after training is completed. 15 of 15 6. WARRANTY This section is structured as follows: 6.01 WARRANTY 6.02 STRUCTURAL & MECHANICAL DISCLAIMERS 6.03 ELECTRICAL DISCLAIMERS 6.04 SERVICES DISCLAIMERS 6.01 WARRANTY Rev. 2-27-18 Romtec Utilities Limited Warranty Romtec Utilities, Inc. (herein referred to as “Romtec Utilities”) warrants that the equipment supplied will be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service, when used in accordance with the Romtec Utilities procedures as set forth in the Scope of Supply and Design Submittal (SSDS). The warranty period extends for one year from the date of acceptance. Acceptance is defined as the date Romtec Utilities’ “Start-Up” report is completed. However, if start-up is delayed for any reason, the warranty period will be one year and six months from delivery of the wet well. If the customer delays delivery of the wet well for any reason after agreeing to a delivery date, the warranty period will start from the date that the wet well was ready to deliver. The obligation of Romtec Utilities under this warranty is limited to replacing or repairing any defective part (failure of other manufacturer supplied components will be addressed according to the individual manufacturer’s warranty, the periods of which, and the manufacturer’s obligations therein may differ from Romtec Utilities’ Warranty). This warranty extends to Romtec Utilities’ direct customer (as named in the Romtec Utilities Purchase Order), herein called “customer”. The warranty is transferred to the end owner once the system is accepted as complete. 1. Components resold or supplied with Romtec Utilities materials Certain components are warrantable directly by the original manufacturer for periods between 90 days and 5 years. Replacement for, repair or refund of defective workmanship or material under normal use shall be remunerated directly with the manufacturer of the component. Examples of components would be generators, manual cranes, pumps, pump controls, valves, etc. 2. Warranty voidable Romtec Utilities’ representative must be on-site for oversight of assembly during installation of the wet well. Wet Well installation that is performed without the presence of a Romtec Utilities representative shall void all warranties related to the wet well structure and its performance. Start-up that is performed without the presence of a Romtec Utilities representative shall void all warranties. 3. Claims of defective manufacture Claims that the merchandise was incorrectly manufactured or that is defective in any way must be made directly to Romtec Utilities on a product-by-product basis. All claims must be made within 72 hours of the defective condition, or the time when the defect should have been discovered, whichever is earlier. All claims must include the following: a. A detailed description of the specific problem, failure, or other event giving rise to the claim b. Supporting photographs or videos c. Specific location d. Names and phone numbers of individuals who can substantiate the claim, but who do not work for the owner or contractor 4. Failure of system These systems pump all types of water containing all kinds of materials. Sometimes pumps clog or power is lost and the pump station will fail to operate. If it is a warranty issue, Romtec Utilities will repair and/or replace per the terms of this warranty. If however the pumps are simply “clogged” or the power is simply lost, Romtec Utilities will advise that it is not a warranty issue. a. Romtec Utilities has not performed any type of water analysis relative to this specific project. As such, we do not warranty the overall system design and/or the pumps for aspects that we could not have predicted; i.e. Pump clogging due to a high concentration of solids, level control and/or pumping problems due to a high concentration of grease, etc b. System function is a complex combination of parameters. A system failure does not constitute a warranty issue. In order to make a warranty claim follow this procedure: c. Trouble-shoot the problem with the help of Romtec Utilities over the phone. If you cannot provide trouble shooting assistance, Romtec Utilities can recommend a local company to provide trouble-shooting assistance at your cost. d. Once the cause of the failure has been determined a warranty claim can be made. Warranty claims extend to defective parts only. Romtec Utilities does not warranty trouble shooting, service calls, installation or re-installation associated with defective parts or their failure. Romtec Utilities will repair and/or replace per the terms of this warranty. 6.01 WARRANTY Rev. 2-27-18 5. Action in event of established claim In the event it is determined that goods have been incorrectly manufactured or are defective, the liability of Romtec Utilities shall be limited to, at its option, repair or replacement of the goods. Romtec Utilities also reserves the right to establish reasonable time limits for completion of any specific installation tasks resulting from the replacement of defective merchandise. 6. No third party claims Under no circumstances shall Romtec Utilities be responsible for any damage claims by any party other than claims by Romtec Utilities direct customers. 7. Release and hold harmless Contractor releases and agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold Romtec Utilities harmless from and against any and all claims, demands, actions, and causes of action for any matters arising out of or connected with the materials whereby the contractor is responsible for errors or omissions. 8. Warranty of individual components a. Romtec Utilities assembles the system both from components manufactured by Romtec Utilities and components manufactured by others. b. If any Romtec Utilities manufactured part is found to be defective and/or has been manufactured in error relative to the SSDS, Romtec Utilities will repair and/or replace that part only at Romtec’s expense. Note: Parts not manufactured by Romtec Utilities will be repaired and/or replaced per the original equipment manufacturer’s warranty. c. Romtec Utilities does not offer, nor will Romtec Utilities accept any charges and/or claims by anyone relative to delays stemming from the repair and/or replacement of a warranty item. 6.02 STRUCTURAL & MECHANICAL DISCLAIMERS Rev. 2-27-18 1. Romtec Utilities is not responsible for structural or leak testing a. The customer is responsible for any on-site water or vacuum testing conducted on underground vessels. Romtec Utilities recommends any and all testing of the underground structures occur prior to backfill. The recommended test methods for precast concrete are per ASTM C497-05 (Section 8) Hydrostatic Test Method or (Section 9) Permeability Test Method. b. Repair of manhole products is allowable if necessary because of damage during handling. The repair will be acceptable if the repaired products conform to the requirements of the ASTM C478-09 specification. Romtec Utilities must be notified if any repairs are necessary. 2. Any leak found during or after the installation of the Romtec Utilities system is the responsibility of the installing contractor. a. Romtec Utilities has made every effort in the design of the system to help the installing contractor ensure that the structures are water tight. b. The Romtec Utilities concrete structures design includes multiple layers of leak proofing at the joints between the base, barrels and top slab as shown on the mechanical and structural drawings. These layers typically include a combination of butyl sealant, gaskets and joint wrap. c. The Romtec Utilities system may include Kor-N-Seals, Link Seals, or other pipe boot products. These are used to seal between the cored hole and piping entering the concrete structure. d. Romtec Utilities also requires that all concrete joints and penetrations be grouted by the installing contractor after installation of the system 3. Concrete structures leak for many reasons during and after installation. a. Concrete bases must be installed on a compacted level foundation to ensure that all joints between concrete sections are level and evenly supported as the wet well and/or vault is stacked. A leaning structure will result in many problems, including leaking at the joints. b. Typically leaks in the structures originate at cored holes for pipe penetrations. The lift station piping and the cored holes in the wet well and/or vault(s) have been designed to enter and exit with the piping parallel to the cored hole. In other words, the piping is meant to go straight through the cored holes at the same orientation as the hole. If the piping is brought through the cored holes at any angle, there is a risk of leaking at that location. This may be unavoidable in the field for reasons outside of Romtec Utilities control. It is the installing contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the penetrations in the wet well are water tight at completion of the system installation. c. Areas of high ground water will test the water tightness of all joints and penetrations in the system. Installing contractors should take extra measures to ensure that the system is water tight when high ground water is known to be present in the area. d. High ground water can be seasonal. As such, the contractor and owner should be checking the concrete structures for leaks during the wet winter months. This is especially true after a dry summer installation. e. A leak in an Ameron lined wet well can compound the problem that a leak creates. Water from the leak could get between the liner and the concrete and create separation requiring repair. A lining such as Ameron also conceals the initial point of leakage as the water may come through the lining at a point far from where the water is actually coming in from the outside. Note: Romtec Utilities may have supplied the lining in the wet well and the installation of the lining. However, Romtec Utilities is not responsible for the cost associated with the lining repair. 4. Precast Concrete Inspections a. The inspection of precast concrete must be done at the precaster if required, not the job site. In other words, anyone who wants to inspect the precast concrete needs to make that inspection on the yard of the precaster prior to delivery to the job site. 5. Linings & Coatings of Concrete a. Many concrete coatings and linings require significant cure times (weeks). Romtec Utilities is not responsible for construction delays due to lining/coating cure times. Installation before the curing process is complete voids the warranty provided by the manufacturer and Romtec Utilities for performance of the lining/coating. b. Any damage to linings and coatings during freight to the site or during construction is the responsibility of the installing contractor to repair or replace. 6.03 ELECTRICAL DISCLAIMERS Rev. 2-27-18 1. Supply of the generator may or may not be part of the Romtec Utilities scope of supply. a. If the generator is existing or supplied by others, it is the responsibility of the owner and/or their representatives to verify that it will integrate with the lift station design and specifically any receptacles and/or tie-ins associated with the control panel. Example: All parties are present for lift station start-up and testing and the existing portable generator power cord plug-in does not fit the Romtec Utilities control panel generator receptacle. This would be the responsibility of the owner and/or their representatives, not Romtec Utilities. b. Romtec Utilities is not responsible for verifying that generators that are existing or supplied by others will seamlessly integrate with the lift station. Romtec Utilities will review the generator information if provided to help with the lift station integration. c. Generator start-up and testing must be scheduled concurrent with the lift station start-up and training in order to ensure that all lift station running scenarios are tested and approved. A change order will be required if Romtec Utilities start-up technician is required to return at a later date to complete testing of the lift station with the generator. d. Any generator training required will be performed concurrent with the start-up and testing of the generator. The owner/contractor is responsible to have all key personnel on-site for the scheduled training. Any training that is requested outside of the original scheduled time will result in additional charges. 2. If a generator is part of the overall lift station design for this project the following exclusions apply: a. All engine piping, hangers, flanges, gaskets, bolts, insulation, and other materials associated with the exhaust system installation are supplied by others unless specifically listed in the scope of supply. b. All engine fuel and fuel piping for supply, return, venting, valves, coolers, filters, pumps, fittings, fuel storage tank & sender are supplied by others unless specifically listed in the scope of supply. c. All engine wiring, field terminations of wiring, and lugs are supplied by others other than those specifically listed in the scope of supply. d. Permitting, offloading, placement and Installation is not included. Equipment maybe shipped in an enclosed truck. Arrangement and means of off-loading the generator is the responsibility of the owner/contractor. 3. All communication devices for remote annunciation or system control and data acquisition (SCADA) are to be configured, tested, and maintained by owner/contractor unless otherwise noted. a. Romtec Utilities will install customer specified communication devices in our control panel if requested. b. Radio site surveys, antenna mast and antenna mounting is by owner or contractor. Antenna reception is the responsibility of the owner or contractor as well. 4. Romtec Utilities will configure/program the supplied control panel to communicate with customers’ specified modem and SCADA software when specifically listed as a service in the Romtec Utilities Scope of Supply and Design Submittal. a. Master SCADA, radio programming and site surveys are not provided by Romtec Utilities unless otherwise agreed upon as part of the overall project. 5. Any testing/verification of SCADA signals needs to be performed within the start-up and testing period as defined in the Romtec Utilities Scope and Design Submittal. In order for the testing/verification to be performed Romtec Utilities requires the following: a. Contact information for the SCADA integrator to be provided a minimum of two weeks prior to the start-up date. b. SCADA integrator must be scheduled and available during the agreed upon start-up, testing and training days for the lift station. c. A fully documented and complete list of signals that will be required to integrate the lift station into the SCADA system. 6. Only those connection points required for Romtec Utilities’ equipment including defined tie points or as purchased, will be provided. Customer will be responsible for all other connections. 6.04 SERVICES DISCLAIMERS Rev. 2-27-18 1. The Romtec Utilities Scope of Supply & Design Submittal supersedes all prior design and bid documents related to the project as follows: a. Romtec Utilities agrees only to the supply and design described in this SSDS. b. Romtec Utilities expressly states that this document does not meet, and Romtec Utilities does not agree to meet any agency standard, any other specification or any other document and/or statement describing the project. This document supersedes and makes null and void any other document or statement from any party, including Romtec Utilities’ own prior documents and/or statements, as related to the system described in this SSDS. In other words, once the SSDS is approved and Romtec Utilities is released to produce the system, the direct customer has agreed that the system design meets all requirements for the project. 2. Romtec Utilities is the equipment supplier only is not responsible for determining the methods and equipment used in site preparation or installation a. Romtec Utilities is not a subcontractor and does not perform any installation or construction tasks at the project site. Romtec Utilities staff at the project site are there strictly to observe and advise. b. Romtec Utilities does not provide Construction equipment, materials and labor for any construction aspect of the project including but not limited to unloading trucks, traffic control, site safety, securing materials delivered to project site, excavation, shoring, dewatering, sub-base rock, backfill material, installation of supplied systems and components, piping to and from pump station and piping between pump station systems (i.e. between wet well and valve vault), electrical conduit and wiring (except wires attached to supplied components), concrete poured in place, crushed rock, asphalt paving, site lighting, signage, fencing, bollards, site drainage control, etc. c. All methods and equipment used at the site are the responsibility of the installing contractor. The contractor bears sole responsibility for installation of products manufactured by Romtec Utilities. d. All electrical installation work on the project site must be performed by a licensed electrical contractor. e. If Romtec Utilities’ direct customer has hired a sub-contractor, Romtec Utilities will communicate with that sub-contractor through a representative of the direct customer. Romtec Utilities will not direct and/or advise any sub-contractor without the direct customer’s involvement. f. Romtec Utilities makes no representation as to how long it will take to prepare the site, install the system, connect the system to other equipment not supplied by Romtec Utilities, or to start-up and complete the system. 3. Romtec Utilities is not responsible for the review or understanding of this document by the customer, the customer’s representatives or agents, engineers and installation contractor/subcontractors a. Romtec Utilities supplies this document exclusively to the direct customer (the entity signing the Romtec Utilities purchase order). Any other party reviewing any part of this document is informed that the information within it is Romtec Utilities’ communication with the customer and no other party. b. Romtec Utilities is not responsible for the distribution of this document and/or misunderstandings, errors and costs that arise from an incomplete understanding by any party of the information contained in this document. c. It is not Romtec Utilities’ responsibility to determine the suitability of the system to the project’s site plan, electrical plan, influent line profiles, force main profiles and other documents. Romtec Utilities makes no claim and provides no guarantee that any of the products to be supplied by Romtec Utilities will fit on project’s site or within any building associated with the project. 4. Delivery, installation & start-up delays, rescheduling and/or cancellations a. When the customer schedules delivery of the system and schedules Romtec Utilities and its suppliers to be on-site for the installation and/or start-up and training, the customer agrees to additional charges if any of the following occur: i. Shipment or on-site services cancellation ore rescheduling within 2 weeks of the scheduled date. 6.04 SERVICES DISCLAIMERS Rev. 2-27-18 ii. If Romtec Utilities discovers upon arrival that the customer is not ready to construct or start-up. Romtec Utilities personnel will leave the site and reschedule at a later date for an additional charge. iii. If the customer chooses to cancel or reschedule the construction, or start up, and/or changes the date after Romtec Utilities and/or its vendor(s) have purchased tickets for travel, etc. there will be an additional charge. c. Romtec Utilities is not responsible for delivery delays caused by the shipping vendor. This includes if the shipping vendor fails to meet the delivery window that they have communicated to the customer, no matter the reason. Any unloading and/or construction delays and their associated costs can be resolved between the customer and the shipping vendor. d. Romtec Utilities is not responsible for any claims made by trucking companies who claim to have been delayed on the job site. The customer must be absolutely ready to unload the minute the truck arrives. In other words, the crane and/or other lifting devices must be ready to work as soon as the truck arrives. 5. Performance Characteristics and Start-Up. Note: Start-up services are only supplied by Romtec Utilities if included in the proposal and subsequent purchase order. a. The lift station is a sophisticated device that can be operated in many ways. The Romtec Utilities SSDS defines Romtec Utilities’ approach to the operation of the lift station. While, there are many ways to vary and/or adjust “operational parameters” within the overall lift station, Romtec Utilities is only prepared to start-up per its own parameters (as specified in the design criteria included in the SSDS). b. During start-up, Romtec Utilities is completely in charge. Romtec Utilities’ start-up technician will start-up and “prove” the station per the approved Romtec Utilities SSDS. After the lift station is accepted other parties may choose to adjust and/or vary the operational parameters to suit their specific preference. Romtec Utilities will not be responsible for problems arising from any adjustments or variations by other parties post start-up. c. If more time is required of any Romtec Utilities supplier (pumps, generator, etc.) beyond that outlined in this SSDS, the customer must order it directly from that supplier, not Romtec Utilities. 6. System warranty may be withheld for the following reasons a. Romtec Utilities will withhold or delay warranty if the system is operated in any way other than defined by the approved Romtec Utilities Scope of Supply and Design Submittal. Romtec Utilities will not warranty a system that is being started and tested under temporary power such as a generator. i. It is not Romtec Utilities responsibility to ensure that all utilities have been installed that are necessary to operate the system. ii. Romtec Utilities is not liable for any issues encountered by starting and operating the system in any manner that is different than the approved design. While the system may be designed to operate under temporary power, the initial start-up, testing and troubleshooting of any issues must be done under the permanent power source. b. Romtec Utilities may also withhold and/or delay warranty for other operational reasons identified before or during start-up including but not limited to: i. The entire system is not installed. ii. The pumping conditions for start-up and testing do not mimic the operational pumping conditions. The elevations, lengths and sizes of crucial components such as the force main were constructed differently then as provided to Romtec Utilities. In other words, the system was designed for specific elevations of the force main discharge, force main length, force main size and the actual conditions in the field are different. iii. The make-up of the influent water is not what was designed for. In other words, the system was designed for household wastewater and the actual influent has grease, fuel wash-down, landfill leachate, solids such as Swiffer pads and baby wipes, or other compounds not previously expressed to Romtec Utilities. c. The Romtec Utilities Limited Warranty will not be in place until after the system owner or the owner’s designated operator have participated in and passed the operation and maintenance training supplied by Romtec Utilities, unless Romtec Utilities has not started the system. It is vital that these personnel attend the entire session. If the personnel leave before training completion, 6.04 SERVICES DISCLAIMERS Rev. 2-27-18 additional training requested will be quoted and ordered under a new and separate quote and service order. d.Romtec Utilities reserves the right to withhold the system warranty if the Romtec Utilities start-upservices are waived and/or canceled. If Romtec Utilities elects to provide warranty for the systemstarted up by others, Romtec Utilities may elect to come to the site to confirm that all aspects areworking correctly. If for any reason an exception is allowed and there is no start-up and training, Romtec Utilities will keep the cost for start-up services. Note: Romtec Utilities strongly advises against starting the system without the Romtec Utilitiesstart-up technician. Simple troubleshooting issues that could have been easily fixed by the start- up technician can turn into much larger problems. These problems may not be covered under thewarranty due to the fact that they could be stemming from the unsupervised starting of thesystem. 7.Start-up after the warranty expires a.Romtec Utilities start-up, testing and training services are included at no additional cost if theseservices are performed within 18 months of the delivery, or deliverability of the system per itsaccepted purchase order. If start-up services are required after this period they will not be free and/or included as part of the accepted purchase order. Instead they will be quoted and orderedunder a new and separate quote and service order. 8.Buy America Materials a.Unless notified by the customer, Romtec sources materials made around the world. “Buy America” requirements must be communicated to Romtec prior to signing a purchase order or achange order will be issued.